Technical Manual

COPYRIGHT
EUROPLEX TECHNOLOGIES.
Company Web Site address: www.europlex.com
Europlex Technologies [Ireland] Ltd.
Europlex Technologies [UK] Ltd.
Clonshaugh Industrial Estate,
Clonshaugh, Dublin 17, Ireland.
Tel: +353 - 1 - 2500500
Fax: +353 - 1 - 2500590
e-mail: [email protected]
Unit 11, Malmesbury Business Park,
Malmesbury SN16 9JU, Wiltshire, England.
Tel: +44 - 1666 - 825430
Fax: +44 - 1666 - 824423
e-mail: [email protected]
Europlex Technologies [USA] Ltd.
Europlex Technologies [Canada] Inc.
Suite 106, 1700 Enterprise Way, SE
Marietta, GA 30067, USA
Tel: +1 - 770 - 426 - 9787.
Fax:+1 - 770 - 426 - 9790
e-mail: [email protected]
70 Dynamic Drive, Units 5&6,
Scarborough, Ontario, M1V 2N2, Canada.
Tel: +1 -416 - 754 - 4313
Fax: +1 - 416 - 754 - 8992
e-mail:[email protected]
Warning
While this system is an advanced design integrated security system, it does not offer guaranteed protection
against burglary, fire or other emergency. Any alarm system, whether commercial or domestic, is subject to
compromise or failure to warn for a variety of reasons.
Therefore, good installation practices, thorough testing and regular maintenance by the installing company
and frequent testing by the user are essential to ensure continuous satisfactory operation of the system. It is
recommended that the installation company offer a maintenance program and instruct the user with the
correct procedure for use and testing of the system.
Copyright
Europlex Technologies [Ireland] Ltd. (hereafter referred to as Europlex) 1999. All rights reserved. No part of
this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language
or computer language in any form or by any means electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical,
manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of Europlex.
Disclaimer
Europlex make no representations or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaim
any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose. Further Europlex reserve the
right to revise this publication and to make changes from time to time in the contents hereof without the
obligation of Europlex to notify any person of any such revision.
3GS Technical Manual - Issue 01 - 2000. Manual Code 6090.
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
This manual covers the 3GS integrated system with details of hardware components, software programming and
peripheral devices. It is designed to enable the installer to completely configure a Europlex 3GS System for intruder
alarm, access control and radio functionality.
It is divided into several sections.
●
●
●
●
●
The introduction section
The hardware section describes the hardware components of the 3GS system. It details each component, how to
connect them together, power them and build a completed 3GS integrated system.
The software section outlines the steps required to setup and customise the system for your requirements.
The peripheral devices section details all Europlex peripherals, which compliment the operation of the 3GS
integrated system.
The appendix section includes technical specifications for all Europlex products detailed in this manual.
Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION TO 3GS
1
System Overview
What is 3GS? ................................................................. 1-1
Installation Guidelines .................................................... 1-2
3GS HARDWARE
2
Hardware
Overview
System Components ....................................................... 2-1
System Configuration ..................................................... 2-2
Ringnet Communications ................................................ 2-3
3
Controller
3GS Controller Overview ................................................ 3-1
Controller PCB ............................................................... 3-2
4
5
Intelligent
Power Supply
Units
Nodes
PSU 3AMP ...................................................................... 4-1
PSU 4/8 Amp ................................................................. 4-2
Nodes Overview ............................................................ 5-1
Remote Keypad Display (RKD) Node ............................... 5-4
8 Input / 1 Output (I/O) Node ........................................ 5-8
6 Output Node ............................................................5-13
IntelliPower Node ......................................................... 5-16
Access Control System .................................................. 5-21
Access Control (ACN) Node .......................................... 5-22
Radio System ............................................................... 5-28
Hold-Up Alarm (HUA) Node ......................................... 5-29
Radio Panic Attack Unit (RPA) ........................................ 5-33
Radio Pager Transmitter Unit ........................................ 5-34
Radio Pager Receiver Unit ............................................ 5-35
LEM Node .................................................................... 5-38
Encryption Node .......................................................... 5-42
6
Serial Communications
Serial Port Connection .................................................... 6-1
n VII
3GS SOFTWARE
7
Programming
Overview
General Overview ......................................................... 7-1
Intruder System Overview .............................................. 7-2
Access System Overview ................................................ 7-3
Access Control Setup Examples ...................................... 7-5
Radio System Overview .................................................. 7-7
Getting Started .............................................................. 7-8
8
Menus
Menu Navigation ........................................................... 8-1
Zones/Doors/Vars........................................................... 8-6
Node Configure............................................................ 8-16
Radio PA Setup ............................................................. 8-24
Service Mode ................................................................ 8-25
Radio PA Test................................................................ 8-31
Setup Cards.................................................................. 8-32
Card Information .......................................................... 8-38
Door Configure ............................................................ 8-39
Time Zone Setup........................................................... 8-44
Door Group Setup ........................................................ 8-47
Manual Door Control.................................................... 8-48
Edit Levels Database ..................................................... 8-49
Setup SIA..................................................................... 8-51
Soak Mode .................................................................. 8-52
Disable Mode ............................................................... 8-53
Output Test .................................................................. 8-54
System Log ................................................................... 8-55
Print all Reports ............................................................ 8-56
Set Date & Time............................................................ 8-57
Set Data Format ........................................................... 8-58
Force Call..................................................................... 8-62
Set Up DM1200............................................................ 8-63
User Setup.................................................................... 8-64
Area Setup ................................................................... 8-66
Edit Output Database ................................................... 8-68
Radio PA Assign............................................................ 8-70
Time Advance ............................................................... 8-75
Literal Edit and Holiday Scheduler ................................. 8-76
Command Mode........................................................... 8-78
Soft Start ...................................................................... 8-79
Unset/Reset .................................................................. 8-80
Accept All Alerts............................................................ 8-81
VIII n
Edit Time Commands .................................................... 8-82
Inhibit Mode ................................................................. 8-84
9
User Guide
Introduction ................................................................... 9-1
3GS System Keypad/Display ........................................... 9-2
Menu options ................................................................. 9-3
Navigating the Help Menu ............................................. 9-4
Unset/Reset ................................................................... 9-5
Accept all Alerts ............................................................. 9-6
Part Set/Unset Individual Area ........................................ 9-7
Half Set/Set Individual Area ............................................ 9-8
Full Set .......................................................................... 9-9
Unable to Set ............................................................... 9-10
Setting an Individual Area ............................................ 9-11
Unsetting an Individual area ......................................... 9-12
Coded Reset ................................................................. 9-13
Set Date & Time ........................................................... 9-14
Change your own ID .................................................... 9-15
User Setup ................................................................... 9-16
Area Setup ................................................................... 9-19
Radio PA Assign ........................................................... 9-20
System Logs ................................................................. 9-22
Radio PA Test ............................................................... 9-23
3GS Access Control ...................................................... 9-24
Setup Cards ................................................................. 9-25
Passing and Voiding Cards ........................................... 9-27
Card Information ......................................................... 9-29
Manual Door Control ................................................... 9-30
Hour Adjust .................................................................. 9-31
Edit Time Commands ................................................... 9-32
Inhibit Zones/Doors ...................................................... 9-33
User Option Assignments ............................................. 9-34
Area Descriptions ......................................................... 9-35
User Area Assignments ................................................. 9-36
Typing Text ................................................................... 9-38
Index ........................................................................... 9-39
3GS PERIPHERAL DEVICES
10Hand-Held Terminal
HHT Overview .............................................................. 10-1
n IX
Main Menu .................................................................. 10-3
11Europlex Universal Interface
Card (EUIC)
EUIC Overview ............................................................. 11-1
Connecting the EUIC to the 3GS Controller .................. 11-2
Connecting the EUIC to the PC ..................................... 11-3
Connecting the EUIC to the Video Multiplexer ............... 11-4
Hardware ..................................................................... 11-5
EUIC Programming Software ........................................ 11-6
Default Set-up .............................................................. 11-7
12DM1200 Digital Communicator
/ Modem
Dm1200 Overview ....................................................... 12-1
DM1200 Installation .....................................................12-2
DM1200 Programming ................................................. 12-8
13IntelliBell
IntelliBell Overview ...................................................... 13-1
IntelliBell Connection Diagram ..................................... 13-2
IntelliBell Programming ................................................ 13-3
Self-Activating Bell ....................................................... 13-5
14Network Router
Network Router Overview ............................................. 14-1
3GS APPENDICES
15Technical Specifications
3GS Controller ............................................................ 15-1
3 Amp Power Supply Unit ............................................ 15-2
4Amp Power Supply Unit ............................................. 15-3
8Amp Power Supply Unit ............................................. 15-4
RKD Node ................................................................... 15-5
8 Input/Output Node .................................................. 15-6
6 Output Node ........................................................... 15-7
IntelliPower Node ........................................................ 15-8
Access Control Node ................................................... 15-9
HUA Node ................................................................ 15-10
LEM Node ................................................................. 15-11
Encryption Node ....................................................... 15-12
Hand Held Terminal .................................................. 15-13
EUIC ......................................................................... 15-14
DM1200 ................................................................... 15-15
Intellibell ................................................................... 15-16
Network Router ......................................................... 15-17
X n
16PC Software
3GS+ Overview ........................................................... 16-1
Installing 3GS+ ............................................................ 16-2
Installing the Dongle .................................................... 16-3
Upgrading ................................................................... 16-4
17Panelman 3GS
Panelman 3GS Overview .............................................. 17-1
Panelman EXE Files ...................................................... 17-2
Features ....................................................................... 17-3
System Requirements ................................................... 17-4
Installation ................................................................... 17-5
Troubleshooting ........................................................... 17-9
INDEX
n XI
XII n
INTRODUCTION TO 3GS
ABOUT THIS SECTION
The Introduction to 3GS section provides an overview of the system and describes how to get started using the system.
System Overview
●
●
A brief description of the individual hardware components, with an illustration of a typical 3GS system
configuration.
Guidelines for installation.
1
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
In this chapter
■
What is 3GS ....................... 1-1
- cabling
- system integration
- communications
■
Installation ......................... 1-2
WHAT IS 3GS?
The 3rd Generation System, 3GS, is based on a patented
high security, fault tolerant Ringnet offering flexibility
beyond the boundaries of any existing security control
system or access control system. The 3GS is capable of
integrating with building management systems and video
and audio verification systems. This, coupled with its
high security and self-diagnostic features, makes it the
most advanced system of its kind.
Cable problems solved
The system architecture consists of interconnected
elements called nodes, distributed in a ring configuration.
These nodes let you access the system to connect inputs,
outputs, operator keypad/display units and so on. Power
may also be distributed from nodes to the devices
connected locally. The current system supports up to 100
nodes and a controller.
3GS CONTROLLER
Node
Node
Node
RS485 Ring
Configuration
Node
Node
Node
Node
The benefits of this topology and associated control
protocol are immense. They impart to the system both
cable fault tolerance and self diagnostics. For example, if
a network cable, wired for fault tolerance, is damaged in
any way (for example, cut, shorted or grounded) the user
suffers no loss of functionality – all inputs are still
monitored; all inputs can still be controlled; all keypads
are still functional.
Superior communications
The availability of three serial ports (one RS232 9-pin
type and two TTL) provides significantly greater
communication capabilities.
For example, a LAN, remote PC and a printer can all be
connected simultaneously.
Note Europlex’s 3GS+, ED2000, Panelman and Network
XII are 3GS compatible.
Ease of installation
All system nodes are automatically configured, each
being assigned an ID number in sequential order. This
significantly reduces the time spent programming a
system.
Each node on the system is also self diagnostic. Any node
can be easily found (even above ceiling tiles or in
cupboards) using the unique audio node locator system.
This ensures that you no longer need to follow wires in
order to locate boxes for maintenance purposes.
Once a node has been located, it can be interrogated
using the revolutionary Europlex wireless Hand-Held
infra-red Terminal (HHT). Without opening the node
enclosure full diagnostic testing can be performed,
including power voltage and current measurement, input
and output status and operation, Ringnet
communications status and much more.
Most of the fault-finding process of opening boxes,
moving wires, metering, re-positioning of wires and reclosing of boxes and management of associated tamper
conditions can be eliminated.
These are only some of the unique advantages of 3GS. A
reduction in both installation and maintenance time
means cost savings for installation companies, quicker
response to customers and less disruption of their
business.
System Integration
In addition, the location of the fault is indicated by the
system – cable tracing to locate the problem is no longer
necessary. In fact, accidental Ringnet cable damage need
not cause false alarms. Intermittent cable faults, the bane
of many an alarm installer, can be isolated and treated.
3GS offers unique and comprehensive integration of
access control, wireless and cable alarm capability on
one hardware platform. Via its three serial ports, 3GS
offers multiple communication possibilities. For example,
radio paging, LAN or WAN connectivity, remote servicing
via modem and so on.
No longer do multiplex cables mean complicated
problems.
Welcome to 3GS!
Issue 01 Feb 2000
System Overview
1-1
INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
●
●
●
●
●
IEE regulations. All installations should comply with
IEE wiring regulations regarding the safety and
separation of low voltage cable from mains cable.
Powering devices. Rather than powering external
devices such as sounders and strobes from the
controller (which is not recommended), use
Europlex or other approved power supply units.
Ringnet
When wiring the 3GS system network (ringnet) ensure
the correct cable type for the system is used.
There are several factors which govern the selection of
the cable to be used.
●
Switched loads. Devices such as strobes, bells and
sirens should be powered on a separate cable to the
Ringnet. They should have their power provided
from local monitored power supply units, with I/O
node outputs driving the local trigger.
E.O.L. resistors. The 3GS system uses two 2k2
(US:1k and 470) end of line resistors per zone.
●
Default Codes Installer: 1010
Environment - When the 3GS is to be used in a noisy
environment (high power output devices, mains
cables or high voltage devices in close proximity),
then Europlex recommend the use of high grade,
screened twisted pair cable, such as Belden 9829 or
equivalent.
Distance - When the distance between nodes
increases, then the grade of cable used should also
be increased as per the cable table below.
Master User: 1020
cable type
maximum distance
between nodes
Temperature. 3GS is built to operate in ambient
temperatures in the range -10° to +40°C. Maximum
relative humidity (non-condensing) of 90%.
Standard alarm cable
200m
Belden 9502
500m
Standards. Designed to conform with BS4737 Part 1
(UK) IS199 1987 and Amendments (Ireland), UL
(USA), ULC (Canada) and all relevant European
standards.
UTP Category: 5 (solid core)
1000m
Belden 9829
1000m
Environmental conditions
●
●
●
●
Location of devices. All electronic devices and interconnecting cables should be sited away from sources
of heat, extreme cold, moisture, vibration, etc.
Cabling. Low voltage cable must be kept away from
mains cable. There should be no shared ducts, and
this exclusion should apply equally to PA systems,
multiplex fire systems, or similar devices.
1-2
Note The cable distance specified here is the distance
between nodes on Port 1A 1B and Port 2A 2B
●
●
Screen - If screen cable is used, all screens should be
linked together and wired to the terminal provided
at the node/Controller.
Branch Node - Each node on the system has two
drivers on board for the network, Port 1A 1B and
Port 2A 2B to achieve theses distances. However,
when using the node as a branch node there are no
drivers on Port 3A 3B and Port 4A 4B, which must
be accounted for when calculating cable distances.
3GS HARDWARE
ABOUT THIS SECTION
The Hardware section describes the hardware components of the 3GS system and provides installation details.
It is divided into the following chapters:
Hardware Overview
●
A brief description of the individual hardware components, with an illustration of a typical 3GS system
configuration.
Controller
●
The Controller cabinet variants, with specifications.
●
The Controller PCB.
●
Details of the terminal blocks, serial ports and cabinet tamper switch connections.
Power Supply Units
●
The Power Supply Unit variants, connection and operation.
Nodes
●
General overview of the configuration, operation and wiring of nodes.
Communications
●
Serial port wiring details, for connection to a PC, modem and other comms. devices.
3
2
HARDWARE OVERVIEW
In this chapter
■
System components ........................... 2-1
■
System configuration ......................... 2-2
■
Ringnet communications .................... 2-3
- sample wiring diagram
SYSTEM COMPONENTS
3GS consists of the following basic components:
●
●
●
●
Control Panel
Power Supply Unit (3, 4 or 8Amp)
3GS family of nodes
Hand Held Terminal (optional)
The 3GS is powered by an off board 12V, 3A/4A/8A
switchmode power supply unit. All monitoring functions
monitoring of overcurrent condition, fuse fail, mains fail,
PSU fail and battery.
Each component is described as follows:
Controller
system is unset/disarmed and is indicated visually by the
red LED on the PSU. The PSU is connected to the main
The 3GS Controller hardware consists of a Ringnet
interface, three serial ports, a Power Supply Unit (PSU)
interface, eight direct connect alarm inputs and four
relay outputs.
Nodes
Ringnet interface
This interface is used for communicating with nodes
connected to the panel. Standard alarm cable can be
used. However, better performance can be achieved by
using twisted pair cable, namely Belden 9829. The
maximum distance between nodes is 1Km (using Belden
9829). This interface uses RS485 in a ring topology. The
main Controller therefore has two RS485 ports and
completes the ring connection.
PSU Interface
This interface is used to connect the Controller to the
Power Supply Unit, thus providing power for the
Controller. This interface also enables the Controller to
monitor the PSU status e.g. battery, fuse, mains and
power status.
Serial ports
The 3GS Controller has three serial ports, which can be
configured for remote or local operation. They can be
used to connect to peripheral devices, such as printers,
modems, digis, PCs etc.. These ports allow for remote
and local monitoring, reporting and setup, when used
with the range of Europlex peripherals and PC Software
tools.
Alarm inputs
The Controller is capable of supporting eight direct
connect inputs. These inputs support the standard
Europlex dual EOL resistors zone (that is, tampers on
zones). The end-of-line resistors used are 2k2 (US: 1k
and 470). To expand the number of zones (to a
maximum of 200), nodes must be added to the Ringnet
[See - HARDWARE SECTION: NODES CHAPTER 5]
Outputs
The Controller has 4 x 1Amp Form-C dry contact relay
outputs.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
The 3GS family of nodes are a series of additional
capacity and functionality. The following nodes are
available:
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Remote Keypad Display node
8 Input /1 Output node
6 Output node
IntelliPower node
Access Control node
HUA node
LEM node
Encryption node
Common to these devices are:
●
●
●
●
●
Ringnet communications
Input/Output functions
Infra-red communications
On-board memory
On-board Buzzer
[See page 5-2: Node Functionality].
Nodes are programmed in a variety of ways: via the
keypad, the HHT IR-link, local or remote PC
programming. This is a simple menu-driven process [see
page 5-1: Node Configuration].
Hand Held Terminal
The infra-red Hand Held Terminal (HHT) is an installer’s
tool for use with the 3GS system. Similar in appearance
to the 3GS keypad with a 2x24 character LCD display,
the HHT comes in a compact carrying case and is battery
powered for portability.
Through the infra-red link you can communicate with
any node in the system and extract information such as
input and output status, voltage and current draw,
ringnet communications status and much more. This
feature eliminates the time and cost involved in opening
boxes, moving wires and so on.
Other features offered by the HHT include keypad
functions, a serial port, a parallel printer port and file
saver capabilities. [See - PERIPHERAL DEVICES
SECTION: HHT CHAPTER 10].
Hardware Overview
2- 1
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
The following diagram shows a typical configuration of the system.
EUIC
IntelliBell
Serial
printer
Pager
Dm1200
Digi Modem
Remote PC
Local PC
or laptop
Modem
Modem
3 serial communications ports
Up to 100 Nodes
3GS Controller
3GS
LEM Node
Ringnet
Access
Control
Node
RKD Node
3GS
ALEM
CLEM
HUA Node
6 Output Node
I/O Node
IntelliPower Node
1A 1B 2A 2B
A C B T1 B T2 I 1
I2 I3
I4
N. O. COM
1
1
N. C.N. O. COM N. C.
1
2
2
2
Max. 1Km between nodes
3A/4A/8A PSU
RPA
Hand-held
terminal
Branch
I/O node
2-2
Cable Type
Maximum
distance
between
nodes
Standard Alarm Cable
200m
Belden 9502*
500m
UTP Category: 5 (Solid
Core)
OUT
OUT
IN
Nodes should be wired in a ring configuration
using shielded twisted pair cable such as
Belden 9829 or equivalent. It is important to
connect the cable shielding to the terminal as
shown by the dotted line in the diagram
opposite. The maximum distance permitted
between nodes is cable dependent (see table
below):
IN
SHLD
1A
1B
Node Wiring
2A
2B
RINGNET COMMUNICATIONS
3GS Controller
Terminal Block
Node X
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
SHIELD
3A
3B
4A
4B
0V
+12V
Node Y
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
1000m
IN
IN
OUT
Belden 9829
1A
1B
2A
2B
1000m
OUT
*or equivalent
We recommend, in line with good working
practises, that you site all nodes and interconnecting cables away from sources of heat,
extreme cold, moisture, vibration and so on.
1A
1B
2A
2B
SHIELD
3A
3B
4A
4B
0V
+12V
Node Z
IN
IN
The diagram opposite shows a sample wiring
diagram.
OUT
OUT
1A
1B
2A
2B
SHIELD
3A
3B
3GS PSU
+
Issue 01 Feb 2000
4A
4B
0V
+12V
Hardware Overview
2- 3
2-4
3
CONTROLLER
In this chapter
■
3GS Controller overview .......................... 3-1
■
3GS Controller PCB ................................. 3-2
- Controller serial ports and connectors
- Cabinet tamper operation
3GS CONTROLLER OVERVIEW
The 3GS Controller is the control unit for the 3GS
system. This PCB contains the core software for the
system. When power is applied to this unit the Controller
scans the Ringnet for any attached devices and builds up
a system configuration. Any changes to this configuration
will be monitored by the Controller and the appropriate
action taken. The Controller stores all programmed data
in its memory, which is battery backed-up.
The 3GS Controller has 8 inputs and 4 outputs on board
(see Connection diagram). A Ringnet communications
port provides an interface to the nodes which provide
intruder, access and radio functionality (see Ringnet
Connection Diagram).
The Controller has 3 serial ports, one 9 pin D-type and
two 4-way terminal block. These ports are used for
connection to reporting devices:
●
●
●
●
central station via DM1200
remote monitoring station via modem or LAN - TCP/
IP
local monitor devices such as a PC or printer
programming tools for upload/download such as PC
or HHT
[See - HARDWARE SECTION: SERIAL
COMMUNICATIONS CHAPTER 6]
The Controller is powered through the PSU connection
socket. Depending on the system requirement, a
Europlex 3, 4 or 8Amp switch-mode power supply unit
must be used (see Power Supply).
The Controller also provides an interface for external
siren and monitors it’s housing for front and back
tampers.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
3GS Controller Overview
3-1
CONTROLLER PCB
1
2
3
4
5
J9
6
8
9
(lead supplied) 8-14V supplied via connector,
quiescent current 200mA
c Kickstart button
d Serial port fuse 500mA 250V quick blow
Port 2
b Power supply and current consumption
Port 3
a Reset button
RX TX
J
0V
K
0V 12V TX RX 0V 12V TX RX
L
J15
J14
J13
J10
7
TX RX 0V
g Serial port 1 See diagram opposite
23 5
f Serial port 2 See diagram opposite
Port 1
e Serial port 3 See diagram opposite
h Outputs The Controller has four on-board 1Amp single pole changeover relays assigned to system outputs 1, 2, 3
and 4 by default.
N/O
N/C
COMM
N/O : Normally
Open
N/C : Normally
3-2
+12V
0V
i These connections are:
●
Bell Hold Off (BHO) and Tamper Return (TR) These are used for connection of a self activating bell, as shown
in diagram.
Siren
Tamper
SUPPLY +
SUPPLY TRIGGER
TAMPER RTN
STROBE +
STROBE BATTERY +
BATTERY -
470R
Shield
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
1a
1b
2a
2b
0V
Back Tamper
0V
Front Tamper
Bell Hold Off
Tamper Return
Control Line
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
1 NO
1 Com.
1 NC
2 NO
2 Com
2 NC
3 NO
3 Com
3 NC
4 NO
4 Com
4 NC
+
13
Typical SAB
Standby
Battery
Internal
Siren
+
+
3GS PSU
●
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
Output 4
Control Line (CNTL) This is used for connection to Europlex peripheral devices, such as the IntelliBell and the
DM1200. See example wiring below.
Zone Input
3GS
Controller
IntelliBell
Power
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Controller PCB
3-3
j Tampers:
OV
Back Tamper
OV
Front Tamper
Tampers The Cherry tamper switch located on the back wall of the cabinet should
be connected to terminals 18 & 19. The front tamper switch is also of Cherry type
and should be connected to terminals 20 & 21. The tamper switch has a cheat
feature that allows the switch to be inactive when the cabinet door is open. This is
enabled by pulling the tamper switch spigot into a forward position. Both are wired
as normally open.
k Ringnet Communications Connect the Ringnet cable to the four terminals 1A to 2B.
These terminals are used for connecting the Controller node onto the ringnet (see connection diagram and cable
type table below).
S h ie ld
1A
1B
2A
2B
Controller
1A
1B
2A Node
2B
Shield
1A
Node 1B
2A
2B
Shield
cable type
maximum distance
between nodes
Standard alarm cable
200m
Belden 9502
500m
UTP Category: 5 solid core
1000m
Belden 9829
1000m
l Inputs The Controller node has eight on-board zone inputs. These inputs are monitored using dual E.O.L. supervision as wired below.
2K2
2K2
I1
COM
I2
2K2
2K2
3-4
description
value
zone status
OPEN
4400
Zone open
CLOSED
2200
Zone closed
DISCON
30 000
Zone disconnected
SHORT
< 1400
Zone shorted
DC SUBS
Variable
DC Voltage substitution
Controller cabinet
The 3GS Controller is housed in a metal cabinet as
shown below. Within the cabinet there is room for a 3
Amp (with transformer) or 4/8 Amp power supply unit
and battery backup (up to 2 X 36 AH). Mounting holes
are provided for a DM1200 or arrangement of nodes.
Note This cabinet comes in two sizes:
●
E - CAB - 1236 Midrange small battery (15/17) AH
●
E - CAB - 1237 Midrange large battery (24/38) AH
3/4/8A PSU
CONTROLLER
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Controller PCB
3-5
3-6
4
INTELLIGENT POWER SUPPLY UNITS
In this chapter
■
PSU 3Amp ......................................... 4-1
■
PSU 4Amp and 8Amp ........................ 4-2
■
Connecting the PSU ........................... 4-3
■
Battery information ............................ 4-3
PSU 3AMP
5
1
6
6
7
8
4
3
2
+
Battery
Op 2
Op1
NEG
NEG
9
6
6
a Mains/ A.C. block terminal
b Power On LED
Fuse (20mm)
3 Amp
c Load On LED
F1 Battery
3.15A Quick Blow
d Bat On LED
F2 Output 2
2A Quick Blow
e Transformer connection
F3 Output 1
2A Quick Blow
f Fuses See fuse table opposite
F4 On Board Mains
3.15A Quick Blow
g PSU to controller connection (supplied)
F5 Controller
500mA Quick Blow
h Battery Pos/Neg terminals
F6 Mains/AC
250mA Anti-surge
i Output
Issue 01 Feb 2000
PSU 3AMP
4-1
PSU 4/8 AMP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
O
9
J
M
N
L K
a Mains/ A.C. block terminal
i Thermocouple
b Heat sink enclosure
j F6 Controller PCB fuse See fuse table below
c Battery test LED (red)
k 12V output terminals
d Battery charge LED (yellow)
l PSU standalone link (no link for 3GS operation)
e Relay A
m PSU to controller connector (supplied)
f F2 battery fuse (10A) See fuse table below
n Mains/AC Power LED
g Battery Pos./Neg. terminals
o FI Mains
h F3, F4 and F5 Output fuses See fuse table below
Fuse (20mm)
4 Amp
8 Amp
F1 Mains/A.C.
2.5A
2.5A Quick
Blow
F2 Battery
10A
10A Quick Blow
F3 Output 1
1A
2A Quick Blow
F4 Output 2
1A
2A Quick Blow
F5 Output 3
1A
2A Quick Blow
F6 Controller
500mA
500mA Quick
Blow
4-2
Additional Information
The PSU delivers 13.65VDC to the controller PCB via a
14-way ribbon cable (12) shown in diagram. Monitored
data (such as low battery, fuse fail, mains fail) is also
carried on this cable.
Connecting the Intellipower PSUs
In order to function as specified, both primary and
secondary power sources should be connected to the
3GS PSU. The PSU features temperature compensated
battery charging. It also has an on-board resistor to
enable testing of the battery. The PSU has three
independent fused outputs.
Standby battery – power calculation
The primary power source is connected to the PSU via a
fused mains block CN1, which is located on the extreme
left of the PCB. The mains supply should also have a
good earth which should be connected to the mains
block so labelled.
In the event of a mains failure it is essential to have a
battery back-up as a secondary power source. We
recommend using the Yuasa NP series of batteries.
Connect a sealed 12V lead-acid battery to the battery
pos/neg terminals (6) shown in diagram.
Load
1 Amp
2 Amp
Ensure that adequate standby power is available for all
devices in the event of mains supply failure. The capacity
of the battery is expressed as a standard ampere hour
rate by multiplying the current drawn and the time taken
before the battery terminal voltage falls to a set figure.
Use the table below to calculate the power requirement.
For example, if you have a 3Amp load and require 16
hours standby battery back up, you need a 48Ah battery
(2 x 24Ah) with the 8Amp version of the PSU. This table
has been calculated on the basis of a battery recharge
time of 24 hours; that is, in 24 hours the battery is
recharged to 80% of its normal capacity.
3 Amp
4 Amp
Standby time
Battery
PSU
Battery
PSU
Battery
PSU
Battery
PSU
12 hours
12Ah
4A
24Ah
4A
36Ah
8A
48Ah
8A
16 hours
16Ah
4A
32Ah
8A
48Ah
8A
64Ah
8A
24 hours
24Ah
4A
48Ah
8A
72Ah
8A
60 hours
60Ah
8A
72 hours
72Ah
8A
To check the battery on a 4/8Amp PSU
1 The system should be initially powered up on the
standby battery.
2 Ensure a 12V rechargeable battery is connected and
then hold down the controller Kick Start button for
approximately one second.
This should energise Relay A and power the system
from the standby battery (assuming the battery
voltage is above 10.5VDC).
Issue 01 Feb 2000
The yellow LED on the PSU should illuminate
indicating that a charged battery is connected.
3 Apply the AC mains voltage to the power supply unit.
The green LED located beside the mains terminal
should illuminate to indicate mains voltage is present.
Battery charging is controlled by the 3GS Controller.
When the battery charge relay closes, the yellow LED
illuminates to indicate the battery is being charged.
Additional Information
4-3
4-4
5
NODES
In this chapter
■
Nodes Overview ......................................... 5-1
– Brief description of each node
– Common functionality
– Basic node enclosure
– Powering-up a node
■
Remote Keypad Display node ...................... 5-4
■
8 Input /1 Output node............................... 5-8
■
6 Output node............................................ 5-13
■
IntelliPower node ........................................ 5-16
■
Access Control system ................................. 5-21
■
Access Control node ................................... 5-22
■
Radio system............................................... 5-28
■
Hold-Up Alarm node .................................. 5-29
■
Radio Panic Attack unit................................ 5-33
■
Pager transmitter unit ................................. 5-34
■
Pager receiver unit ...................................... 5-35
■
LEM node ................................................... 5-38
■
Encryption node.......................................... 5-42
NODES OVERVIEW
The following nodes are currently supported by the 3GS
System:
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Remote Keypad Display node
8 Input /1 Output node
6 Output node
IntelliPower node
Access Control node
Hold-Up Alarm node
LEM node
Encryption node
Remote Keypad Display node
The Remote Keypad Display (RKD) node is a wallmounted unit that allows you to control, program and
observe the past or present state of the system.
This is achieved using a 20-key tactile keypad and a 2x24
character LCD backlit display. All current versions of
keypads have two inputs on-board and one relay output.
Once power is applied to the RKD, the node diagnostic
menus can be accessed.
8 Input/1 Output node
The 8 Input /1 Output (I/O) node is the primary interface
between the 3GS system and the sensors/actuators of an
installation. Each I/O node has eight end of line resistor
input zones and one output.
Each I/O node has a status LED and on-board buzzer.
They also posses extensive self-diagnostic capabilities. A
bi-directional infra-red link to the hand held terminal
exists on all nodes that do not already have a display/
keypad interface.
6 Output node
The 6 Output node expands the system by providing six
additional relay outputs. The outputs are Form C 1A 12V
Dry Contact type and are programmed using the
Controller software. [See page 8-22: Node Configure Outputs].
The 6 Output node also features an on-board status LED,
and operation can be monitored using the on-board
infra-red link to the hand-held terminal.
IntelliPower node
The IntelliPower node monitors the status of its
associated power supply unit anywhere on the 3GS
Ringnet system. The node receives data and power
directly from the PSU, and interfaces with the Controller
via the Ringnet. A series of LEDs give immediate
indication of mains failure, fuse failure, PSU failure, overcurrent, battery problems or communications failure.
Corresponding alert messages are sent back to the
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Controller and shown on the keypad display.
Hold-Up Alarm node
The Hold-Up Alarm (HUA) node is used to provide an
interface to the 3GS Radio system. The node has a radio
receiver module on-board, which can currently be either
418MHz or 433MHz. The node has four intruder alarm
zone inputs and one unassigned system output. Again
this node has infra-red communications, which can be
used via the HHT for diagnostic purposes. Using the
HUA nodes, the radio or article protection system has a
capacity for 126 radio panic attack units (RPA) or article
protection units (APU). [See page 7-3: Radio System
Overview].
Access Control node
The 3GS Access Control node (ACN) provides the
interface to the access system. The node is a two door
Controller with a capacity for four readers (two entry and
two exit). The Access Control Node has two door lock
outputs and two spare, unassigned system outputs. The
node also has two zone inputs (for intruder
configuration) and two door inputs (for integrated access
control and monitoring of door forced and left open
alarms). The diagnostic menu for the ACN can be
accessed using the HHT. The 3GS system has a capacity
for 10,000 card holders and 64 doors. [See page 7-3:
Access System Overview].
LEM node
The LEM node allows you to upgrade a system from
Aplex/Adplex to 3GS without a complete re-wiring of the
installation.With the Aplex/Adplex panel replaced by a
3GS Controller, all existing LEM modules and I/O devices
can be run through the LEM node back to the Controller.
LEM node inputs are recognised by the system as
standard node inputs and so do not need to be readdressed. The LEM node is powered by its own 1Amp
linear power supply.
Note The Aplex/Adplex RKD is not supported and should
not be replaced by 3GS RKDs on the ringnet.
Encryption node
The Encryption node provides maximum security for the
reporting of zone inputs. A pre-addressed encryption
module is placed within a system sensor, and connected
to the sensor alarm and contact terminals on the
Encryption node. Activation of the sensor is reported
back to the node, giving the individual module address,
and then back to the Controller. The individual
addressing of the module makes zone substitution and
system compromise difficult.
Nodes Overview
5-1
Node Functionality
Infra-Red Communication
The following features are common to all nodes:
All nodes (except the RKD) are fitted with infra-red
transmit and receive capability. This allows you to use the
3GS Hand Held Terminal (HHT) to program or
interrogate the system without having to make physical
connections, open boxes and so on. You can
communicate with the system by simply switching on the
HHT and pointing it at the nearest node.
Ringnet communications
Europlex nodes are connected to each other via a two
wire RS485 network called the ringnet. It is wired in a
ring, starting from the 3GS Controller to the first node,
and any subsequent nodes and, finally, from the last
node back to the Controller. All nodes connect to the
Ringnet in the same way and the same cabling conditions
apply. The maximum distance allowed from Controller to
node using standard alarm cable is 200m, or 500m if
using Belden 9502 cable. A distance of 1000m is
possible using UTP Category 5 solid core or Belden
9829:
cable type
maximum distance
between nodes
Standard alarm cable
200m
Belden 9502
500m
UTP Category: 5 (solid core)
1000m
Belden 9829
1000m
Input/Output functions
HHT gives access to node set-up and status information,
such as:
●
Serial number
●
Software version fitted
●
Actual voltage and current used
●
Ringnet communications status
●
Status of inputs and their resistance values
●
Status of outputs
On-board memory
All nodes have on-board memory. This is used for storing
data, allowing you to program the system. Programming
can be done using:
●
the RKD
●
the HHT IR Link
●
a local or remote PC
(See Software Section).
Each node has some input/output capabilities,
depending on the node. For the inputs to function as
3GS alarm zones, two 2K2 (US:1k and 470) end-of-line
resistors must be connected. The Controller then
determines the zone status by reading the end-of-line
resistance value, according to the following table:
On-board buzzer
Each node has its own piezo buzzer fitted, to allow you
to locate the node (for service and so on). You simply
have to locate the nearest node and request the missing
node to sound its buzzer, in this way highlighting its
location (for example, above false ceilings). You activate
the buzzer using the Node Find option. [See page 8-18:
Node Configure - Information].
description
value
zone status
OPEN
4400
Zone open
CLOSED
2200
Zone closed
In addition, you can assign each node a text description
to help you locate it more easily.
DISCON
30 000
Zone disconnected
Tamper switches
SHORT
< 1400
Zone shorted
DC SUBS
Variable
DC Voltage substitution
All nodes monitor for front and back tampers. Some have
on-board tamper switches and some have terminals
supplied, depending on the cabinet. Most nodes allow
for bypassing tampers using on-board tamper links.
The outputs are 1Amp Form-C dry contact relay outputs.
These relays can be used to drive external devices, such
as a siren.
5-2
Note The link must be removed to enable tamper
monitoring.
Powering-up nodes for the first time
ONLINE INPUTS 0 -> 5.
Powering-up the 3GS system (called a cold start) will
bring any nodes, inputs and doors physically connected
to the Ringnet onto the system. You will be given the
opportunity to verify the number of nodes, inputs and
doors connected.
If this number of on-line inputs does not match the
number you know to be connected, check all zone
inputs for EOLs and cabling (see Input/Output). Then
rescan the Ringnet by pressing the NO key.
To power-up the 3GS system
1 The Controller will scan the Ringnet for connected
nodes, and indicates the number of nodes found. For
example:
ONLINE NODES 0 -> 3.
If this number does not match the number you know
to be connected, check the cabling and power
connections (see Ringnet). Then rescan the Ringnet
by pressing the NO key.
3 If you are satisfied the number is correct, press YES.
Once the correct number of inputs are seen to be online the Controller scans the Ringnet and indicates the
number of doors found (a door is brought on-line if
the door input on the access node has an EOL
connected to it). For example:
ONLINE DOORS 0 -> 4.
Note To replace nodes, add nodes to the system or
remove a node, [see page 8-16: Node Configure].
2 If you are satisfied the number is correct, press YES.
Once the correct number of nodes are seen to be online the Controller scans the Ringnet and indicates the
number of zones found (a zone is brought on-line if a
zone input on a node has an EOL connected). For
example:
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Nodes Overview
5-3
REMOTE KEYPAD DISPLAY (RKD) NODE
Description
The Remote Keypad Display (RKD) node is a wall-mounted unit that allows you to control, program and observe the
past or present state of the 3GS system or to arm/disarm the system. The RKD is capable of monitoring its own supply
voltage and its integral front and back tamper switches. Like all system nodes, the RKD will have been automatically
assigned a unique address following a power up.
1
2
1A
1B
2A
2B
SL
0V
12V
I1
COM
I2
NO
NC
COM
8
7
3
4
5
6
7
a 2x24 Character LCD Display This display is used to show all alert and warning messages and menus. The display contrast and backlight can be adjusted through the menus. [See page 8-22: Node Configure - Outputs].
b LED status indicators The three LEDs to the right
of the numeric keypad indicate the system’s current
status, as follows:
●
●
●
Yellow LED: Indicates the occurrence of a system
event. An alert or warning message will indicate
the location and nature of the event.
Green LED. Indicates the presence, or failure of,
the mains supply.
Red LED. Remains steady to indicate a fault on
both communications lines, and displays two
distinctive flashing sequences to indicate a fault
on either communications line:
LED Steady
Mains supply present
Mains supply failure
Yellow
System warning message
System alert message
Red
Communications lost
Communications lost line 1A 1B
(flashes off on ce every 2-3 seconds.)
Communications lost line 2A 2B
(flashes off twice every 2-3 seconds.)
5-4
LED Flashing
Green
Communications OK
(flashes on briefly
every 2-3 seconds.)
c Ringnet Communications Connect the Ringnet cable to the four terminals 1A to 2B.
These terminals are used for connecting the RKD node onto the ringnet (see connection diagram and cable type
table below).
from previous
node
NODE
1A 1B 2A 2B SL
1A
1B
RKD 2A
2B
SL
to
next
node
cable type
maximum distance
between nodes
Standard alarm cable
200m
Belden 9502
500m
UTP Category: 5 (solid core)
1000m
Belden 9829
1000m
1A 1B 2A 2B SL
NODE
d Power supply & current consumption To function correctly the RKD requires 12Vdc which should be supplied either directly from the Controller power supply unit or from a remote power supply unit. Current Consumption -Quiescent State: 150mA (backlight off) Maximum: 300mA
e Inputs The RKD node has two on-board zone inputs. These inputs are monitored using dual E.O.L. supervision as
wired below.
2K2
2K2
I1
COM
I2
2K2
description
value
zone status
OPEN
4400
Zone open
CLOSED
2200
Zone closed
DISCON
30 000
Zone disconnected
SHORT
< 1400
Zone shorted
DC SUBS
Variable
DC Voltage substitution
2K2
f Output The RKD has one on-board 1Amp single pole changeover relay, which can be assigned to any of the system outputs. [See page 8-22: Node Configure - Outputs].
N/O
N/C
COMM
N/O : Normally
Open
N/C : Normally
+12V
0V
g Tampers The RKD Node monitors both front and back tampers. The front tamper is closed once the terminal
block cover is secured.
h Keys The keys are used for code entry, setting/arming and unsetting/disarming the system and accessing the
menus detailed in the Software section. For further information on keys [see page 8-2: Typing text].
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Remote Keypad Display (RKD) Node
5-5
RKD Node Cabinet
1
7
a Securing hole for front
of RKD
PART
UNSET
FULL
SET
HALF
b Terminal block cover
HELP
c Cover securing screw
1
2
3
YES
4
5
6
?
NO
7
8
9
!
SHIFT
*
0
#
d Status LED holes
e Numeric and function keys
f Lid cover clips
g Display window
6
1
5
4
2
3
2
3
a P.C.B. securing clips
b Mounting keyhole
c P.C.B. locating pillar
d Patress box mounting hole
4 e
Mounting hole
f P.C.B. securing screw
5
6
Additional Information
Private mode
The private mode feature prevents two separate users from attempting to configure the system at the same time.
When one system RKD is in use, an attempt to key in at any other system RKD will produce the following message:
System Busy ... Please Wait.
The keypad displays this message until the user at the other keypad is finished, and then returns to normal operations
Text Entry
The orientation of the cursor governs which character is selected. Use the Shift key to rotate the cursor for character
selection and press Enter when text entry is complete. [See page 8-2: Typing text].
5-6
Diagnostic Menu; RKD
In addition to displaying system
Main controller removed from
menus for programming and so on, Comms. Line, RKD display shows:
the keypad has its own diagnostic
menu. Access to this diagnostic menu
is available when a keypad node is
isolated from the Ringnet
(communications lines removed).
Alternatively, the same node
information can be accessed through
the Node Configure menu, submenu
Monitor. [See page 8-18: Node
Configure - Nodes - Information Monitor]
The menu provides you with data on
the keypad’s current configuration
and allows locally related operations
to be performed – such as adjusting
the display parameters and switching
the on-board output.
RKD
V1.11
2I 1O
15Apr97
To scroll back
PART
To scroll forward
through menu
UNSET
On-board Input / Output
Serial Number
0000000031
001
Node ID
Software Release Date
Software Version
Tamper Switch(s) Status
DC Supply Voltage
TAMPER OK 13.6V
Input 1 Analog Resistance Value
I 01 = 30000
Z9
-D
O = Open
C = Closed
S = Short
D = Disconnected
Input 1 State
DC = DC Substitution
Input 1 Assigned Zone
I 02= 2200
Z10
-C
4400
2200
<1400
30000
Variable
Output State
01=ON
07
Output Type
Press
#
to toggle output
ON/OFF
Number of days the node
has been continuously powered up.
DAYS RUNNING = 37
Press
BACKLIGHT = 80%
#
BACKLIGHT LEVEL = 100%
to increase
0%
20% 40%
60%
80% 100%
NO = Backlight on after key depression.
YES = Backlight always on.
BACKLIGHT ALWAYS ON =NO
Press
#
to toggle output
displayed
ON/OFF
Press
CONTRAST LEVEL = 0%
#
CONTRAST LEVEL = 100%
to increase
0%
Issue 01 Feb 2000
20% 40%
60%
80% 100%
Remote Keypad Display (RKD) Node
5-7
8 INPUT / 1 OUTPUT (I/O) NODE
Description
The 8 Input/1 Output Node provides 8 input connections for alarm monitoring and 1 unassigned relay output. The inputs, if
fitted with end of line resistors, will be initalised onto the system as part of the 200 alarm zones. The output can be assigned
to any of the 255 output types available on the system.
1 2
3
1A
1B
2A
2B
J
SHLD
3A
3B
4A
4B
4
OV
9
8
6
1 NC
1 NO
1 CO M M
I8
I7
CO M
I6
I5
CO M
I4
I3
7
CO M
I2
I1
CO M
+1 2 V
0V
AUX
AUX
12V
5
a Front tamper The node monitors for front tamper.
b Front tamper link To override monitoring of front tamper.
c Back tamper and link (for future use) The node monitors for back tamper and the link is used to override
monitoring of back tamper.
d Infra-red communications interface Used for Hand-Held Terminal (HHT) communications [See page 5-12:
8 I/O Diagnostic Menu].
e Output The 8I/O has one on-board 1Amp single pole changeover relay, which can be assigned to any of the system outputs. [See page 8-22: Node Configure - Outputs].
1NO 1COM 1NC
NO = Normally Open
NC = Normally Closed
+12V
0V
5-8
f Inputs The 8 I/O node has eight on-board zone inputs. These inputs are monitored using dual E.O.L. supervision as
wired below.
2K2
2K2
I1
COM
I2
2K2
description
value
zone status
OPEN
4400
Zone open
CLOSED
2200
Zone closed
DISCON
30 000
Zone disconnected
SHORT
< 1400
Zone shorted
DC SUBS
Variable
DC Voltage substitution
2K2
g Auxiliary supply(12V) Used to power auxiliary devices to a maximum of 250mA.
h Auxiliary fuse 250mA Quick Blow.
i Power supply and current consumption The 8 I/O node requires 12VDC which should be supplied directly
from the Controller PSU or form a remote PSU. Current Consumption -Quiescent State: 100mA Maximum: 200mA
j Ringnet Communications Connect the Ringnet cable to the four terminals 1A to 2B.
These terminals are used for connecting the 8I/O node onto the ringnet (see connection diagram and cable type table
below).
from previous
node
NODE
1A 1B 2A 2B SL
1A
1B
8 I/O 2A
2B
SL
to next
node
cable type
maximum distance
between nodes
Standard alarm cable
200m
Belden 9502
500m
UTP Category: 5 (solid core)
1000m
Belden 9829
1000m
1A 1B 2A 2B SL
NODE
Issue 01 Feb 2000
8 Input / 1 Output (I/O) Node
5-9
Branch node
A node may be wired as a branch node using terminals 3A, 3B, 4A and 4B as shown in the diagram below. This
configuration is valid for the ringnet. Check the cable distances between the nodes, ensuring that the cable distance
between node 3 and node 4 is within the distances specified in the Cable type table on the previous page.
Physically linked
on to the PCB.
No need to fit
links.
5 - 10
Node Cabinet
This cabinet is used to house the 8 I/O, 6 O, HUA and
Encryption Nodes.
2
2
a Front Tamper
Guide
1
b Cover Fixing
Screws
c Infra-red Window
3
1
2
3
4
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Node anchor points
Wall spacers
Cover anchor points
Cable grips
Mounting holes
Cable entry holes
Cable ties
h Cover hooks
Side View
5
Issue 01 Feb 2000
6
7
8
8 Input / 1 Output (I/O) Node
5 - 11
Diagnostic Menu; 8I/O
Node
The menu provides you with data on
the 8 I/O node’s current configuration
and allows monitoring of node and
PSU parameters. This information
includes inputs, outputs, fuse and
tamper status.
It can be utilised to interrogate the
status of the node without having to
remove the cabinet lid, thus avoiding
interfering with cables and the need to
use a voltmeter for measuring node
voltage and currents.
It can be accessed using the HHT infrared. Alternatively the same node
information can be accessed through
the Node Configure menu, submenu
Monitor. [See page 8-18: Node
Configure - Nodes - Information Monitor]
Note For further information on HHT
menus see - PERIPHERAL DEVICES
SECTION: HAND-HELD TERMINAL
CHAPTER 10.
To scroll back
PART
To scroll forward
through menu
UNSET
On-board Input / Output
Serial Number
I/O
V1.11
8I 1O
15Apr97
00000000230
002 1 2
Node ID
Software Release Date
Software Version
Tamper Switch(s) Status
TAMPER OK
FUSE OKAY
12.7V
000mA
DC Supply Voltage
Input 1 Analog Resistance Value
I 01 = 2185
Z0
-C
O
C
S
D
DC
I 02= 2221
Z0
-C
Input 1 State
Input 1 Assigned Zone
I 03 = 2185
Z0
-C
I 04= 2150
Z0
-C
I 05 = 3000
Z0
-D
I 06= 3000
Z0
-D
I 07 = 2185
Z0
-D
I 08= 2221
Z0
-D
= Open
= Closed
= Short
= Disconnected
= DC Substitution
Output State
01=ON
07
Output Type
Press
#
to toggle output
displayed
ON/OFF
DAYS RUNNING = 37
5 - 12
Number of days the node has been
continuously powered up
4400
2200
<1400
30000
Variable
6 OUTPUT NODE
Description
Each 6 Output node provides six extra relay outputs for the 3GS system. These can be assigned to any of the 255
output types available. The node is identical in tamper, IR and LED functions, and node enclosure to the 8 Input/1
Output node.
The same output number can be assigned to more than one output, in which case several outputs will respond to a
3GS software command in the same way. For more details on assigning outputs and output types, see Software section.
1 2
3
1A
1B
2A
2B
9
SHLD
3A
3B
4A
4B
4
OV
7
6
6C
6NC
6NO
5C
5NC
5NO
4C
4NC
4NO
3C
3NC
3NO
2C
2NC
2NO
1C
INC
INO
0V
12V
+12V
8
5
a Front tamper The node monitors for front tamper.
b Front tamper link Use this link to override monitoring of front tamper.
c Back tamper and link (for future use) The node monitors for back tamper and the link is used to override
monitoring of back tamper.
d Infra-red communications interface Used for Hand-Held Terminal (HHT) communications. [See page 515: 6 Output Diagnostic Menu].
e Outputs The 6 O Node has six on-board 1Amp single pole changeover relays, which can be assigned to any of
the system outputs. [See page 8-22: Node Configure - Outputs].
1NO 1COM 1NC
NO = Normally Open
NC = Normally Closed
+12V
0V
f Auxiliary supply (12V) Used to power auxiliary devices to a maximum of 250mA
g Auxiliary supply fuse 250mA Quick Blow
h Power supply and current consumption The 6 O Node requires 12V DC which should be supplied directly
from Controller PSU or from a remote PSU. Current consumption - Quiescent: 100mA Maximum: 200mA
Issue 01 Feb 2000
6 Output Node
5 - 13
i Ringnet Communications Connect the Ringnet cable to the four terminals 1A to 2B.
These terminals are used for connecting the 6 O node onto the ringnet (see connection diagram and cable type
table below).
from previous
node
NODE
1A 1B 2A 2B SL
1A
6 Output 1B
Node 2A
2B
SL
to next
node
cable type
maximum distance
between nodes
Standard alarm cable
200m
Belden 9502
500m
UTP Category: 5 solid core
1000m
Belden 9829
1000m
1A 1B 2A 2B SL
NODE
Note [See page 5-10: 8 I/O Node, branch diagram in the ringnet section].
Node Cabinet
This node has the same cabinet as the 8 Input/Output Node. (See previous section)
5 - 14
Diagnostic Menu; 6 Output Node
The menu provides you with data on the 6
Output node’s current configuration and allows
monitoring of node and PSU parameters. This
information includes inputs, outputs, fuse and
tamper status.
It can be utilised to interrogate the status of the
node without having to remove the cabinet lid,
thus avoiding interfering with cables and the
need to use a voltmeter for measuring node
voltage and currents.
It can be accessed using the HHT infra-red.
Alternatively the same node information can be
accessed through the Node Configure menu,
submenu Monitor. [See page 8-18: Node
Configure - Nodes - Information - Monitor]
Note For further information on HHT menus see
- PERIPHERAL DEVICES SECTION: HAND-HELD
TERMINAL CHAPTER 10.
To scroll back
PART
To scroll forward
through menu
UNSET
On-board Input / Output
Serial Number
I/O
V1.11
8I 1O
15Apr99
00000000230
002 1 2
Node ID
Currrent Date
Software Version
Tamper Switch(s) Status
TAMPER OK
FUSE OKAY
12.7V
000mA
DC Supply Voltage
Input 1 Analog Resistance Value
I 01 = 2185
Z0
-C
O = Open
C = Closed
S = Short
D = Disconnected
DC = DC Substitution
I 02= 2221
Z0
-C
Input 1 State
Input 1 Assigned Zone
I 03 = 2185
Z0
-C
I 04= 2150
Z0
-C
I 05 = 3000
Z0
-D
I 06= 3000
Z0
-D
I 07 = 2185
Z0
-D
I 08= 2221
Z0
-D
Output State
01=ON
07
Output Type
Press
#
to toggle output
displayed
ON/OFF
DAYS RUNNING = 37
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Number of days the node has been
continuously powered up
6 Output Node
5 - 15
4400
2200
<1400
30000
Variable
INTELLIPOWER NODE
Description
The 3GS IntelliPower node allows monitoring of distributed power supply units anywhere on the 3GS Ringnet. The
IntelliPower node receives power and data directly from the PSU via a flat ribbon cable and interfaces with the 3GS
Controller via the 3GS Ringnet. The node monitors the PSU for over-current, fuse fail, mains/AC fail, PSU fail,
Communications fail and battery problems. It also has four alarm inputs and two relay outputs.
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
J
J
N.C.
COM
N.C
N.O.
COM
I4
N.O.
I3
COM
I2
I1
COM
BT1
AC
BT2
2B
SHLD
IB
2A
IA
7
3
9
8 7
6
5
4
a LEDs Any changes in status are indicated immediately by one of the 6 real-time LEDs and are reported back to the
Controller via the Ringnet. Status changes are then displayed as alert messages, showing the node ID and the
nature of the status alerts.:
●
LED1: Mains/AC
●
LED2: Fuse fail
●
LED3: PSU fail
●
LED4: Overcurrent
●
LED5: Battery problem
●
LED6: Comms fail
b Infra-red communications interface Used for Hand-Held Terminal (HHT) communications (see Diagnostic
menu for more details).
c Power supply and current consumption This node is powered using the PSU connector supplied, which is
connected to any of the range of Europlex IntelliPower supplies. Current Consumption -Quiescent State: 100mA
Maximum: 150mA.
d Outputs The IntelliPower node has two on-board 1Amp single pole changeover relayS, which can be assigned to
any of the system outputs. [See page 8-22: Node Configure - Outputs].
N/O
N/C
COMM
N/O : Normally
Open
N/C : Normally
+12V
0V
e Kick-Start button Starts the system from the battery. This turns on the charge relay, which connects the battery
to the output terminals.
5 - 16
a Inputs The IntelliPower node has four on-board zone inputs. These inputs are monitored using dual E.O.L.
2K2
2K2
I1
COM
I2
2K2
description
value
zone status
OPEN
4400
Zone open
CLOSED
2200
Zone closed
DISCON
30 000
Zone disconnected
SHORT
< 1400
Zone shorted
DC SUBS
Variable
DC Voltage substitution
2K2
supervision as wired overleaf.
g Back tamper and link (for future use) Remove the back tamper link if you are connecting a back tamper
switch to BT1 and BT2.
BT1
BT2
Back tamper
Normally closed
h AC Output terminal Provides clock output signal 50Hz or 60Hz, depending on mains frequency of PSU, where
a control panel is powered solely from a DC source, i.e. no mains connected. The output signal ensures the panel
keeps time accurately.
i Ringnet Communications Connect the Ringnet cable to the four terminals 1A to 2B.
These terminals are used for connecting the IntelliPower node onto the ringnet (see connection diagram and cable
type table below).
from previous
node
NODE
1A 1B 2A 2B SHLD
1A
IntelliPower 1B
Node 2A
2B
SL
cable type
maximum distance
between nodes
Standard alarm cable
200m
Belden 9502
500m
UTP Category: 5 (solid core)
1000m
Belden 9829
1000m
to next
node
1A 1B 2A 2B SL
NODE
j Front tamper and link Remove the front tamper link jumper to activate the front tamper switch.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
IntelliPower Node
5 - 17
IntelliPower Node cabinet
Note This cabinet comes in two sizes:
●
E - CA124501 3GS 3Amp Monitor Node PSU Cabinet (15/17) AH
●
E - CA124601 3GS 8Amp Monitor Node PSU Cabinet (24/48) AH
PSU
IntelliPower Node
5 - 18
Additional Information
each IntelliPower node by simply unsetting/disarming the
system.
Battery charging via PSU
Battery charging is controlled by the IntelliPower node.
When the battery charge relay closes, the yellow LED
illuminates and the battery is charged at a voltage that is
temperature compensated. To enable temperature
compensation, a thermistor with flying-lead connection
is provided. It is important that the thermistor senses the
temperature of the battery only (and not other devices).
Therefore, if a single battery is in use, place the
thermistor on top of the battery. If using two batteries,
place the thermistor between them. This provides a
continual battery charge (4 and 8Amp PSU).
Battery test
The battery test is carried out at the Controller and at
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Deep discharge protection
If mains power fails at any IntelliPower node, that nodes
battery back-up is switched on to provide power. A
battery can only maintain a supply for a certain duration
and if mains/AC power is cut off for a prolonged period,
THE battery will eventually discharge itself. In general,
lead-acid batteries are damaged in terms of capacity and
service life if discharged below the recommended cut-off
voltage.
To prevent a battery discharging beyond recovery the
IntelliPower node instructs the PSU to disconnect the
battery when the battery output voltage reaches
10.5Vdc. When the mains/AC is restored, the battery will
be recharged.
IntelliPower Node
5 - 19
Diagnostic Menu IntelliPower
Node
The menu provides you with data on the
IntelliPower node’s current configuration and
allows monitoring of node and PSU
parameters. This information includes inputs,
outputs, fuse and tamper status.
It can be utilised to interrogate the status of
the node without having to remove the
cabinet lid, thus avoiding interfering with
cables and the need to use a voltmeter for
measuring node voltage and currents.
It can be accessed using the HHT infra-red.
Alternatively the same node information can
be accessed through the Node Configure
menu, submenu Monitor. [See page 8-18:
Node Configure - Nodes - Information Monitor]
Note For further information on HHT menus
see - PERIPHERAL DEVICES SECTION:
HAND-HELD TERMINAL CHAPTER 10.
To scroll back
PART
To scroll forward
through menu
UNSET
On-board Input / Output
Serial Number
PSU
V1.00
41 2O
14FEB99
2962463369
001 1< 2>
Node ID
Software Release Date
Software Version
Tamper Switch(s) Status
TAMPER OKAY 13.2V
FUSE OK
0000mA
DC Supply Voltage
Auxiliary Current
Fuse State
BATT OK
MAINS OK
3 Amp PSU
COMMS OK
PSU Type
Input 1 Resistance Value
101=30000
Z0
-D
102=30000
Z0
-D
103=30000
Z0
-D
104=30000
Z0
-D
O = Open
C = Closed
S = Short
D = Disconnected
Input 1 State
DC = DC Substitution
Input 1 Assigned Zone
Output State
01=OFF
0
Output Type
02=OFF
0
Press
#
to toggle output
displayed
ON/OFF
DAYS RUNNING = 37
5 - 20
Number of days the node has been
continuously powered up
4400
2200
<1400
30000
Variable
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
Overview
To integrate Access Control onto the 3GS, the Access Control node should be wired onto the ringnet as shown below.
It can be configured to control two access doors. These doors may be wired with readers on the entry side and either
readers or exit switches on the exit side. The doors are monitored for "door forced" and "left open" alarms, as well as
integration into the intruder system. Cards presented at the reader may be configured to set/arm and unset/disarm the
area/system [see page 7-3: Access System Overview].
RINGNET
Controller
RKD Node
Access Nodes
Aux. Alarm Output
(x 2)
Exit
Switch (x2)
Door Open
Monitor
Hand-Held
Transmitter
(HHT)
Exit Switch (x2)
Swipe
Reader (x4)
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Lock
Output (x2)
Proximity
Reader (x4)
Access Control System
5 - 21
ACCESS CONTROL (ACN) NODE
Description
The 3GS Access Control node provides an interface to control door access on the 3GS. The node is a two door
Controller with capacity for four readers (two entry and two exit) and two exit switches. The ACN has its own
monitored PSU suitable for powering readers. The reader technology supported is Weigand and Clock and Data,
allowing for proximity, swipe, pin and proximity, and pin and swipe readers. It also allows for one BCD pinpad
The ACN monitors two alarm zone inputs, two door inputs and has two system outputs as well as two door outputs.
[See page 7-3: Access System Overview for more information on access control].
2
EARTH
AC
3
AC
1
1A
1B
2A
2B
S
SHLD
4
5
3A
3B
4A
4B
6
I/P 1
R
OV
I/P 2
F1
7
DOOR 1
Q
F2
OV
DOOR2
F3
EXIT 1
P
OV
F4
+
EXIT 2
O
BATT
8
9
N
M
L
K
J
a Infra-red communications interface Used for Hand-Held Terminal (HHT) communications (see Diagnostic
menu for more details).
b Mains/AC LED Indication of mains/AC status. On=Mains/AC fail.
c Power supply and current consumption The Access Control node is powered from the mains/AC via the
transformer supplied (17V AC). Current Consumption -Quiescent State: 100mA Maximum: 150mA.
d Fuses
●
F1 Readers - 1 Amp 250V Anti-surge
●
F2 Locks - 1 Amp 250V Anti-surge
●
F3 Battery - 1 Amp 250V Anti-surge
●
F4 12V Auxiliary - 1 Amp 250V Anti-surge
e Battery LED Indication of battery status. On=Battery CONNECTED.
f Kick-start Allows powering up of the Access node from the battery.
g Battery leads For connection of battery back-up.
h Front tamper For monitoring of lid tamper conditions.
i Front tamper link Remove this link to enable front tamper monitoring.
5 - 22
j Door outputs These door outputs are used for driving the door locks. Door output 1 is linked to Reader 1. The
1A 12V +
PSU
4NC
4C
4NO
3NC
3C
3NO
+12V
OV
door locks should be powered from a separate power supply, as shown in diagram below.
-
k Outputs The Access Control node has two on-board 1Amp single pole changeover relays, which can be assigned
to any of the system outputs. [See page 8-22: Node Configure - Outputs].
1NO 1C 1NC
NO = Normally Open
NC = Normally Closed
+12V
0V
l Readers 1 and 2 The access node can be used with a variety of Weigand and Clock & Data readers, including
Huges, Motorola, Deister, AXM and Mr sensors.
Reader 1
Reader 2
Connection Details
0V: 0V connection on all readers
DAT/D1: DATA connection for Clock & Data readers
DATA1 connection for Weigand readers
CLK/D0: CLOCK for Clock & Data readers
DATA0 connection for Weigand readers
+5V: +5V power connection
VAL: Valid signal normally used to connect to green or valid LED as reader
VOI: Void signal normally used to connect to red or void LED as reader
+12V: +12V power connection. Some readers require 12V power instead of 5V power. See manufacturers reader
specifications for details on power requirements
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Access Control (ACN) Node
5 - 23
m BCD PINPads Only one BCD PINPad can be connected to each node.
n Back Tamper (for future use) Remove link and connect back tamper switch to terminals marked BT, as shown
below.
BT1
BT2
Back tamper
Normally closed
o Exit Reader Card Connection An ’exit card reader’ must be used in order to install exit readers on the 3GS
system. The card must be fitted to the access control node at the exit reader card connection. The reader itself is
then connected to the card via the terminal connectors. There are two exit reader connections on each Access
Control node, allowing for entry and exit readers on both doors. For more information on the use of exit reader
cards. [See page 7-3: Access System Overview].
1. Plastic spacers
1
2. Exit reader card connection
2
1
3. Support spacer
4. Reader connection
3
4
p Exit Switch If required, switches may be fitted that allow the doors to be unlocked.
EXIT 1
OV
EXIT 2
q Door Inputs The Access Control node has two on-board door inputs. These door inputs are monitored using
dual E.O.L. supervision as wired below. They are used for integration of access control and intruder, by assigning
zone types to them. For further information on integration [See page 7-3: Access System Overview].
2K2
2K2
DOOR 1
0V
DOOR 2
2K2
2K2
5 - 24
description
value
zone status
OPEN
4400
Zone open
CLOSED
2200
Zone closed
DISCON
30 000
Zone disconnected
SHORT
< 1400
Zone shorted
DC SUBS
Variable
DC Voltage substitution
r Inputs The Access Control node has two on-board zone inputs. These inputs are monitored using dual E.O.L.
supervision as wired below.
2K2
2K2
I/P 1
0V
I/P 2
2K2
description
value
zone status
OPEN
4400
Zone open
CLOSED
2200
Zone closed
DISCON
30 000
Zone disconnected
SHORT
< 1400
Zone shorted
DC SUBS
Variable
DC Voltage substitution
2K2
s Ringnet Connect the Ringnet cable to the four terminals 1A to 2B. These terminals are used for connecting the
Access Control node onto the ringnet (see connection diagram and cable type table below).
from previous
node
NODE
1A 1B 2A 2B SL
1A
ACCESS 1B
CONTROL 2A
NODE 2B
SL
to next
node
cable type
maximum distance
between nodes
Standard alarm cable
200m
Belden 9502
500m
UTP Category: 5 (solid core)
1000m
Belden 9829
1000m
1A 1B 2A 2B SL
NODE
Note [See page 5-10: 8I/O Node, branch node diagram in the ringnet section]
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Access Control (ACN) Node
5 - 25
Access Control Node Cabinet
The Access node is housed in a metal cabinet with
transformer (as shown in diagram below).
1
1A
1B
2A
2B
SHLD
3A
3B
4A
4B
I/P 1
OV
Access Control Node
I/P 2
DOOR 1
OV
DOOR2
EXIT 1
OV
EXIT 2
Additional Information
AC Power and Battery Backup
In order to function as specified, both primary and backup power sources should be connected. Primary power is
provided as 17VAC at the 3-way terminal block labelled ‘AC’. Cabinet earth must be connected to the terminal
labelled ‘earth’ and to the cabinet lid.
Secondary power is a sealed 12V lead-acid battery of up to 6.5H capacity connected via the stand-by battery leads.
Connect battery leads to battery terminals. To power node from battery only, press the battery kickstart switch and hold
down for 5 seconds.
5 - 26
Diagnostic Menu; Access Control
Node
The menu provides you with data on the Access
node’s current configuration and allows
monitoring of node and PSU parameters. This
information includes inputs, outputs, door
inputs, door outputs, cards, fuse and tamper
status.
2 Inputs, 2 Outputs,
2 Doors
ACC 2I 2O 2D 0000000034
V1.08 21DEC 99 009 1 2
Software Version
& Date
Comm. lines
Node Number
Scroll through the menu
by pressing :
UNSET
It can be utilised to interrogate the status of the
node without having to remove the cabinet lid,
thus avoiding interfering with cables and the
need to use a voltmeter for measuring node
voltage and currents.
Tamper Switch Status
Mains Status
TAMPER OK
MAINS OK
13.0V
250mA
DC Supply Voltage
Current reading
UNSET
Fuse status
It can be accessed using the HHT infra-red.
Alternatively the same node information can be
accessed through the Node Configure menu,
submenu Monitor. [See page 8-18: Node
Configure - Nodes - Information - Monitor]
Note For further information on HHT menus see
- PERIPHERAL DEVICES SECTION: HAND-HELD
TERMINAL CHAPTER 10.
Node serial number
F1 OK
F3 OK
F2 OK
F4 OK
UNSET
Output state
PART
UNSET
to scroll forward
through zones
to scroll back
through zones
Output Number
Output Type
Information is
displayed on zone
01=OFF
5
UNSET
02=OFF
5
UNSET
Resistance value
Input no.
Zone no.
Input state
I01=2200
Z8
-C
I02=2200
Z9
-C
UNSET
Door No.
System Door
Status of door
D01=2185
D1
-C
D02=2150
N2
-C
UNSET
Door Open time
DOOR#:1
LOCKED
DO10 LK5 GR3 DN2
Lock time
Red LED Denied
Green LED Granted
DOOR#:2
LOCKED
DO10 LK2 GR3 DN3
UNSET
Reader no.
Site code
READER#:1 TYPE:W ENTRY
S:2332
C: 25
Reader type
Card no.
UNSET
No. of days for which the
Node has been operating.
DAYS RUNNING=1
NO
Issue 01 Feb 2000
to exit
Access Control (ACN) Node
5 - 27
RADIO SYSTEM
Overview
The Diagram below shows how to integrate radio onto the 3GS system. The 3GS radio system allows portable panic
attack buttons (RPA) to be configured [see page 8-24: Radio PA Setup] to communicate to the 3GS Hold Up Alarm
(HUA) node on the ringnet. In addition the Controller can be configured [See page 8-58: Set Data Formats] to send
messages to a pager transmitter, which in turn transmits to a pager receiver.
Pager
Receiver
Pager
Transmitter
Controller
RINGNET
RKD Node
HUA Node
RPA
Unit
System Components
The radio system is comprised of the following components:
●
Hold Up Alarm Node (HUA)
●
Radio Panic Attack Unit (RPA)
●
Pager Transmitter
●
Pager Receiver
These components are detailed in the following pages4.
5 - 28
HOLD-UP ALARM (HUA) NODE
Description
a The Hold-Up Alarm (HUA) node is a radio receiver node and, like all other 3GS nodes, is connected to the 3GS
system via the ringnet. The unit will receive radio signals at 418 MHz or 433 MHz frequency, depending on the
radio module. This node allows for the integration of radio systems onto the 3GS. For more information on the
radio system [See page 5-28: Radio System Overview].
1
2
2
3
3
4
6
5
7
59
6
1A
1B
2A
2B
11
SHLD
M
3A
3B
13
4A
4B
OV
L
+12V
15
I1 COM 12
I3 COM I4
NO
C
NC
16
17
9
K
19
8
18
J
a Radio receiver module This radio receiver module may be 418MHz (UK only) or 433MHz (rest of Europe). This
determines the frequency of the receiver node.
b Front tamper The node monitors for front tamper.
c Front tamper link Use this link to override monitoring of front tamper.
d Back tamper The node monitors for back tamper.
e Back tamper and link (for future use) Use this link to override monitoring of back tamper.
f Diagnostic LED’s Green LED ON - indicates valid message received. Red LED ON- indicates RF Data error.
g Infra-red communications interface Used for Hand-Held Terminal (HHT) communications (see Diagnostic
menu for more details).
h Output The Hold-Up Alarm node has one on-board 1Amp single pole changeover relay, which can be assigned to
any of the system outputs. [See page 8-22: Node Configure - Outputs].
NO C NC
NO = Normally Open
NC = Normally Closed
+12V
0V
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Hold-Up Alarm (HUA) Node
5 - 29
i Inputs The HUA node has four on-board zone inputs. These inputs are monitored using dual E.O.L. supervision as
wired below.
2K2
2K2
I1
COM
I2
2K2
description
value
zone status
OPEN
4400
Zone open
CLOSED
2200
Zone closed
DISCON
30 000
Zone disconnected
SHORT
< 1400
Zone shorted
DC SUBS
Variable
DC Voltage substitution
2K2
j External BNC Antenna This antenna should be connected to the BNC connector for optimum performance.
k On-board antenna link When the jumper is across this link as shown, the on-board 1/4 wave whip antenna is
utilised. On the BNC external antenna node this jumper should be removed.
l Power supply and current consumption Current Consumption -Quiescent State: 100mA Maximum:
200mA.
m Ringnet communications Nodes should be wired in a ring configuration as shown. Standard alarm cable can
be used, however greater distances between nodes can be achieved if a twisted pair cable such as Belden 9829 is
used (see table B). The maximum permissible distance between nodes is 1Km (using Belden 9829). The interface
uses RS485 in a ring topology. The main Controller therefore has two RS485 ports and completes the ring connection. (See connection diagram and cable type table below).
from previous
node
NODE
1A 1B 2A 2B SL
1A
HUA 1B
Node 2A
2B
SL
to next
node
1A 1B 2A 2B SL
NODE
5 - 30
cable type
maximum distance
between nodes
Standard alarm cable
200m
Belden 9502
500m
UTP Category: 5 (solid core)
1000m
Belden 9829
1000m
Node Cabinet
This node has the same cabinet as the 8 Input/Output Node. (See previous section)
Additional Information
Approved methods for the optimisation of RPA performance
1
Fit an external antenna onto the HUA node if not already fitted.
2
Move the HUA node to a location where the signal strength is maximised as described in the RPA installation test
procedure below.
3
If the movement of the HUA node is not possible attach the antenna to the HUA node via a 50 Ohm coaxial cable
<10m in length and locate the antenna at the point of maximum signal strength. This must be verified with the test
equipment.
4
In cases where the above solutions are unsatisfactory another HUA node will have to be fitted to provide adequate
coverage on site. Steps 1 - 3 can be followed to optimise the node performance if required.
418 MHz RPA installation test procedure
Due to the vagaries of radio transmission, direct unit to unit comparison will give an unacceptably wide range of
performance values and cannot be used as a guideline for site installation. It is suggested that for new and retrofit
installations a test RPA is provided which provides output at the lower range and a modified HUA test node, along with a
Hand Held Terminal (HHT), are used to ensure that adequate coverage is provided on each site.
Test method
●
Locate the test node at the required location of the HUA node.
●
Setup the HHT to monitor the RPA signal strength.
●
Try the test RPA unit at the test node to ensure correct operation and full signal strength.
●
Remove the test RPA to the area to be tested and perform the test transmissions.
●
Ensure that the signal strength for each test is a pass value (>40%) on the HHT.
●
If a particular location fails to produce the pass signal then the test node must be moved closer to the test point or to
a location where there are less obstructions on the path to the test point. Once the test node has been setup at the
new location all the previous tests have to be redone to ensure they all still provide a pass signal value.
●
The HUA node must then be mounted at the exact position of the test node to provide equal performance.
●
The ringnet cables must be routed away from the antenna when installing the node.
●
Test all RPA’s that are to be assigned to the site at the test locations as per the test RPA unit and install them onto the
system as per the System Integration Manual.
It is recommended that the HUA node be mounted away from computers and large metal masses if possible, (i.e.
cable trays, filing cabinets, and metal shelves), as these objects tend to reduce the sensitivity of the receiver within
the HUA node.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Hold-Up Alarm (HUA) Node
5 - 31
Diagnostic Menu; Hold-Up
Alarm Node
The menu provides you with data on the
Hold-up Alarm node’s current
configuration and allows monitoring of
node and PSU parameters. This
information includes inputs, outputs, fuse
and tamper status.
HUA 4I 1O 0000008000
V1.22 10 AUG98 004 1 2
Software Version & Date
Note For further information on HHT
menus see - PERIPHERAL DEVICES
SECTION: HAND-HELD TERMINAL
CHAPTER 10.
Tamper Switch Status
Antenna Tamper Status
To scroll through the menu
TAMPER OKAY
ANTENNA OKAY
12.5V
DC Supply Voltage
Information is displayed on the last
Radio PA transmission
RPA Signal Strength
Indicates Low Battery
PART
UNSET
to scroll forward
through zones
to scroll back
through zones
RPA Serial Number
XXXXXXXXXX
LB
Button(s) Pressed
Input Analog
Resistance Value
Input Number
Zone Number
I01 = 22000
Z1 - C
I02 = 30000
Z0 - C
I03 = 30000
Z0 - C
I04 = 30000
Z0 - C
Input State (c=closed)
Output State
Output Number
Output Type (1255) assigned to
output
01 = OFF
0
# To toggle output displayed
ON/OFF
01 = ON
8
UNSET
Number of days the node
has been operational.
DAYS RUNNING = 20
NO
5 - 32
Comm. lines
Node Number
UNSET
It can be utilised to interrogate the status
of the node without having to remove
the cabinet lid, thus avoiding interfering
with cables and the need to use a
voltmeter for measuring node voltage
and currents.
It can be accessed using the HHT infrared. Alternatively the same node
information can be accessed through the
Node Configure menu, submenu
Monitor. [See page 8-18: Node
Configure - Nodes - Information Monitor]
Node serial number
4 Inputs, 1 Output
to exit
RADIO PANIC ATTACK UNIT (RPA)
Description
This unit is a portable radio transmitter, which is available at 418 MHz or 433 MHz frequencies. It can be configured as
a radio panic attack button unit or as a radio interrogation tool. [See page 8-24: Radio PA Setup].
3
2
2
34
1
4
5
6
6
a Left button (green)
b Top button (yellow)
c Belt clip (removable)
d Transmission LED indicator
e Right button (red)
f 9V battery
Additional Information
Power
The RPA unit is powered by a PP3 style 9V battery (6).
The alkaline variety must be used to meet battery specifications and to avoid damaging the units by leakage from spent
batteries. Battery polarity is indicated on the inside of the unit. On inserting the battery, the transmission indicator will
light for a short time to confirm operation. Incorrect insertion will not cause any damage.
Buttons
There are three buttons (1,2,5) which are pressed in various combinations to cause a transmission, indicated by the
transmission indicator LED (4) on the top face. Transmission continues for as long as the buttons are pressed. These
buttons can be programmed to operate individually or in combinations (this is performed from within the Radio PA
Setup menu in the Software section). There is a belt clip (3) attached to one face.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Radio Panic Attack Unit (RPA)
5 - 33
RADIO PAGER TRANSMITTER UNIT
Description
This unit transmits serial data from the 3GS Controller to remote radio pager receiver units. [See page 8-24: Radio PA
Setup].
Note Refer to the documents supplied with the pager for more detailed information.
LED1 LED2
1
2
3
a Power socket The Pager Transmitter unit requires a nominal 13.8Vdc and may be powered from the 3GS PSU or a
separate power supply. A lead is supplied with a 2-pin circular screw-locking connector on one end which should
be connected to the circular power socket located on the unit’s backplate.
b LEDs
●
●
LED1 - The red LED should remain on when power is connected correctly.
LED2 - The green LED (2) will light to indicate data transmission. Only the male 9-way “D” type connector (3) may
be used for serial connection.
c Serial port connector The Pager Transmitter Unit can be connected to any one of the Controller’s serial ports. The
Controller port MUST be configured for the correct communications protocol by selecting the “Set Data Format”
option.
5 - 34
RADIO PAGER RECEIVER UNIT
Description
The pager receiver unit is a digital radio receiver that displays and stores messages received from the pager transmitter
unit. The pager receiver must be turned on and is said to be in stand-by mode when the date and time are displayed.
When a message is received it is displayed and the pager generates a call alert by either beeping or vibrating. The user
can program the unit to generate the desired call alert.
The unit can store up to 16 messages in its memory and the user can delete all messages or individual messages as
required. Each pager receiver unit has a unique 7-digit primary and 7-digit secondary address. This may be viewed and
entered as Pager Address in the Radio PA Setup menu.
1
2
3
4
a Battery compartment
Note Low Battery Alarm - If the units 1.5V “AAA” battery drops below a workable level, the pager will sound a low battery
alarm. The message “Change Battery” appears on the display along with the battery low symbol. Press any key to stop
the alert tone. Turn off the power of the pager and slide the battery compartment (1) cover off the unit. Insert the battery
into the battery compartment, ensuring that the polarity of the battery is correct. To protect the data you have stored
in the pager, do not leave the pager without a valid battery for more than a few minutes.
b Alphanumeric display
Note Display Symbols - Various conditions are indicated by symbols on the bottom line of the display. These symbols
are described in the table below. Symbols relating to functions not specific to HUA operation (such as alarm clock) are
described in the pager manual supplied with the unit.
c Speaker
d Function buttons
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Radio Pager Receiver Unit
5 - 35
Additional Information
Deleting All Messages
Turning ON the pager unit
The pager should be turned OFF. Hold down
Hold down
and
simultaneously for more than 1 second. Release
for more than 1 second. The pager will
make a brief “Pager On” alert. The pager then goes into
stand-by mode.
and
and the pager will power up and show:
Turning OFF the pager unit
Hold down
in stand-by mode. Release it when the
pager emits a single beep, then quickly press it again
(within 2 seconds). A “Pager Off” message appears on
the display for 2 seconds.
Note When accessing the following functions, the pager
should be turned ON unless otherwise specified.
Reading Messages
The unit gives a tone or vibration alert to indicate that it
has received an alert message from the system. The
message indicator symbol also displays. Press to scroll
through the messages.
Deleting Messages One at a Time
Press
to view the messages, e.g.:
Press
to confirm deletion.
To view Pager Address
The pager should be turned OFF. Press
twice. The
primary address is displayed, e.g.:
This number may be entered as the pager address in
Radio PA Setup menu when programming the system
[See page 8-24: Radio PA Setup].
Press
to scroll to a secondary address and also to
view the units receiving frequency.
Change Call Alert from Tone to Vibration
When the display shows the message you wish to delete
press
. The display shows:
Hold down
Release
Press
for more than 1 second, display shows:
and the unit returns to Stand-by mode:
to toggle from “Save?” to “Delete”. Press
to enter delete mode (flashing stops) and display shows:
The unit will now Vibrate instead of Beeping.
Change Call Alert from Vibration to Tone
Press
and display shows:
Hold down
Press
5 - 36
again and the file is deleted.
Release
for more than 1 second, display shows:
and the unit returns to Stand-by mode:
receipt of a call.
The unit will now Beep instead of Vibrating. Note that
the volume of an alert tone increases in four steps on
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Radio Pager Receiver Unit
5 - 37
LEM NODE
Description The 3GS LEM node is primarily used to upgrade an existing Aplex/Adplex system to 3GS without the
need to re-wire every Aplex/Adplex system device. Typically, the Aplex panel is replaced by a 3GS Controller. The
Aplex A-LEM and C-LEM modules are then connected to the Controller via the LEM node. The Controller software will
recognise A-LEMs as node inputs and C-LEMs as outputs, addressing them automatically. The LEM node will recognise:
A-LEMs, SMT or Hybrid LEM, Quad LEM, C-LEM, AD-LEM, Combo LEM, Key Combo LEM, 6x6 I/O Module, 6 Output
Module.
Note The LEM node does not support Aplex/Adplex keypads.
1 2
34
1A
1B
2A
2B
J
SHLD
5
3A
3B
4A
4B
9
OV
12V
DTA
7
CTRL
LGND
GND
+12V
8
6
a Front tamper The node monitors for front tamper.
b Front tamper link Use this link to override monitoring of front tamper.
c Back tamper (for future use) The node monitors for back tamper.
d Back tamper link (for future use) Use this link to override monitoring of back tamper.
e Infra-red communications interface Not currently available on this node.
f LEM line Bus for connection of Europlex LEM product range. Refer to LEM product manuals for more details.
g LEM line power 12V power for powering LEM product range.
h LEM line fuse 250mA quick Blow.
i Power supply and current consumption The LEM node is powered from the Europlex 1A linear PSU as supplied in the cabinet.
5 - 38
j Ringnet communications Nodes should be wired in a ring configuration as shown. Standard alarm cable can be
used however, greater distances between nodes can be achieved if a twisted pair cable such as Belden 9829 is used
(see table B). The maximum permissible distance between nodes is 1Km (using Belden 9829). The interface uses
RS485 in a ring topology. The main Controller therefore has two RS485 ports and completes the ring connection. (See
connection diagram and cable type table below).
from previous
node
NODE
1A 1B 2A 2B SL
1A
LEM 1B
Node 2A
2B
SL
to next
node
cable type
maximum distance
between nodes
Standard alarm cable
200m
Belden 9502
500m
UTP Category: 5 (solid core)
1000m
Belden 9829
1000m
1A 1B 2A 2B SL
NODE
Note [See page 5-10: 8I/O Node, Branch Node diagram, in the ringnet section]
Issue 01 Feb 2000
LEM Node
5 - 39
LEM Node Cabinet
1
1
Led1
LEM Node
2
PSU
Led2
3
F1
F2
+
4
BATT
5
7
6
a Transformer connector (17V AC)
d Battery connections
b LEDs
e Front tamper switch
●
LED1 - Mains/AC
●
LED2 - Fuse status
c Fuses
●
F1 - 1 Amp Quick Blow
●
F2 - 1 Amp Quick Blow
5 - 40
f 12 V DC and tamper connection
g Tamper connection Links LEM node tamper to PSU
front tamper
Additional Information
interference on the LEM data line and must be avoided.
Installing the LEM node
Typically, the Aplex/Adplex panel is replaced by a 3GS
Controller. The Aplex A-LEM and C-LEM modules are
then connected to the Controller via the LEM node. The
Controller software will recognise A-LEMs as node inputs
and C-LEMs as outputs, addressing them automatically.
The LEM node will recognise:
A-LEMs, SMT or Hybrid LEM, Quad LEM, C-LEM,
Combo LEM, Key Combo LEM, 6x6 I/O Module, 6
Output Module. The LEM node is delivered in a metal
enclosure, together with its 1A PSU. It should, therefore,
be left in this enclosure, and not installed in the 3GS
cabinet, to avoid any PSU conflict.
The LEM node must be powered by its 1A linear power
supply, and not by the 3GS switch-mode PSU. The LEM
node does not support Aplex/Adplex keypads. Powering
the LEM node from the 3GS PSU can cause
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Cable distance & type supported
No more than 750 metres of standard unscreened alarm
cable (capacitance <100pf / km) should be connected to
a single LEM node. If two LEM nodes are used on a 3GS
system, each can support up to 750 metres. If a screened
cable is used, it is likely that less than 350m of this
recommended distance is possible.
Multiple LEM nodes
No more than 2 LEM nodes should be connected to a
single 3GS system. If two LEM nodes are installed on the
same 3GS system, they should be powered separately by
their own 1A PSUs.
LEM Node
5 - 41
ENCRYPTION NODE
Description
The traditional method of detecting alarm and tamper inputs uses end-of-line resistance, where different resistance
values reported to the panel will indicate different states. The 3GS Encryption node receives encrypted inputs from an
encryption module placed inside the alarm sensor. The node is wired for both alarm and tamper loops and has an
individual node address. In this way, the panel receives alarm or tamper events from an individual zone input address,
making system compromise more difficult. The node also incorporates all the features of the 3GS 8 Input/1 Output
node.
1 2
3
1A
1B
2A
2B
K
SHLD
J
3A
3B
4A
4B
4
OV
8
7
6
1NC
1NO
1CO M
I8+
I7+
COM -
I6+
I5+
COM -
I4+
I3+
COM -
I2+
I1+
COM -
+ 12V
OV
AU X
AU X
12V
5
a Front tamper The node monitors for front tamper.
b Front tamper link Use this link to override monitoring of front tamper.
c Back tamper (for future use) The node monitors for back tamper.
d Back tamper link (for future use) Use this link to override monitoring of back tamper.
e Infra-red communications interface Used for Hand-Held Terminal (HHT) communications (see Diagnostic
menu for more details).
f Output The Encryption node has one on-board 1Amp single pole changeover relay, which can be assigned to any of
the system outputs. [See page 8-22: Node Configure - Outputs].
1NO 1COM 1NC
NO = Normally Open
NC = Normally Closed
+12V
0V
5 - 42
f Inputs The Encryption node has eight on-board zone inputs. These inputs are monitored using dual E.O.L. supervision as wired below.
I1 COM I2
BLACK
RED
ENCRYPTION
MODULE
description
value
zone status
OPEN
4400
Zone open
CLOSED
2200
Zone closed
DISCON
30 000
Zone disconnected
SHORT
< 1400
Zone shorted
DC SUBS
Variable
DC Voltage substitution
Encryption module The Encryption module is placed within the sensor or detector and connects to the sensor alarm
and contact loops, and to the input and common terminals on the Encryption node.
The Module processor is pre-programmed at the factory with one of 256 sub-addresses. 3GS software will combine with
these sub-addresses to allow a potential 64,000 unique addresses.
g Auxiliary supply(12V) Used to power auxiliary devices to a maximum of 250mA
h Auxiliary supply fuse 250mA Quick Blow
i Power supply and current consumption The Encryption node requires 12V DC, which should be supplied
directly from the Controller PSU or from a remote PSU. Current consumption - Quiescent 100mA.
j Ringnet Communications Connect the Ringnet cable to the four terminals 1A to 2B.
These terminals are used for connecting the Encryption node onto the ringnet (see connection diagram and cable
type table below).
from previous
node
NODE
1A 1B 2A 2B SL
1A
Encryption 1B
Node 2A
2B
SL
to next
node
cable type
maximum distance
between nodes
Standard alarm cable
200m
Belden 9502
500m
UTP Category: 5 solid core
1000m
Belden 9829
1000m
1A 1B 2A 2B SL
NODE
Note [See page 5-10: 8I/O Node, Branch Node diagram, in the ringnet section]
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Encryption Node
5 - 43
k Encryption selection header connector
Encryption Node Cabinet
This node has the same cabinet as the 8 Input/Output Node. [See page 5-8: 8 I/O section]
5 - 44
Diagnostic Menu;
Encryption Node
The menu provides you with data
on the Encryption node’s current
configuration and allows
monitoring of node and PSU
parameters. This information
includes inputs, outputs, fuse and
tamper status.
It can be utilised to interrogate the
status of the node without having
to remove the cabinet lid, thus
avoiding interfering with cables
and the need to use a voltmeter for
measuring node voltage and
currents.
It can be accessed using the HHT
infra-red. Alternatively the same
node information can be accessed
through the Node Configure
menu, submenu Monitor. [See
page 8-18: Node Configure Nodes - Information - Monitor]
Note For further information on
HHT menus see - PERIPHERAL
DEVICES SECTION: HAND-HELD
TERMINAL CHAPTER 10.
To scroll back
PART
To scroll forward
through menu
UNSET
On-board Input / Output
Serial Number
I/O
V1.11
8I 1O
15Apr97
00000000230
002 1 2
Node ID
Currrent Date
Software Version
Tamper Switch(s) Status
TAMPER OK
FUSE OKAY
12.7V
000mA
DC Supply Voltage
Input 1 Analog Resistance Value
I 01 = 2185
Z0
-C
I 02= 2221
Z0
-C
I 03 = 30000
Z0
-C
I 04= 30000
Z0
-C
I 05 = 30000
Z0
-D
I 06= 30000
Z0
-D
I 07 = 2185
Z0
-D
I 08= 2221
Z0
-D
O
C
S
D
Input 1 State
DC
Input 1 Assigned Zone
= Open
= Closed
= Short
= Disconnected
= DC Substitution
4400
2200
<1400
30000
Variable
Output State
01=ON
07
Output Type
Press
#
to toggle output
ON/OFF
DAYS RUNNING = 37
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Number of days the node has been
continuously powered up
Encryption Node
5 - 45
5 - 46
6
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
In this chapter
■
Serial port connection .......................................... 6-1
- Connecting a printer
- Direct connect to a PC/laptop
- Remote communication via modem
- Remote communications via DM1200 (Europe)
- Euronetwork card
SERIAL PORT CONNECTION
Connecting a printer
Direct Connect to a PC/Laptop
A local serial printer can be connected to the 3GS. Any
80-column serial printer that can be configured for the
data format below and which will accept TTL signal level
will work with the 3GS.
When programming the system locally with Panelman,
you will need to connect the 3GS to the serial port on
the PC or laptop.
Port 1
7 8 3 2
2
Port 2
5
0V
Port 1
Port 3
TX RX 0V
TX RX
3
7 11
7 11
7
Port 2
8 2
3
5
2
3
7
Port 3
TX RX 0V
0V
TX RX
7
3
2
D25 - Serial Plug
D25 - Serial Plug
PC or Laptop
The system should be configured as follows:
Serial Printer
Serial port 3 on the 3GS controller defaults to the
following printer set-up:
Baud Rate:
1200
Parity:
EVEN
Stop Bits:
1
Data Bits:
7
Note 3GS provides three serial ports that offer a wide
range of communication capabilities. However, you should
refer to Set Data Format in the Software section for
information on the range of possible serial port settings.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Printer:
No
System ID:
1
Access Control:
31
Log Filter:
32767
Dial Mode:
0
Data Bits:
8
Baud Rate:
2400
Parity
Even
Serial Port Connection
6-1
Remote Communication via Modem
Serial port 1 on the controller defaults to ESCO set-up,
which is:
For remote communication with the 3GS system (for
example using Europlex’s ED2000 3GS+, Panelman or
when using a remote printer), you must connect a
modem to the system.
Port 1
7
8
Port 2
2
3
5
3
2
7
0V
TX RX 0V
7
D25 - SERIAL PLUG
Modem
6-2
Port 3
TX RX
2
3
Baud Rate:
2400
Parity:
EVEN
Data Bits:
8
Stop Bits:
1
Remote Communication via DM1200
The DM1200 is Europlex’s 16-channel digital
communicator/modem with 1200 baud serial comms
capability. Serial port 2 on the 3GS defaults to DM1200
settings.
The DM1200 monitors the 3GS’s control line to
determine the state of the outputs. These outputs can be
mapped to the DM1200’s channels which can number
16 in fast format, 8 in slow format.
If an output changes state and the delay timer has
expired the DM1200 seizes the phone line
(disconnecting any other apparatus connected) and dials
a pre-programmed number. The appropriate signals are
sent to the alarm central station receiver, indicating the
type of alarm.
Programming of the DM1200 can be performed through
the 3GS RKD. [See - PERIPHERAL DEVICES SECTION:
DM1200 CHAPTER 12].
Note To connect remote communication devices for use
with PC software, you must connect a modem to the PC
and a DM1200 to the panel. This is the only configuration
that will work.
Port 2
Port 1
7
8 5 6
Port 3
0V 12V TX RX 0V 12V TX RX
2 3
3A/4A/8A PSU
3A/4A/8A PSU
To Controller terminal
labelled "CNTL".
E
0V
+12V
CNTL
TX
RX
E
0V
+12V
CNTL
TX
RX
To Controller terminal
labelled "CNTL".
Central Station Receiver
3GS
DM1200
PTT
PSTN
PC running
Eurodial remote
monitoring software
Modem
Local Serial Printer
Main Instrument
Printer
DM 1200 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Serial Port Connection
6-3
Euronetwork Card
The serial port should be configured as follows:
When using Network XII or 3GS+ software, a
Euronetwork card is required per Controller in the
network.
Port 1
Port 3
Port 2
0V 12V TX RX 0V 12V TX RX
Printer
No
System 10
1-12
Access Control
31
Log Filter
32767
Dial Mode
0
Data Bits
8
Parity
Yes
Note All controllers must be set to the same baud rate.
A B C D
A B C D
TX RX 0V 12V
Euronetwork Card
6-4
3GS SOFTWARE
ABOUT THIS SECTION
General Programming
●
Date and time
●
Serial port (communications setup)
Intruder Alarm
●
Setup Users
●
Setup Zones and Inputs
●
Setup Nodes
●
Setup Outputs
●
Setup Areas
●
Monitor and test zones
●
Reports and logs
●
Alarm handling
Access Control
●
Setup Cards
●
Setup Doors
●
Setup Door Groups
●
Setup Time zones
●
Setup Access level
●
Setup Visitor level
●
Setup Function Level
●
Door control
●
Monitor and test Access
●
Reports and logs
Radio Panic Attack
●
Setup RPA
●
Setup RPA buttons
●
Setup Pager
●
Monitor and test RPA
●
Reports and logs
7
PROGRAMMING OVERVIEW
In this chapter
■
General overview ........................... 7-1
■
Intruder system overview................. 7-2
■
Access system overview ................... 7-3
■
Access control setup examples ........ 7-5
■
Radio system overview .................... 7-7
■
Getting started................................ 7-8
GENERAL OVERVIEW
●
Nodes
100
Outputs
255
Output Functions
1000
●
●
Complete programmability is a very powerful feature of
the 3GS system. This allows you to configure each system
for an installation’s specific requirements and to define
how zones behave under certain conditions. Node
descriptions, zone descriptions and user names allow
easy identification of system events and user action.
●
Up to 255 system relay outputs which can switch on
and off alarm sounders, lights, control cameras, open
electric gates etc. Some of these outputs may
connect directly to the control unit, while others
interface to the network via nodes.
Audible devices, such as bells, sirens, buzzers etc.
Sensors which connect to system zones (for example
motion detectors).
Smoke detectors which detect the presence of
smoke or pre-combustion gases in the area where
they are placed.
●
10,000 access cards.
●
64 access doors.
Software Identification
Nodes
Information about the software version used for a
particular panel is printed on the panel’s eprom:
The 3GS system handles one hundred nodes in total on
the ringnet. The nodes available offer a range of
functionalities. These includes display and key entry,
input and output for intruder access control and radio
power monitoring etc.. Depending on the system
configuration, these nodes can be used to handle the
highest level of security, access control and many other
features.
1
3GS xxx xx
xxxxx 023Z
Outputs
2
This label provides the following information:
a Product Name. This is the product name for the
panel (3 characters).
b ID Code. Every new release eprom is given a unique
identification code. This code is used by Europlex to
identify the exact files used to create the eprom.
Note If you have a query regarding software always quote
this ID code.
Software Features
Your Europlex integrated system consists of some or all of
the following equipment:
The 3GS system is capable of controlling up to 255
unique system outputs. The Controller has four on-board
1 Amp relays, while relays on the I/O nodes can be
addressed to any output number (1-255). Relay outputs
can be used to trigger any amount of devices for many
applications.
Typical applications are:
●
Siren/bell/strobe triggering
●
Camera Switching
●
System set/arm and alarm indication
●
Lighting / heating circuit control
●
Door / security barrier control
●
Inputs to remote communication devices
Output functions are predefined and output types may
be assigned to them.
●
3GS Control Panel
●
Up to one hundred nodes
Variables
Up to 200 fully supervised zones, some of which can
be connected directly to the main control panel and
others which interface to a network cable ringnet
running around your premises via nodes.
The 3GS system has many variables, which are detailed
later in this chapter. These variables offer a choice of
operation to the installer, allowing for the customisation
of the system.
●
Issue 01 Feb 2000
General Overview
7-1
INTRUDER SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Alarm Users
126
Alarm Zones
200
Areas
32
Alarm Log
1000
The main intruder system components are
detailed below. The diagram opposite shows an
example of this configuration.
Remote comms.
to central station.
Serial Port
DM1200
Controller
Ringnet
PSU
Bat.
Users
Currently the 3GS system supports up to one
hundred and twenty six intruder system users.
User 1, by default, is the installer/engineer user,
who has a default code of 1010 and a default set 8I/O Node
of engineering options, detailed in the Menus
chapter, which can not be altered. User 2, by
default, is the master user, who has a default user
code of 1020 and a default set of options, also
detailed in the Menus chapter, which can not be
altered.
RKD Node
Aux. Alarm Output
6 Output Node
There are three special users, which are for
logging purposes only; user 37 is a timed user,
user 38 is a remote user and user 39 is an access
control user. These special users have no user
options and no user code. All other users can be
given a subset of the master user options.
Encryption Node
Zone
Zones
The 3GS currently has the facility for up to two
hundred alarm zone inputs and sixty four alarm
door zone inputs. Zones are added to the system
using end of line resistors (EOL’s). Each node on
the 3GS, except for the 6 Output node, has the
capacity for zones. A node input is assigned a zone
number on power up. All inputs on all nodes do not have
to be used. These zones are configured on the intruder
system by assigning zone types and attributes (detailed in
the Menus chapter), which determine the behaviour and
actions of the system in various modes.
Areas
The 3GS system can be sub divided into areas. These
areas may be set/armed and unset/disarmed individually.
Users and RKDs may be assigned to one or more areas
and only users with rights to these areas will be allowed
to set/arm or unset/disarm them. Area related messages
can only be viewed at RKDs assigned to the area. Zones
and doors can also be assigned to an area so that when
an area is armed, both zones and doors are also armed.
7-2
Hand-Held
Transmitter
(HHT)
Outputs
The 3GS outputs can be configured to respond to
intruder alarm events. The system has a set of default
outputs (detailed in the Menus chapter), which are
tripped under certain conditions. The nodes must be
configured to have node outputs mapped to output
types. More than one node output may be assigned to
the same output type.
Intruder Log
The intruder log stores one thousand log events, which
are date and time stamped. This log provides a record of
all intruder and system activity (keypad input, status
alerts, alarm activations, etc.). It can be viewed on the
RKD nodes or printed if a hard-copy is required. The
detail and length of the log provides an invaluable record
of the system operation for both fault finding and
intrusion alarm analysis.
ACCESS SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Cards
10,000
Doors
64
Access Levels
250
Function Levels
250
Visitor Levels
250
Door Groups
250
Time Zones
64
Access Control Log
3,000
Remote comms.
to central station.
Serial Port
DM1200
Ringnet
Controller
PSU
Bat.
The 3GS Access Control system
allows the 3GS to manage a
complex card access system for
your premises. The diagram
opposite shows an example of
this configuration.
RKD Node
Doors
The 3GS Access node provides a
facility for two doors per node
(see Hardware section), to a
capacity of sixty four doors per
system. Each door can be
integrated to the intruder system
by assigning zone types and
attributes. The door can be used
in conjunction with cards to set/
arm and unset/disarm the
Hand-Held
system. These doors are
Transmitter
monitored for forced and left
open conditions and outputs can (HHT)
be tripped for these events.
Doors can be set up for free
access or card access, or can be
timed or permanently opened/locked.
Aux. Alarm Output
(x 2)
Access Nodes
Exit
Switch
Exit Switch (x2)
Door Open
Monitor
Lock
Output (x2)
Swipe
Reader (x2)
Proximity
Reader (x2)
particular doors.
Door Groups
Time Zones
Doors are grouped to provide different levels of access.
A time zone is a set of on/off times for a selection of days
in the week. They can be applied to doors for timed
opening or locking and to cards to permit access to a
group of doors for a time zone via access levels. Time
zones may be configured for extra security features, such
as PIN codes.
Cards
The 3GS Access system has a capacity for 10,000 cards.
Each card must be passed on the system for an access
level, which is a combination of door groups and time
zones. Cards may be configured as temporary cards
(visitor level), which makes the card valid on the system
between specified times.
For integration of cards onto the intruder system,
function levels can be assigned to the card, which allow
setting/arming and unsetting/disarming the system at
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Access Log
The access control log provides a record of all access
control events (access granted, access denied, timed
open, manual door control, etc.). These events are all
date and time stamped and may be viewed or printed.
Access System Overview
7-3
PIN pad only operation
This option is only available on Access Control node
software, rev. 1.06 or later. This allows the cardholder to
gain access using just the card's PIN code. However, if
two cardholders' PIN codes match, the system will use
the first cardholders information to log the data. Ideally
each cardholder should have a unique PIN code. This
feature is only enabled when the cardholder has a time
zone with the PIN ONLY attribute set. When the time
zone is active the cardholder can simply enter his code
to gain access. When the time zone has elapsed, card
and PIN are required.
●
PINPad Only Duress code
The Duress code is now activated by keying in the code
followed by the hash key (#) on the PINpad.
●
Access Node Stand-alone mode – PIN only
In stand-alone mode, access is permitted through doors
with keypads, using a system PIN code only. This system
PIN code defaults to 1020, but may be changed from the
SETUP CARDS, SITE CODE menu on the panel.
Note PINpad only operation is configurable using 3GS+.
The Access Node will store 300 log events when in
stand-alone mode.
Cards and Stand-Alone Operation
Operating the Node in stand-alone mode, i.e. when not
connected to the Ringnet, will affect its ability to read
cards in the following ways:
●
●
Unstructured Cards will not be recognised.
The node will support structured cards of numbers 1
to 10,000 only.
7-4
If a card had been presented to the reader and granted
access while comms. were operating, the node will keep
this information in memory. When in standalone mode,
the Access Control Node will continue to grant access to
this card. If access was denied while comms. were
operating, the standalone node will deny access
accordingly.
Door Outputs
The system features two outputs specific to doors. These
are:
Door Forced
Forcing a door will cause a door forced output to
trigger (specific to the door, if assigned), the door
description to be displayed, and a keypad buzzer to
sound in the relevant areas (local alarm only).
If a door is programmed with a zone type, then a door
forced will cause execution of a zone command string,
i.e. if the system is set/armed a full alarm will result.
If a door is inhibited, the ‘door forced’ and ’door left
open’ conditions are still monitored for access control
but will not cause an alarm.
To remove a door zone which is generating false alarms,
the door should be disabled until the door zone is fixed
(Installer code plus SHIFT NO).
Door Left Open
Leaving a door open too long will cause a door left
open output to trigger (specific to the door, if assigned),
the door description to be displayed, and a keypad
buzzer to sound in the relevant areas (local alarm only).
Door timers are setup or changed using 3GS+ software.
ACCESS CONTROL SETUP EXAMPLES
Example 1
- Select to card 1
To pass a card (no.1 site code 1000) for all doors on the
system for 24 hour access. The card must be presented
to each door when entry is required at any time of the
day.
- Select ’Change Access Level?’
- Enter access level 1
- Quit back to Date & Time
●
SETUP
●
●
- Installer code SHIFT SHIFT 8
- Select ’Access’
Setup Site Code
- Installer code SHIFT SHIFT 6
- Select ’Groups - Times’
- Select ’Cards’
- Enter group/time
- Select ’site code’
- Enter door group no.1
- Enter 0000001000
- Enter time zone 0 (24 Hr)
- Quit back to Date & Time
- Quit back to ’Group - Times
- Installer code SHIFT SHIFT 6
- Enter access level 1
- Select ’cards’
- Set Group/Time to YES
- Select ’assign’
- Quit back to Date & Time
- Select ’learn’
- Access level 1 is setup for group/time 1, which is
- Select door number to be programmed from
door group 1 for 24 hour access
●
Setup Door Group 1
- Present card to reader at door selected
- Installer code SHIFT SHIFT 3
- Display shows CARD 1 → 1
- Select ’Setup’
- Card no.1 is now assigned to card ID 1
- Enter door group 1
- Quit back to ’Cards
- Select all doors by pressing * key. All dots (.) on
Pass/Void’
Pass Card for all Doors for 24 hour Access
●
Access’
- Select ’Access’
Assign Card no.1 onto the System
- Select required card ID
●
Setup Access Level 1
Select an access level
the display change to asterix (*)
- Quit back to Date & Time
- From ’Cards Pass/Void’ select ’Pass/Void’
- Select ’Pass cards’
The card is now passed for all doors for 24 hours a day.
- Select from card 1
This setup can be greatly simplified by using Europlex’s
Access Management Software 3GS+.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Access Control Setup Examples
7-5
Example 2
●
- Setup access level 2 for group time 2: door
To setup the access system so all doors are in free access
from 9am to 1pm and from 2pm to 5pm, Mon-Fri. Card
access is required outside these times.
●
Setup Time Zone for Doors
- Installer code SHIFT SHIFT 5
- Select ’Zones’
- Select ’Setup’
- Enter time zone 1
- Enter time slot 1
- Set On Time to 09.00
- Set Off Time to 13.00
- Enter time slot 2
- Set On Time to 14.00
- Set Off Time to 17.00
- Quit back to Selection of Days
- Set Mon, Tue, Wed, Thur, Fri to YES
- Quit back to ’Enter Time Zone’
●
Setup Time Zone for Card Access
- In Time Zone menu enter time zone 2
- Enter time slot 1
- Set On Time to 13.00
- Set Off Time to 14.00
- Enter time slot 2
- Set On Time to 17.00
- Set Off Time to 09.00
- Set all days to YES and the rest of the time zone
options to NO
7-6
Setup Cards for Card Access
group 1 (all doors), time zone 2
- Pass all cards for access level 2
●
Setup Doors for Free Access
- Installer code SHIFT 3
- Select ’Setup’
- Select ’Zones’
- Select door 1
- Press YES for time zone 1. Dot (.) changes to
asterix (*)
- Repeat for all doors on the system
- Quit back to Date & Time
Doors will go into free access during the times 9am 1pm and 2pm - 5pm, no card required. OUtside these
times card access is required to open the doors.
More complex examples of the above can be achieved,
but to do so Europlex recommend the use of the Access
Management Software 3GS+. Using this software, it is
possible to easily configure the access control system to
allow card access to a variety of doors for various times
using different access levels. Time zones can be setup to
require a card and PIN for access. Cards can be setup as
visitor cards, which requires specifying a start and expiry
date. Cards can be configured to set/arm and unset/
disarm the system/areas by passing the card for a
function level. For more information see the on-line help
on 3GS+ PC Software.
RADIO SYSTEM OVERVIEW
PAGER
RECEIVER
The 3GS Radio system allows for the
integration of 418MHz or 433MHz radio
panic attack buttons. The diagram
opposite shows an example of this
configuration.
Radio PA Buttons
These radio transmitter buttons can be
given a description (user name or
location) and may be configured to
transmit a range of messages depending
on the button combination pressed.
These units also monitor for low battery
condition.
PAGER
Pager Transmitter
RINGNET
The pager transmitter unit is connected to
a serial port on the 3GS. This can be
configured to transmit messages to pager
receivers.
RKD NODE
HUA NODE
HUA NODE
RPA
HHT
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Radio System Overview
7-7
GETTING STARTED
In order for the system to function as specified, ensure
that both AC/mains and battery back-up power sources
are connected.
Initialising the system with either power source removed
will generate an alert message. On power up, the RKD
node briefly displays its own setup information followed
by the 3GS application program version/operating system
version and date. (Refer to diagram on page 7-11 for
more details).
Cold start or warm start?
If this is the initial power up, perform a cold start (see
table overleaf). While the 3GS version message is on the
display (approximately 5 seconds), press the FULL key. A
cold start resets the system RAM thereby returning
system settings to their default settings (all programmed
data and log data is cleared).
If you are powering up a system which already has data
programmed, allow the version message to time-out and
this will generate a warm start.
Clear node database?
The node database contains data the installer will have
programmed, such as node IDs, descriptions, input/
output assignments and so on. On initial power up
therefore, this database is already clear. When this option
is selected, the system scans the Ringnet and assigns
default ID numbers and descriptions to all on-line nodes
and assigns zone numbers to all on-line inputs. Any
programmed node information is overwritten.
By selecting NO to this option, it is possible to perform a
cold start, without losing programmed node information.
Enter name & address
The system requests the installation name and address.
This is achieved by placing a text overlay on the numeric
keypad and using the method described in “Typing Text”
7-8
in the Menus chapter in the Software section to enter
alphanumeric characters.
The installation name /address will appear on the system
log, literal printout and on-line reports. To bypass this
step press the # key.
Initialise nodes?
Following a warm start (or soft start), this option prompts
you to inform the system if you have changed the node/
input/door hardware configuration (nodes/inputs/doors
added or removed) by pressing the YES key.
If the node/input/door hardware configuration is
unchanged since the last system start-up, press NO.
System start types
There are four different start types outlined in the table
below. It is not necessary to perform a warm/soft start
when adding new nodes/inputs/doors to the system.
These can now be brought on-line within the Node
Configure option.
On-line nodes / on-line inputs / on-line
doors
The system will make a count of all on-line nodes, inputs
and doors. If this does not correspond with the number
of nodes, inputs or doors connected, press the NO key.
The number of off-line nodes, inputs or doors is then
displayed. The system will indicate why a node is OFFLINE.
Alert message displayed on start up
Following a system start up, an alert message will be
displayed. A cold start will also cause the keypad buzzer
to sound. It will be necessary to “alert accept” these
messages [See page 8-81: Accept All Alerts].
Start Type
How to select...
When to select...
Consequence
Cold Start
Press down FULL key
while 3GS version message is displayed
(directly after applying
power)
On initial power up.
If programmed data is corrupt and reset required
System RAM is reset.
All system programmed data
and historical log information
is lost
Warm Start
Allow normal message
routine (after applying
power)
Normal power up
Option to add new nodes/
inputs
Programmed data okay
Soft Start
i) CODE SHIFT 7
During system operation
Option to add new nodes/
inputs
Programmed data okay
During system operation a
reset button auto start will
allow you to reset RAM by
pressing the FULL key while
the version message is displayed, i.e. perform a "Cold
Start"
System messages will indicate the cause of system generated auto start
ii) Select Soft Start from
menu
Auto Start
i) Automatic system
reset (after hardware
disruption)
ii) Reset button activated (located on Controller board)
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Getting Started
7-9
Diagram
3GS SPEX V4.00-16 23 JULY 99
3GS OSEX V4.00-16 23 JULY 99
FULL
CLEAR RAM ?
YES
CLEARING RAM
Key in Name/ ENTER NAME/ ADDRESS
Address (see Typing Text section)
#
NO
...for Cold Start only
WARM START
COLD START
INITIALISE NODES ?
CHECKSUM =
181C80H
YES
YES
OFFLINE NODES x -> x
3 NODES : ID = 0
NO
ONLINE NODES x -> x
where x = on line nodes
NO
OFFLINE INPUTS y -> y
YES
ONLINE INPUTS y -> y
where y = on line inputs
NO
YES
OFFLINE DOORS z -> z
NO
ONLINE DOORS Z -> Z
where Z = on line doors
YES
PSU TYPE = 4AMP*
FRI 23JUL00 15:15:20
7 - 10
* may also be 3A or 8A PSU type
8
MENUS
In this chapter
■
Menu navigation......................................... 8-1
■
Typing text .................................................. 8-2
■
Help menu ................................................. 8-3
■
Installer menu options ................................ 8-4
■
Master menu options .................................. 8-5
■
Zones/Doors/Vars menu ............................. 8-6
■
Node Configure menu ................................ 8-16
■
Radio PA Setup menu.................................. 8-24
■
Service Mode menu .................................... 8-25
■
Radio PA Test menu..................................... 8-31
■
Setup Cards menu ...................................... 8-32
■
Card Information menu .............................. 8-38
■
Door Configure menu ................................. 8-39
■
Time Zone Setup......................................... 8-44
■
Door Group Setup menu............................. 8-47
■
Manual Door Control menu ........................ 8-48
■
Edit Levels Database menu ......................... 8-49
■
Setup SIA menu .......................................... 8-51
■
Soak Mode menu ....................................... 8-52
■
Disable Mode menu.................................... 8-53
■
Output Test menu ....................................... 8-54
■
System Log menu ....................................... 8-55
■
Print All Reports menu................................. 8-56
■
Set Date & Time menu ................................ 8-57
■
Set Data Format menu................................ 8-58
■
Force Call menu ......................................... 8-62
■
Setup DM1200 menu.................................. 8-63
■
User Setup menu ........................................ 8-64
■
Area Setup menu ........................................ 8-66
■
Edit Output Database menu ........................ 8-68
■
Radio PA Assign menu ................................ 8-70
■
Time Advance menu ................................... 8-75
■
Literal Edit and Holiday Scheduler menu ..... 8-76
■
Command Mode menu ............................... 8-78
■
Soft Start menu........................................... 8-79
■
Unset/Reset menu ...................................... 8-80
■
Accept All Alerts menu ................................ 8-81
■
Edit Time Commands menu ........................ 8-82
■
Inhibit Mode menu ..................................... 8-84
Menu Navigation
1
2
Remote Keypad Display
You use the remote keypad display (RKD) to
control, program and observe the past or
present state of your installation.
The keypad can be divided into the following
main areas:
DISARM
EVENING
YES
NIGHT
4
AWAY
5
HELP
6
NO
SHIFT
a Mode Keys. Allow you to arm (Part/
*
5
Half/Full) and disarm the system.
4
3
b Alpha Numeric Display. The 2 x 24
character liquid crystal display (LCD)
shows system messages or prompts.
UNSET
PART
HALF
FULL
c Status LEDs. The three LEDs to the
right of the numeric keypad provide a
visual display of the system status, as follows:
Green: indicates system power
status.
●
●
●
YES
NO
SHIFT
Yellow: indicates the occurrence of a
system event. An ‘alert” or ‘warning”
message will indicate the location and nature of
the event.
d Numeric Entry Keys. You use the numeric key-
Red: indicates the status of the communications
network.
e Menu Navigation Keys. Allow you to navigate
LED Steady
LED Flashing
Green
Mains supply present
Mains supply failure
Yellow
System warning message
System alert message
Red
Communications lost
Communications lost line 1A 1B
Communications OK
(flashes on briefly
every 2-3 seconds.)
pad to enter your user code and to program the system.
through the menu structures.
Security
The 3GS contains a number of features to protect the
system from unauthorized access or attempts to break
the codes.
The system allows 90 seconds for a valid code to be
entered. If three or more incorrect codes are entered
during this time, the following alert message is displayed
and logged:
(flashes off once every 2-3 seconds.)
Communications lost line 2A 2B
(flashes off twice every 2-3 seconds.)
If one incorrect code is entered and no subsequent
valid code is entered within the time-out period the
following message appears:
Note Your actual numeric code is never shown (for
security reasons).
Issue 01 Feb 2000
8-1
Typing Text
cursor back over the characters:
●
Via either the RKD or HHT keypad
●
Via software (such as 3GS+, Panelman or PC)
An overlay card is provided to help you locate the
character position for each key when entering text via
the keypad:
C
D
.
,
E
I
J
L
-
+
*
,
F
G
H
K
M
&
/
=
!
N
<
O
>
P
Q
B
:
R
[
S
]
T
W
U
V
Y
Z
SPACE
%
SHIFT
Move cursor
forward
BACKSPACE
Rotate
cursor
Move cursor
backward
F
G
R
[
A
!
N
<
L
K
#
SHIFT
SHIFT
SHIFT
ENTER
The keypad beeps as it deletes characters to the right.
With the cursor in the
to complete text entry.
character position, press #
Selecting options
A
X
?
<f r a n> k
>
You may need to enter text when editing zone
descriptions, node descriptions, user names and so on.
There are two ways you can do this:
When the cursor is over the character to be deleted, hold
down the Shift key.
ENTER
Press when
complete
To enter text via a keypad:
1 The cursor will be in character position 1:
The 3GS system options can be divided into installer
options and user options. The installer options, detailed
overleaf, are primarily system setup and maintenance
options, and the user options, also detailed overleaf, are
system operation options. The master user is given all the
operational options by default. The master user assigns
an appropriate number of options to the general users
depending on their security requirements [See page 8-4:
Menu Options].
There are two methods of selecting an option:
Direct Access. Allows you to select an option
directly.
●
2 Place the letter overlay card on the keypad.
3 Locate on the overlay the character you wish to enter.
Help Menu Access. Allows you to locate an option
by scrolling through the available options.
●
For example:
4 Select the appropriate character.
Most keys will have three characters when in typing
mode. The orientation of the cursor governs which
character is selected:
selects “2”.
Direct access
You can select an option directly by entering its particular
code. For example, to select the Node Configure option
enter:
1
0
1
0
followed by
SHIFT
4
selects “L”.
selects “K”.
Default Engineer Code
"Shift" key (x1) Selection key
5 Continue entering the remainder of the text entry.
To delete characters
This will select the option:
NODE CONFIGURE
For certain options you need to press the Shift key twice
before pressing the selection key.
With the cursor in position 1, use the * key to move the
8-2
[See page 8-4: Installer and Master menu options].
position on the display:
Help Menu
ID.S
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SELECT AN OPTION...
HALF
HELP
To select To select To select
Options Names
IDs
ZONES/ DOORS/VARS ?
code + shift Part
PART
NAMES
HELP
UNSET
UNSET
OPTIONS
YES
to scroll forward thro
the help menu
to scroll back through
the help menu
●
The UNSET key selects the left option.
●
The HALF key selects the middle option.
●
The HELP key selects the right option.
Answering a question
On the following display, the flashing “?” indicates that
the system is waiting for an answer:
PRINT LOG ?
NODE CONFIGURE ?
code + shift 4
YES
Additional menu options
The Help menu allows you to scroll through all the
options available to you using the following keys on the
keypad:
Press YES or NO as required.
Pressing # (or any key other than YES) is interpreted as a
NO by the system.
In some cases an option may be presented with YES or
NO displayed underneath, like this:
●
UNSET to scroll forward through menu options.
●
PART to scroll back through menu options.
●
YES to select an option.
Select YES or NO as appropriate.
●
NO to exit the menu.
The system will automatically move to the next option.
When complete, press # to accept all data entered.
Only options which have been assigned to you are
displayed. You have 90 seconds in which to make a
selection.
Scrolling through options
Entering numerical values
In a display where you have to enter a number, a flashing
digit will prompt entry, like this:
Use the following keys when viewing options that do not
require input:
●
UNSET to scroll forward.
●
PART to scroll back.
3-way display options
SET MINUTE:
You can enter a number using two methods:
●
Certain displays will present three flashing sub-options.
Sub-option selection is determined by the option’s
●
Issue 01 Feb 2000
1
Enter the number directly. For example, press 2,
press 0, then #. If you make a mistake (before
pressing #) press * to move backward, and YES to
move forward, then re-enter the correct digits
followed by #.
Scroll through numbers. Use the two keys denoted
as + (UNSET) and - (PART) on the overlay. The plus
key will increment the number, while the minus key
will decrement it.
8-3
Installer menu options
Option
Shift Key
Selection
Key
Zones/Doors/Vars
x1
Node Configure
General
Intruder
PART
✔
✔
x1
4
✔
✔
Radio PA Setup
x2
9
Service Mode
x1
YES
Radio PA Test
x2
0
Setup Cards
x2
6
✔
Card Information
x2
4
✔
Door Configure
x1
3
✔
Time Zone Setup
x2
5
✔
Door Group Setup
x2
3
✔
Manual Door Control
x2
7
✔
Edit Levels Database
x2
8
✔
Setup SIA
x2
NO
Soak Mode
x2
2
✔
✔
Disable Mode
x1
NO
✔
✔
Output Test
x1
5
✔
✔
YES
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
System Log
Access
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Print All Reports
x1
6
✔
Set Date/Time
x1
9
✔
Set Data Format
x1
8
✔
Force Call
x1
FULL
✔
Set Up DM1200
x2
FULL
✔
User Setup
x1
UNSET
✔
Area Setup
x1
2
Edit Output Database
x2
HELP
Radio PA Assign
x2
*
Time Advance
x2
YES
✔
Literal Edit
x1
HALF
✔
Command Mode
x1
1
✔
Soft Start
x1
7
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
UNSET
✔
Accept All Alerts
0
✔
✔
✔
✔
Inhibit Mode
8-4
x1
*
NO
✔
✔
Unset/Reset
Edit Time Commands
Radio
✔
✔
Master menu options
Option
Shift
Key
Selection Key
General
Intruder
Unset/Reset
UNSET
✔
Part Set
PART
✔
Half Set
HALF
✔
Full Set
FULL
✔
1
✔
Coded Reset
x2
Mode 5
5
✔
Mode 6
6
✔
Mode 7
7
✔
Mode 8
8
✔
Mode 9
9
✔
Set Date/Time
x1
9
✔
Change ID
x1
0
✔
✔
User Setup
x1
UNSET
✔
✔
Area Setup
x1
2
Radio PA Assign
x2
*
System Log
YES
✔
Access
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Radio PA Test
x2
0
Setup Cards
x2
6
✔
Card Information
x2
4
✔
Manual Door Control
x2
7
✔
Hour Adjust
x1
HELP
✔
0
✔
*
✔
Accept All Alerts
Edit Time Commands
Inhibit mode
Issue 01 Feb 2000
x1
no
Radio
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
8-5
menu
Function:
ZONES/DOORS/VARS
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT
PART
This menu allows you to assign zone types and attributes to the system zones
and doors and to set the system variables.
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT
PART
ZONES/DOORS/VARS
ZONES
UNSET
DOORS
HELP
Desc
DESCS
UNSET
OPTIONS
HALF
UNSET
HALF
VARS
HELP
HELP
TYPES ATTRIBUTES OUTPUTS
UNSET
HALF
HELP
Options
CURRENT LIMIT
PSU Overcurrent
0
Vars
Additional Information
Zones and doors must be configured with the required zone types and attributes for the intruder system to operate
correctly. Refer to the details of these types and attributes described later in this menu.
DESC: [See Page 8-7]
For ease of zone and door identification each zone and door on the system should be given a description.
OPTIONS: [See Page 8-8]
This menu is used to setup zone and door types and attributes.
VARS: [See Page 8-12]
System variables including exit/entry times can be programmed in this menu. Details of all variables are given in the
variables table on page 8-13/14.
8-6
menu
Function:
ZONES/DOORS/VARS Ü DESCRIPTIONS
This submenu allows you to assign an alphanumeric description of up to 24
characters for each zone and door input.
Desc
ZONES
UNSET
DOORS
HELP
UNSET
HELP
ENTER DOOR NO. 1
ALARM 1
ENTER ZONE NO. 1
ALARM 1
#
<
Node number
Door description
#
<
Zone description
(defaults to zone
type if no description
exists)
NODE 0
INPUT 1
Input number
Key in a new description
(see Menu Navigation:Typing Text)
#
#
ENTER ZONE NO. 2
ALARM 2
or
Key in zone/door
number directly
2
UNSET
PART
NO
4
ENTER DOOR NO. 2
ALARM 2
#
to scroll forward
through zones
to scroll back
through zones
to exit
<
NODE 3
INPUT 8
Additional Information
When you choose the DESCS option, the top line of the first display requests a zone/door number. The bottom line
shows the current zone description. However, if no description exists, the zone type is displayed (for example, after a
cold start). To insert text from the 3GS RKD, refer to Menu Navigation Typing Text. Alternatively the zone and door
descriptions may be entered using the Europlex PC product range (3GS+, Panelman, etc.). It is a good idea to precede
the zone/door description with the zone/door number (for example, 1-RECEPTION DOOR).
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Zones/Doors/Vars
8-7
menu
Function:
ZONES/DOORS/VARS Ü OPTIONS
This submenu allows you to set types and attributes for zone and door inputs
(types and attributes are described in the following pages).
Options
TYPES ATTRIBUTES EXTRA
UNSET
HALF.
HELP
Extra
HELP
UNSET
ZONES
UNSET
HALF
ZONES
UNSET
DOORS
HELP
DOORS
HELP
UNSET
UNSET
SET FROM
Key in zone/
door number
Key in zone/
door number
SET FROM
1
ZONE NUMBER _ _ _ _
SET TO
HELP
HELP
#
1
DOOR NUMBER _ _ _ _
SET TO
ZONE NUMBER _ _ _ _
#
ENTER ZONE NO.
ALARM
1
#
1
DOOR NUMBER _ _ _ _
#
ZONE NUMBER _ _ _ _
INHIBIT
ALARM
INHIBIT
ALARM
AREA 1?
... to
AREA32?
COMMON?
?
UNSET
YES
to scroll and
display another
zone type
to assign as displayed zone
type (in this case ALARM)
PART?
HALF?
LINE?
AREA SELECTED
ALARM
to assign
FIRE?
UNSET
RESET?
TECH?
PART
SPARE?
to scroll forward
through zones
to scroll back
through zones
LOG ?
NO
NO?
EXIT
NO?
ACCESS
NO?
ACCESS
NO?
PUSH
NO?
PUSH
NO?
FIRE-X
NO?
FIRE-X
NO?
X-SHUNT
NO?
X-SHUNT
NO?
X-TAMPR
NO?
X-TAMPR
NO?
PANIC
NO?
PANIC
NO?
DAY-PA
NO?
DAY-PA
NO?
KEYARM
NO?
KEYARM
NO?
24HOUR
NO?
24HOUR
NO?
SET
NO?
SET
NO?
UNSET LOCAL
NO?
UNSET LOCAL
NO?
DOUBLE KNOCK NO?
DOUBLE KNOCK NO?
FIRE
FIRE
NO?
#
to move to
the next zone
NO?
#
to move to
the next door
to exit
See Additional Information
for details of this menu
ENTER ZONE NO.
ALARM
NO
2
to quit
Additional Information
EXTRA: [See Page 8-15]
This menu is for future use and will be used to expand the zone and door functions.
8-8
to assign
YES
EXIT
See Additional Information
for details of these menus
Enter the zone
/door number
and scroll
through the
zone/door
attributes
Doors
FULL?
ALARM?
#
YES?
Zones
ALARM
1
DOOR NUMBER _ _ _ _
YES?
YES
#
ENTER DOOR NO.
ALARM
1
ENTER DOOR NO.
ALARM
NO
2
to quit
Zone Types
Zones will report input activity differently depending on
the zone type assigned. For example, a zone set as an
alarm type zone will report an input going open as a full
alarm in all modes other than Unset/Disarm.
Some zone types are specifically designed for use with
certain systems.
The behaviour of many zones is based on that of the
most common zone type Alarm, so it is advisable to use
this type as a reference. For all zone types, a discon
(disconnected) or tamper alarm activation is reported in
the same fashion as an Alarm type zone.
Area -1 to
Area -32
Available only when the number of areas is greater than 0. Area zones are
instant Alarm zones which are active when the relevant area is set/armed. When
activated, these trip the intruder alarm output for the relevant areas
Common
Available only when the number of areas is greater than 0. The Common zone is
active when the common area is set/armed, i.e. when all other areas are set/
armed. All attributes are assignable to common zones
Part/Half/Full
Available only when the number of areas equals 0 and the system operates as a
standard 3GS installation. The Part zone is active in part and full modes. The
Half zone is active in half and full modes. The Full zone is active only in full
mode. Half, Part and Full zones cannot be assigned attributes.
Line
This is a line monitoring zone. Usually used in conjunction with a telephone line
output from a digital dialler or direct communications device. When opened
during a full alarm this will shorten the bell delay to 1 second.
Alarm
Available only when the number of areas is equal to 0. This is the normal Alarm
zone and is active in all modes except unset/disarm. Any open, discon or tamper
activity will cause a full alarm when set/armed.
Fire
The Fire zone operates 24-hour fire monitoring independent of normal panel
operation. When opened the Fire zone trips the 3GS system output number 5,
displays warning messages, and automatically opens all doors.
Reset
The panel may be programmed to require an installer reset, after an alarm,
before the panel may be re-armed. This is normally performed by an installer
entering his code at the panel. An alternative to this is to open ’reset’ zone,
which perform the same function.
Tech
When opened, the Tech zone sets an output corresponding to its own number,
so that when Tech zone 100 opens, it will trip output 100. The output resets
when the zone closes. Installers should ensure that the output corresponding to
the Tech zone is not already assigned to another function.
Spare
This zone type has effectively no function - opening and closing of the zone
does not cause any activation. This type has been added to allow the installer
initialise a zone on the system but without having to assign it as a specific type.
Log
This zone will log a state change in any mode. Log zones can be used for monitoring.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Zones/Doors/Vars
8-9
Zone attributes
Zone attributes allow you to further customise the
behaviour of zones. 3GS allows for up to 16 different
attributes. The following attributes are applicable to areas
1 to 32, Common, and Alarm zone types. Some
attributes are applicable to both zones and doors, some
to zones only and some to doors only. With the
exception of the Inhibit attribute, only one other
attribute should be assigned per zone.
Inhibit
This attribute allows the zone in question to be inhibited. Must be used in conjunction with Inhibit mode. (Zones and Doors)
Exit
Applying the Exit attribute to an alarm or area zone will change it to an exit zone for
that area/system. Opening the zone while the area/system is set/arm will start an entry
timer.
Access
Usually for movement detectors on the exit/entry route. Behaves as an Exit zone during exit/entry and as a Alarm zone otherwise. (Zones and Doors)
Push
The Push attribute is used for push-button arming of the area outside the final exit,
avoiding the need to wait for the final timer to expire before the buzzer sounds to
confirm arming of the area. The Push function is enabled by setting the final set variable to YES (giving an infinite exit time until the Push button is pressed). Assign to an
area zone to allow setting/arming of the area, or to a Common or Alarm zone to allow
setting/arming of the whole system. (Zones)
Fire-x
To be used with fire exit doors which should not be opened during the day. Outputs
177 to 208 and Common 209 for relevant areas (Fire Exit) are dedicated to this
attribute. When the area is unset/disarmed and the Fire-x zone is opened the output
is triggered, the buzzer sounds and an alert message is displayed. When the area is
set/armed, the zone will behave as a normal area zone. (Zones and Doors)
Xshunt
The Xshunt attribute when applied to a zone will cause the next zone in line to be
shunted or inhibited when the area is unset/disarmed. For example, if applied to zone
23, when opened it will shunt or inhibit zone 24. Usually used in conjunction with a
Fire-x zone. (Zones)
Xtampr
The Xtampr attribute will cause the zone to behave as a bell tamper when the system
is unset/disarmed, firing the strobe outputs (51 to 59) and external bell outputs (41to
49) for relevant areas. (Zones)
Panic
The Panic attribute is used in conjunction with 24-hour panic buttons. Activation of a
zone with the Panic attribute assigned will trip and generate output 3 and an alert
message, but no audible system alarm. (Zones)
Day-PA
This attribute is similar to Panic but operates in unset/disarm mode only. When
assigned to an area zone which is then opened (for example, a self-locking panic button), Day-PA generates a silent alarm. (Zones and Doors)
Keyarm
If a zone has been assigned as Keyarm then when it opens it will toggle the area's status. If the area is unset/disarmed and you open the zone the area will attempt to set/
arm. If the area is set/armed (or setting) and you open the zone the area will unset/disarm.
Note The Common and Alarm zones will set/arm or unset/disarm the full system.
24-Hour
If a zone has been assigned the 24 Hour attribute then it is active at all times and will
cause a full alarm if opened in any mode.
Set/Arm
Assignable to zone for system arming via valid card entry and push button activity.
(Zones)
8 - 10
Unset Local
To be used with Doors/Zones which should not be opened during the day. When the
area is unset/disarmed and the Zone/Door (with unset local attribute) is opened the
buzzer sounds, output 101 turns on, and an alert message is displayed. When the
area is set/armed, the zone will behave as a normal area zone. (Zones and Doors)
Double
Knock
Normally assigned to troublesome detectors. If two armed Double Knock zones are
triggered (or the same one activates twice) during the Double Knock period then an
alarm is generated. Double Knock time is set in seconds. It requires 2 open actions
within that time. All open Double Knock zones are logged when the system is set/
armed. (Zones)
Fire
The Fire attribute effectively creates a fire zone. The Fire attribute will ensure 24-hour
fire monitoring, independent of normal panel operation. When the attribute is set
and the zone is opened, the system trips output no. 5 (‘Fire’) and warning messages
are displayed.
Note All doors are automatically unlocked when a fire alarm occurs. To prevent certain
doors from opening, use the Door Open Inhibit option.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Zones/Doors/Vars
8 - 11
menu
Function:
ZONES/DOORS/VARS Ü VARIABLES
The Variables submenu allows you to view or adjust the system variables (these
control timers etc).
Most variable timers are set in seconds between 0 - 9999 (Soak Days being the Exception). 0 will give an infinite time.
You can display each variable in sequence and adjust and save the setting by entering a value directly or by pressing the
Unset/Part keys. Press the NO key to exit at any stage (except when setting a YES/NO variable). You will then be given
the option to print the current variable settings.
Vars
CURRENT LIMIT
PSU Overcurrent
0
UNSET
E/E AREA 1
Area 1 Exit Time
or
30
UNSET
PART
NO
to scroll forward
through zones
to scroll back
through zones
to exit
See Variables table
8 - 12
Additional Information:Variables Table
Current Limit
Sets the power supply current limit in mA (0 to 9999) which when exceeded, will generate an alert warning. For example, the limit for a 3A PSU could be set to 2000mA,
3000mA for a 4A PSU, 6000mA for a 8A PSU. When set to 0, PSU overcurrent will not be
monitored.
E/E Area 1-32
Sets the entry/exit time for the relevant areas
E/E Common
Sets the entry/exit time for the Common area
Bell Delay
This is the delay period between an alarm digi-activation and the siren/bell outputs being
activated.
Bell Time
The time period for which the external siren/bell (output 2) will sound for before automatic shut-down.
Modem
Set to YES if you want the modem to dial out on alarm. Compatible with ED2000 or Eurodial 2000 PC software.
Alarm Display
This variable controls RKD display options in Full Set/Full Arm mode (the default is 0).
0=Display always blank 1=Alert messages only 2=Alert & warning messages 3=Date &
Time, Open Zones and Alert/Warning messages displayed 4=Open Zones (plus description) are displayed.
Output Log
This variable controls the logging of outputs. If set to 1, any output which changes state is
logged. When set to 0, output activity is not logged. (Note: you may also set this variable
to 2 thereby preventing outputs being logged when the system is being unset/disarmed).
Arms
Set to YES if using the Arms Network system.
Soak Test Days
The number of consecutive days for which a Soak Test is active.
Service Reset
This facility is incorporated so that after an alarm activation a service company installer
must attend the installation and reset this variable to 1 before the system may be set/
armed again. An alarm in set/arm mode will increment the variable to 2 and cause the
message ‘CALL SERVICE’ to be displayed. If set to 0 then a service visit is not required
after an alarm activation. Service Reset can be over-ridden by Coded Reset [see page 913: Coded Reset menu].
Suspicion
Audible
If set to YES, an RPA Suspicion event will also cause the keypad to beep. For use with a
Radio PA handset.
Delayed Raid
Sets the time before a Delayed raid will be activated, as well as the Raid Cancel time
period. For use with a Radio PA handset.
Final Set
If this variable is set to YES, an infinite exit time is started until a relevant zone with the
PUSH attribute is opened. The system will then arm 3 seconds later and the exit buzzer
will stop.
Local Alarm
0=Full alarm; 1=Local alarm (buzzer and internal bells); local alarm causing alert message
displays only; 2=External and internal bell outputs are reset by accepting alerts.
Detector Reset
When an area is unset/disarmed, this variable determines whether the detector reset outputs will trigger. Used to unlatch any detectors that have previously latched.
Verify Time
If, after an alarm activation, a second zone triggers (during this Verify Time) then the Verified Alarm output is tripped.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Zones/Doors/Vars
8 - 13
Func. Enable
Time
Cards and doors may now be assigned functions such as SET/ARM and UNSET/DISARM.
Typically two actions are required in order for the function to be performed. For example,
the software can be programmed so that a card can set/arm an area by first swiping at the
exit reader and then swiping at the entry reader. The user has a limited amount of time to
perform both of these actions, and this time is known as the FUNC. ENABLE TIME.
(Default - 10 secs)
Multi-Area
setting/arming
Keypads are now assignable to areas so that area status and area keypad buzzer are relevant to keypads in that area only. An area may only be set/armed and unset/disarmed
from a keypad, which is assigned to that area. However there may be some instances
where a user may wish to set/arm or unset/disarm an area from another area in the same
building.
Retrigger
Variable
If set to YES then the bells/sirens will resound if a second zone activation is detected at the
end of the bell time. If set to NO (default) then the external bells will only trigger once.
Set Door Protect
If the Set Door Protect variable is set to NO then any valid card that has no function
assigned will be granted access if the area is set/armed. This is to allow access to cards with
no functions assigned. If this variable is set to YES then only valid cards with the unset/disarm function will be granted access. Cardholders who normally unset/disarm the system
must be given the unset/disarm function to be allowed access to the building when the
system is set/armed otherwise access is denied. Defaults to NO.
IR Enable Time
When an installer enters this code the infra red comms. on the nodes is enabled for this
time period.
Common Area?
Set to NO if system has more than one area but there is no common area. Once selected,
as NO the system will not display common area messages. If set to YES, common area
messages are displayed.
8 - 14
menu
ZONES/DOORS/VARS Ü EXTRA
Zone Output Mapping
A block of up to 16 outputs can be mapped to a single zone - in a typical configuration this would enable a number of
camera outputs at different points within an area to trip at the same time, once the zone is activated.
Any sequential block of outputs can be mapped - e.g. outputs 1 to 16, 20 to 25, 50 to 53, etc.
Note This menu is for future use.
Extra
#
NO
Issue 01 Feb 2000
to exit
Zones/Doors/Vars
8 - 15
menu
Function:
NODE CONFIGURE
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT
4
This menu allows you to program and view the configuration of the Ringnet.
You can find nodes, examine their status, change their descriptions, change
their IDs and set up the RKD node backlight, contrast, etc.
In addition, you can view or change the mapping of zones to node inputs and
to view or change the mapping of output types to node outputs.
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT
4
Controller scans the
ringnet and analyses the
current node configuration
SCANNING RINGNET...
NODE CONFIGURE
NODES
Unset
UNSET
INPUTS
Half
HALF
OUTPUTS
Help
HELP
Nodes Inputs Outputs
Additional Information
The Node Configure menu has the following submenus:
Nodes - Information - Find: [See Page 8-17]
●
Use this option to scroll through the nodes and view node information and sound buzzer.
Nodes - Inputs: [See Page 8-21]
●
Allows you to clear input zone assignments from a node; manually re-assign zone assignments to a new input or
node; automatically re-assign zone assignments to all inputs.
Nodes - Outputs: [See Page 8-22]
●
Allows you to clear output assignments from a node and to manually reassign outputs to a node.
8 - 16
menu
Function:
NODE CONFIGURE Ü NODES Ü INFORMATION Ü FIND
The Find submenu allows you to scroll through the nodes and view ID
information. When a node is viewed on the display, its on-board buzzer sounds
to identify the nodes location.
Nodes
INFORMATION
UNSET
CONFIGURE
HELP
UNSET
HELP
FIND
UNSET
Config
MONITOR
HELP
HELP
Mon
Current Node. The asterisk indicates that
the node is currently on-line.
UNSET
0000000031 NODE = 1 *
NODE 1
UNSET
To view the system's nodes
in ascending numerical order
0000000033 NODE = 2
NODE 2
#
Node Description. Each node can be
given an alpha-numeric description
of up to 24 characters (see Typing
Text). By default, the system will
construct a description based on the
node's ID. For example, the node
assigned as ID 2 will have a default
description of NODE 2.
Node Tamper Activated. The hash symbol
indicates that the node’s tamper switch
(front or back) is open.
Node ID. On system power-up every
node is automatically assigned an ID
number (1-100). The main controller
is identified as node 0 (this cannot be
changed). All other node IDs can be
re-assigned from within the
"Configure" menu.
Node Serial Number. Every 3GS
printed circuit board has it's own serial
number which is embedded in
Eeprom and provides Europlex with a
unique product tracking number.
Additional Information
Nodes - Information - Monitor: [See Page 8-18]
●
Use this option to monitor and view a node’s current operational status, input/output connections and so on.
Nodes - Configure: [See Page 8-19]
●
Allows you to manually or automatically assign or view a node ID; give nodes a text description; adjust the RKD
settings.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Node Configure
8 - 17
menu
Function:
NODE CONFIGURE Ü NODES Ü INFORMATION Ü MONITOR
The Monitor option allows you to monitor a node’s current operational status.
The data is displayed in real time. For example, if you activate a tamper switch
of the monitored node, the "Lid Tamper" message displays to reflect this.
Mon
ENTER NODE NO. 1
Node 01
For RKD node
to scroll forward
through zones.
to scroll back
through zones
Unique node serial number
(embedded in node’s eprom)
IO NODE 8 IN 1 OUT
NODE 2
Node type and number of
inputs/outputs
PSU VOLTAGE = 12.9
NODE 2
DC Supply Voltage to Node
LID TAMPER CLOSED
NODE 2
Lid tamper status
BACK TAMPER CLOSED
NODE 1
BACK TAMPER CLOSED
NODE 2
Back tamper status
ONLINE INPUTS = 2
NODE 1
ON LINE INPUTS = 8
NODE 2
Inputs currently on-line
ONLINE OUTPUTS = 1
NODE 1
ONLINE OUTPUTS = 1
NODE 2
Outputs currently on-line
SOFTWARE VERSION x.x
NODE 2
Node software version
COMM1 ON COMM2 ON
NODE 1
COMM1 ON COMM2 ON
NODE 2
Status of comms. lines 1(in)
and 2 (out)*
DAYS RUNNING = x
NODE 1
NODE FUSE = OK
NODE 2
Status of node fuse
AUX. CURRENT = x mA
NODE 2
Total current drawn from node’s
DC outputs by external devices
DAYS RUNNING = x
NODE 2
Number of days since
node power-up
RKD NODE 2 IN 1 OUT
NODE 1
PART
Alternatively, key in zone
number directly and press #.
For IO node
PCB ID = 0000000032
NODE 2
PCB ID = 0000000031
NODE 1
UNSET
Different nodes have different monitor menus. For example,
nodes with mains/AC and batteries connected will monitor the
status of these also.
PSU VOLTAGE = 12.5
NODE 1
LID TAMPER CLOSED
NODE 1
SOFTWARE VERSION x.x
NODE 1
*This display indicates the status of the node’s Ringnet communication ports.
Comm 1 refers to port 1A/1B (in), Comm 2 refers to port 2A/2B (out). When a
port’s status is ON, data is being transmitted successfully.
If a port displays as OFF, the node has detected a communications failure and
has temporarily shut down the port to allow communications to continue on the
other port. A communications failure can be due to either communication lines
swapped or interference. After a short period the node will re-open the port to
check for communications and will continue to operate in this fashion until
communications have been restored.
Scroll through the on-line nodes by pressing the UNSET or PART keys. Note that the 3GS Controller board may be
monitored by selecting node 0. Press NO at any stage to exit the menu.
8 - 18
menu
NODE CONFIGURE Ü NODES Ü CONFIGURE
Function:
The Configure submenu allows you to manually or automatically assign or view
a node ID; give nodes a text description; adjust the RKD settings.
Config
IDS
DESC
node configuration
UNSET
HALF
SETUP
HELP
SCANNING RINGNET...
NODE CONFIGURATION
ENTER NODE NO. 1
NODE 1
ENTER NODE NO. 1
NODE 1
#
CLEAR
AUTO
MANUAL
NODE CONFIGURATIONS
#
EDITING LITERAL NUMBER 101011
BACKLIGHT LEVEL =80%
Type in Node Description (see "Typing Text")
up to a maximum of 24 characters. When
HALF
UNSET
HELP
generating a node description it is a good
To clear To auto assign To manually
idea to prefix the description with the node
node Ids
node Ids assign node Ids
ID, e.g. 1- RKD MAIN LOBBY.
B
BUSY CONFIGURING...
YES
BUSY CONFIGURING...
SCANNING RINGNET...
0000000031
NODE 1
->
Key in new ID number to
assign to this node, eg. 5
NODE 1
UNSET
NODE 5
PART
If your choice of node ID conflicts NODE ID ALREADY EXISTS
with an existing node, display shows: OVERWRITE ?
(yes/no)
UNSET
0000000032 ->
80% 100%
CONTRAST LEVEL = 100%
0%
20% 40%
60%
80% 100%
# to toggle backlight on/off. When set to on, the
UNSET
#
0000000031 ->
NODE 5
60%
BACKLIGHT OFF
NODE 1
Buzzer of selected
node (to have ID
changed) will sound.
To silence press HALF.
Current ID number of selected node
#
UNSET
# when complete.
SCANNING RINGNET...
20% 40%
Adjust the intensity of the RKD backlight
or contrast level by pressing the Enter key
CONTRAST LEVEL = 40%
ENTER NODE NO.1
NODE 1
BACKLIGHT LEVEL = 100%
0%
UNSET
Select a node
ARE YOU SURE ?
#
RKD Display/Key Illumination backlight remains
permanently on. This will increase the RKD's
quiescent current consumption. When set to off,
the backlight will only illuminate on key
depression.
to scroll forward
through nodes
to scroll back
through nodes
Select as required.
to scroll to next node
NODE 2
The new Node ID is displayed: NODE 2
Enter 0 to clear ID (unassigned).
The three options on the display are:
IDS Allows you to manually or automatically assign or view node IDs. This has the submenus:
●
Clear Clears input’s zone assignments from one or more nodes. The buzzer sounds continuously and an Alert
message is generated to indicate the inputs are disconnected and the node is lost. The system provides the option
to clear zone assignments from an individual node or from all nodes at once.
●
Auto Automatically re-assign zone assignments.
●
Manual Manually re-assign zone assignments to a new node or input.
Description Allows you to enter a node description.
Setup Allows you to adjust the node settings.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Node Configure
8 - 19
menu
Function:
NODE CONFIGURE Ü INPUTS
The Inputs submenu allows you to clear input zone assignments from a node,
manually re-assign zone assignments to a new input or node and to
automatically re-assign zone assignments to all inputs. All inputs must be
assigned zone assignments.
The three options on the display are:
sequential series of zones on a node.
Clear
For example, if on a node, inputs 1-6 are assigned as
zones 9-14 and inputs 7-8 are unassigned, by selecting
Auto the system will search for the highest available zone
numbers to assign to inputs 7 and 8. If the highest
available zones are 26 and 27, the zone sequence on this
node will read 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 26, 27.
Allows you to clear all node ID assignments and to put
inputs into a DISCON state. You can clear input zone
assignments from an individual node or from all nodes at
once.
Important Clearing an input's assignment means that all
zone information that has been assigned to that inputs will
be lost and therefore EOL input activity will not be reported.
Auto
Allows you to automatically assign zone numbers to
unassigned node inputs in ascending sequential order.
Inputs other than those that are in a DISCON state will
have zones assigned. If some inputs have already been
assigned zones, selecting this option can produce a non-
8 - 20
Manual
Allows you to manually re-assign zone assignments to a
new node or input. Selecting Manual provides three
fields of data, as follows:
1
Allows you to view an input's zone assignment.
2
Allows you to relocate a zone to another node.
3
Allows you to re-assign a zone to an input.
Diagram
Inputs
CLEAR
AUTO
MANUAL
INPUT CONFIGURATION
UNSET
HALF
HELP
1 The first field allows you
ENTER NODE NO.1
NODE 1
to view an input's zone number
# to select a node
SINGLE NODE
ALL NODES
INPUT CONFIGURATION
Zone assignment
HELP
ENTER NODE NO. 1
NODE 1
Scroll to a single
node number*, eg:
ENTER NODE NO. 3
NODE 3
# to remove all input
assignments on node 3
ARE YOU SURE ?
to clear input assignments on all nodes
UNSET
Input number
ZONE 1 -> NODE 0 INPUT 1
NIGHT 1
This display shows that zone 1
has been assigned to input 1 on
node 0 (controller)
#
to access the second field.
Node ID
ZONE 1 -> NODE 0 INPUT 1
3GS CONTROLLER
Node description
For example, to relocate zone 1
from node 0 (controller) to node 2
YES
2 The second field allows you
ZONE 1 -> NODE 0 INPUT 1
3GS CONTROLLER
BUSY CONFIGURING...
UNSET
to scroll, or key in 2 directly
to relocate a zone number
to another node
ZONE 1 -> NODE 2 INPUT 1
NODE 2
x ZONES ASSIGNED
# to accept
Any of the eight inputs on node 2
can now be assigned as zone 1
#
to access the
third field
ZONE 1 -> NODE 2
STATE: CLOSED
*key in node
number directly:
2
4
#
UNSET
UNSET
PART
to scroll forward
through nodes
to scroll back
through nodes
NO
to exit
INPUT 1
3 The third field allows you to
assign a zone to an input
press until input is displayed
For example, to assign input 4
as zone 1 press until display shows
ZONE 1 -> NODE 2
STATE: CLOSED
INPUT 4
#
Input 4 on node 2 is
now assigned as zone 1
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Node Configure
8 - 21
menu
Function:
NODES CONFIGURE Ü OUTPUTS
The Outputs submenu allows you to clear output assignments from a node and
to manually reassign outputs to a node.
Outputs
CLEAR
output configuration
UNSET
ASSIGN
*key in node
number directly:
HELP
2
4
or
UNSET
#
PART
SINGLE NODE
ALL NODES
output configuration
UNSET
NO
to scroll forward
through nodes
to scroll back
through nodes
to exit
HELP
ENTER NODE NO. 1
NODE 1
Scroll through and select a
single node number.*
ENTER NODE NO. 3
NODE 3
ENTER NODE NO.1
NODE 1
2 Confirm Node Selection
ENTER
ARE YOU SURE ?
OUTPUT 2 NODE1 ->NOT PROG
NODE 1
ENTER
ENTER
To remove all
output
assignments on
node 3
YES
This will clear
output
assignments on
all nodes.
3 Assign Output Type. This field allows
you to assign an output type to an output.
ENTER OUTPUT NO 1
The next display presents three
fields of data which enable you
to assign output types
ARE YOU SURE ?
YES
to confirm selected node.
to execute
1 Select output number. The first field allows
you to select an output number and view
the output type assigned to it.
OUTPUT 2 NODE1 -> TYPE 1
enter output type
UNSET
OUTPUT 2 NODE1 -> TYPE 3
enter output type
ENTER
ENTER
to assign output 2 on node 1
as output type 3 .
Output
OUTPUT 1 NODE1 ->NOT PROG
enter output no.
Output Type
This display shows that output 1 on node 1
has not been assigned an output type.
Therefore it has an output type of 0 and will
remain off line.
To assign an output type 3 (panic alarm)
tooutput 2 on node 1 proceed as follows
UNSET
to scroll to output 2
OUTPUT 2 NODE1 ->NOT PROG
enter output no.
ENTER
Additional Information
All outputs must be assigned to an output type (between 0 and 255 - 0 being unassigned). The 3GS Controller defaults
to having output types 1, 2, 3, and 4, for output numbers 1, 2, 3 and 4. The mapping of these output types to specific
output functions is described in the Edit Output Functions Menu. This menu allows you to set up physical outputs of
nodes for output control.The two submenus are:
CLEAR
This menu allows you to clear output assignments from one or more nodes.
Note Clearing a nodes output assignment means that the output is set to type 0 and therefore will not trigger. On the
Controller (node 0) output 1 is unaffected but 2, 3 and 4 are left unassigned.
ASSIGN
This menu allows you to assign output types to node outputs. An output type determines an output’s behaviour (that is,
under what conditions it will trigger).
Select a node by scrolling or entering a number directly. the system will identify the number of outputs on a node and
allow access accordingly. Therefore, when only a single output exists on a node, scrolling will not be possible.
8 - 22
menu
Function:
NODE CONFIGURE Ü RECONFIGURE RINGNET
The Reconfigure Ringnet submenu allows you to add or remove a node, or
replace a node (without losing any of the node’s configuration).
Zone descriptions, zone numbers and output types of
the previous zones and outputs are automatically
mapped back to the same addresses.
For example, a 3GS system with an 8 Input/1 Output
node, on which 3 of the inputs are used, as system zones
4, 5 and 6, and an output is coded as Type 7. The new
node will automatically be coded up with these zone
numbers and output type.
Note We recommend that you replace nodes one at a
time, using a node of the same type.
Ensure that the Ringnet is completely and securely reconnected.
If there are extra inputs on the new node, the additional
zones will be added to the end of the zone count.
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT
4
SCANNING RINGNET...
NODE CONFIGURE
NODES
Unset
INPUTS OUTPUTS
Half
Help
NO
RECONFIGURE RINGNET ?
YES
REPLACE
Unset
ADD
Half
REMOVE
Help
Remove node and replace
Press any key when ready
Disconnect and physically
remove the node from the
system and replace with
another node.
Press any key when finished
and the system will scan the
ringnet again.
Disconnect and physically
remove the node from the
system.
Press any key when finished
and the system will scan the
ringnet again.
Connect the new node
physically to the system.
Press any key when finished
and the system will scan the
ringnet again.
Serial No. 234567
Node ID 5
Exchange Node 4 ?
Serial No. 8171
SCANNING RINGNET ...
YES
YES
Remove Node 3 ?
Serial No. 3456
SCANNING RINGNET ...
YES
Exchange Node 4 ?
Are you sure ?
YES
Remove node. Fix cables.
Press any key when ready
Add node
Press any key when ready
ON-LINE NODES 4 ->5
Check that the bar code of the
node to be removed is correct
YES
Remove Node 3 ?
Are you sure ?
ON-LINE INPUTS 8 ->10
YES
New Node No. 51617283
Is this correct ?
YES
YES
Check that the bar code of the
new node is correct
ON-LINE DOORS 2 ->3
Updating node database ..
ON-LINE INPUTS 8 ->8
ON-LINE DOORS 2 ->2
YES
Node removed
Press any key when ready ...
YES
SCANNING RINGNET ...
SCANNING RINGNET ...
ON-LINE NODES 4 ->4
Check that the bar code of the
node to be removed is correct
ON-LINE NODES 4 ->3
YES
ON-LINE INPUTS 8 ->6
YES
ON-LINE DOORS 2 ->1
YES
PRINT NODE INFO?
NO
FINISHED
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Node Configure
8 - 23
RADIO PA SETUP
menu
Function:
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT SHIFT
9
This menu allows you to set up the pager to transmit to pager receivers and set
up the radio panic attack button units.
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT SHIFT
9
RADIO PA SETUP
BUTTONS
Unset
PAGER
Help
UNSET
HELP
RAID
Not Assigned
Press the Radio PA
button (or
combination of
buttons) that you
wish to assign for
suspicion alarm. Eg,
press LEFT button,
display shows
Continue to assign
buttons in this
fashion
to scroll forward
through zone.
to scroll back
through zones
PAGER ADDR
Unset
PART
TEST
Help
HELP
UNSET
PAGER ADDRESS = 0000000
SUSPICION
LEFT BUTTON
SENDING TEST MSG
TEST MESSAGE
#
Key in digits for an address.
If you make a mistake and
wish to overwrite a digit
RAID
Not Assigned
DELAYED RAID
Not Assigned
UNSET
,
*
to move back a character
YES
to move forward a character
A test message is now
transmitted to the
pocket pager of this
Address.
RAID CANCEL
Not Assigned
INTERROGATE
Not Assigned
PHOTO ENTRY
Not Assigned
*
NO
to exit from either menu
NO
to exit from option
PRINT PAGER/BUTTN DATA
To clear an
assignment
NO
to exit
YES
to print
Additional Information
Buttons
Select “Buttons” to assign a single button or a combination of buttons to an option. Up to 7 different button configurations may
be obtained by pressing the buttons singularly and as combinations. This allows all six options to be assigned to a RPA. Note that
these options must be granted to the RPA within the “Radio PA Assign - Options” sub-menu in order for the RPA to operate.
Note The assignment that is made to one RPA button(s) is the same for every RPA unit on the system. For example, if
the left button on RPA 1 is assigned as “Raid”, every RPA left button is assigned as “Raid”.
Pager
Each pager unit has a unique 7-digit address. Key in this address as shown and select the test function to send a
message to the relevant pager.
8 - 24
menu
Function:
SERVICE MODE
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT
YES
This option allows you to check the physical operation of the system, verifying
that all zone/door inputs are responding correctly. Data is available on the state
of each zone/door input (whether on-line or not).
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT
YES
SERVICE MODE
REPORT
Unset
TEST
Half
MONITOR
Help
UNSET
HALF
HELP
Report
Test
Monitor
Additional Information
This menu is most useful for testing zones and doors on this system. Reports can be generated for on-line zones and
doors. A complete walk test of all zones and doors can be carried out and a log of this test is recorded. Individual zones
or doors can be monitored for current real time states without generating alarms.
REPORT: [See Page 8-26]
This menu allows you to view on the display or print out the state of all on-line zones and doors on the system.
TEST: [See Page 8-27/28]
This menu allows you to test all on-line zones and doors on the system.
MONITOR: [See Page 8-29/30]
This menu allows you to monitor the state of all zones and doors on the system.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Service Mode
8 - 25
menu
Function:
SERVICE MODE Ü ON-LINE REPORT
The On-Line Report submenu allows you to generate an on-line report for
zones or door inputs (inputs which have EOLs fitted). This report displays all online zones or doors connected to the panel which have states other than
DISCON (disconnected).
Additional Information
Report
To print a report
Before printing the report,
ensure a serial printer is
attached to one of the serial
ports of the Controller. Use the
Set Data Formats menu to
configure the serial port for
printer settings.
FINISHED is printed at the end
of the report. To terminate the
printout at any stage press the
NO key (this displays an
ABORTED message).
If you do not require a hard
copy you can send the report to
the display by pressing the NO
key when the print alternative is
displayed.
ZONES
UNSET
Note Use the # key if you need
to skip quickly through the report.
HELP
ON-LINE REPORT
PRINT ON-L REPORT ?
Press to view
online report
Zone type
Set by default.
May be changed in
The report starts with the zone
which has the lowest number on Zones - Doors - Vars Menu
the system and increases
numerically until all the on-line
zones have been reported. The
Resistance Value
system displays zone type,
Current Zone State
number, state, analogue value
Zone number
(in brackets), node number and
Zone type
Zone description
the input the zone has been
or
assigned to. Each zone state
Zone type
displayed will be prefixed with a
character if a zone is either
manually inhibited, command
string inhibited or disabled. [See
table on page 8-29: Service
Mode - Monitor].
DOORS
NO
YES
Zone on-line report
AREA 1 1 CLOSED
LOBBY AREA 1
ZONE 2 CLOSED
ZONE 2
AREA 1 3 OPEN
ZONE 3 AREA 1
Door on-line report
[2100]
[2154]
AREA 1 1 CLOSED [2100]
FRONT DOOR AREA 1
DOOR 2 CLOSED
DOOR 2
Door zone type
May be changed in
Zones - Doors - Vars Menu
[2154]
[4147]
Door
Number
Door Type
AREA 1 1 CLOSED [2100]
LOBBY
AREA 1
AREA 1 3 OPEN
DOOR 3 AREA 1
Door State
[4147]
Door description
Resistance Value
AREA 2 CLOSED [2100]
WINDOW
UNSET
Press to increase scrolll
speed
ZONE 12 CLOSED [2100]
ZONE 12 OPEN
8 - 26
PRINTING...
Report will detail all zones
on the system and when
finished exits to the main
menu
menu
Function:
SERVICE MODE Ü TEST
This menu allows you to walktest the zones and doors on the system.
Additional Information
Testing a zone/door
The left hand side of the top line of the display shows the
zone/door to be tested, while the result of the last zone
tested is to the right. The node and input it is assigned to
are displayed on the bottom line.
To help identify the location of the zone/door, press the
Help key to display the zone description, if one exists. In
door walktest, the door description will be displayed on
the bottom line of the display, if one exists, otherwise the
door number and zone type assigned are displayed.
The system will start by requesting the first on-line zone
on the system to be tested and then work in ascending
numerical order until the last zone on the system is
tested.
The message TEST 1 will remain in the display until the
system detects a change from zone 1. While waiting for
this change, all other zone changes are displayed and
noted by the system. This is so that, when their turn in
the numerical sequence comes, it will be unnecessary to
Issue 01 Feb 2000
walktest those zones again (the system skips to the next
zone which has not changed state since the start of the
test).
When the panel is displaying TEST you can view the
zone description for the zone in question by pressing the
Help key.
If a zone cannot be tested for any reason you can skip it
by pressing the # key.
Printout
When Walktest is chosen a print-out is started which
displays information about the walktest. Firstly the time
and date of when the test started is printed along with
any zone which is skipped. When the walktest is
complete the number of zones correctly tested are
printed along with the number which were not tested.
The final line of the print-out gives the time and date at
which the test was finished.
Note If a zone is inhibited or disabled it will only be
reported in the display when it is the zone currently being
tested.
Service Mode
8 - 27
Diagram
Test
REPORT
UNSET
TEST
HALF
UNSET
HALF
MONITOR
HELP
HELP
ZONES
UNSET
DOORS
HELP
HELP
UNSET
WALKTEST
TEST 1
NODE 0 INPUT 1
#
WALKTEST
the system is prompting you
to test zone 1
to skip a zone without testing
TEST 2 :
1 OPEN
NODE 0 INPUT 2
NO
to abort test
Next zone to test
TEST 3 :
2 OPEN
NODE 1 INPUT 1
Result of last zone tested
TEST 1
DOOR 1
#
ALARM
the system is prompting you
to test door 1
to skip a door without testing
TEST 2
DOOR 2
ALARM
NO
to abort test
Now open DOOR 2
TEST 3
DOOR 3
:
2 OPEN
ALARM
Now open DOOR 3
TEST 4 :
2 OPEN
NODE 1 INPUT 2
FINISHED
8 - 28
TEST 4
DOOR 4
Display returns to this when
the last zone number is reached.
FINISHED
:
3 OPEN
ALARM
Display returns to this when
the last door number is reached.
menu
Function:
SERVICE MODE Ü MONITOR
The Monitor submenu allows you to look at any zone/door individually and will
display its state and resistance value. The buzzer is also sounded if the zone/
door is not closed with a different tone for each state.
On selecting this menu, enter the number of the zone/
door to be tested and press #. The number you enter
must be a valid number or an error message is displayed
and you must try again.
You can increment (UNSET key) or decrement (PART
key) the zone/door number without having to exit and
re-enter this mode. The characters displayed determine
the zone/door status.
Character(s) displayed Zone Status
NIGHT 4 CLOSED
NODE 0 INPUT 4
[2100]
On-line : [value]
NIGHT 4 CLOSED * 2100*
NODE 0 INPUT 4
Not on-line : *value*
* NIGHT 4 CLOSED [2100]
NODE 0 INPUT 4
Inhibited manually : leading *
/ NIGHT 4 CLOSED
NODE 0 INPUT 4
[2100]
Inhibited by command string : leading /
+ NIGHT 4 CLOSED [2100]
NODE 0 INPUT 4
Inhibited manually and
by command string : leading +
NIGHT 4 CLOSED /2100/
NODE 0 INPUT 4
Disabled : /value/
Issue 01 Feb 2000
At this stage the UNSET key will cause the display to
change, showing the response of the input above and the
PART key will show the input below. The resistance value
displayed will increase on systems with long cable runs or
cable with high capacitance.
The buzzer is used in this mode to indicate the state of
the input under test. The relationship between buzzer
sound and the state of the input is as follows:
Input State
Buzzer Pattern
Closed
Off
Open
Long Beep
Short
Fast Beep
Disconnected
Continuously On
Note The buzzer sounding can be distracting and
therefore it is possible to silence it by pressing the HALF SET
key. Default is buzzer sound ‘on’.
Service Mode
8 - 29
Diagram
Monitor
REPORT
UNSET
UNSET
TEST
HALF
MONITOR
HELP
HALF
HELP
ZONES
UNSET
DOORS
HELP
HELP
UNSET
ZONE MONITOR
DOOR MONITOR
ENTER ZONE NO. 1
RECEPTION PIR
ENTER DOOR NO. 1
FRONT DOOR
ZONE NUMBER _ _ _
#
DOOR NUMBER _ _ _
#
Zone/door status
is displayed
ALARM
1 CLOSED
NODE 0 INPUT 1
To scroll
forward
UNSET
ALARM 2 CLOSED
NODE 0 INPUT 2
HELP
…
RECEPTION PIR
8 - 30
[2100]
PART
ALARM
1 CLOSED
FRONT DOOR
To scroll
back
[2100]
to view
zone description
To scroll
forward
UNSET
ALARM 2 CLOSED
FRONT DOOR
[2100]
PART
Door Type
Door Number
Current Door State
Resistance Value (ohms)
Node number and
input number
To scroll
back
[2100]
HELP
…
FRONT DOOR
to view
door description
menu
Function:
RADIO PA TEST
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT SHIFT
0
This menu allows you to test radio panic attack buttons on the system, without
causing alarms. Details of the unit under test are displayed
Key in
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT SHIFT
0
TEST RADIO PA
NO BUTTONS PRESSED
Press a Radio PA button
and data on the button
and unit will appear on
the display, eg:
RPA1
JOHN SMITH
SUSPICION
75%
RPA Description
Radio Field Strength
Option Assigned
Press another button (or combination
of buttons if programmed) and a
different option is displayed:
RPA1
RAID
JOHN SMITH
75%
To exit from option press NO
You are then prompted ...
Are you sure ???
Press YES to exit the Test RADIO
PA menu.
RPA ..
xxxxxxxxxx
Right & Left
75%
RPA Battery below 7.5Vdc will
produce this message:
RPA 1
Alternative Data Displayed
If RPA number is missing
this indicates the unit is not
assigned to system.
10-digit serial number
displayed if no description
has been given.
If no option is assigned,
the key(s) pressed are displayed.
Low Battery
Additional Information
Location of node
[See page 5-29: HUA Node].
Radio Field Strength
Some units do not support this feature. The “Radio Field Strength” percentage will help the installer to determine the
optimum location for placement of a HUA Node. The installer can test a node’s ability to receive a signal by activating
an RPA button at different locations throughout the premises. A low reading of signal strength may require the node to
be relocated. If relocation does not provide the required coverage an additional node may be added to the system,
placed in a suitable location and re-tested.
Battery Low
If the RPA battery level is below 7.5Vdc the RPA will not operate correctly and the system will display an “RPA Battery
Low” message (in which case batteries must be replaced). If the battery low condition is ignored, the transmitter will
eventually fail to transmit (the transmit indicator will not illiminate when buttons are pressed).
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Radio PA Test
8 - 31
menu
Function:
SETUP CARDS
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT SHIFT
This menu allows you to setup cards on the access system and pass them for various
levels of access.
6
SET UP CARDS
CARDS
UNSET
PASS/VOID
HELP
UNSET
HELP
Pass/
Void
ASSIGN
UNSET
UNSET
FORMATS SITE CODE
HALF
HELP
HALF
Assign Formats
HELP
Site
Code
Additional Information
Europlex’s Access Control Management software, 3GS+, is available to setup and manage the Access Control system
database.
Note For more information on this menu see Programming Overview chapter 7 page 7-3: Access System Overview.
ASSIGN: [See Page 8-33]
This menu is used to assign cards onto the 3GS system. All cards must be assigned before they can be programmed for
use on the system. Cards can be assigned by presenting them at a reader and learning the card, by selecting from a
range 1-10,000 or by programming via 3GS+.
FORMATS: [See Page 8-34]
This menu allows for the use of non-standard card formats.
SITE CODE: [See Page 8-35]
This menu is used to program the system site code.
PASS/VOID: [See Page 8-36]
This menu allows you to pass or void cards on the system. Cards can be passed for groups of doors for time zones.
Cards can be given PIN codes, an expiry date or a function level in this menu.
8 - 32
6
menu
Function:
SETUP CARDSÜ CARDSÜ ASSIGN
This menu is used to insert cards onto the 3GS system.
Assign
UNSET
HELP
Additional Information
This menu allows you to assign IDs to cards in 2 ways:
●
Learn The card to be passed is of unknown origin and the pre-encoded number is not known. In this case the
card is presented at a card reader and then given a card ID. When you re-assign the ID to your present card, the
existing ID, description and door group/time zone information is over-written, and must be re-set.
You will be prompted if the ID has already been assigned, in which case you can over-write the existing card, or
choose the next available ID.
●
Select Batches of cards with pre-coded numbers of between 1 and 9999 can be passed directly into the system
and given corresponding card IDs. The first card of the batch becomes Card ID 1, the second becomes Card ID 2,
etc.
In effect, this gives you 1-to-1 mapping, automatically assigning IDs to cards.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Setup Cards
8 - 33
menu
Function:
SETUP CARDSÜ CARDSÜ FORMATS
This menu is designed to allow you to enter details of Wiegand or ISO cards that
are not of the standard format.
Formats
Additional Information
Access node version 1.08 and later supports the following structured card formats: Wiegand 26/30/37, ISO 4-4, and
Macrosoft but is designed to recognise other formats using the formats menu. It is possible to use this menu to set-up
the system to recognise other Wiegand or ISO formats by programming the required parameters.
Wiegand
Site Code Bits Enter the number of bits for the card site code.
Card Number Bits Enter the number of bits for the card number.
Even/Odd Parity Length Enter values here for the parity length in bits.
ISO
ISO cards will require values for Site Code and Card digits.
8 - 34
menu
SETUP CARDSÜ CARDSÜ SITE CODE
Function:
This menu allows you to setup the Site codes for cards, to specify the pin code
length and to enter the system pin code for PINpad only operation.
Site
Code
Additional Information
Site Code
Can be of any length up to 10 digits
PIN Length
Defaults to 4 digits, can be up to 8 digits.
PIN Code
Enter the system PIN code for PINpad only operation
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Setup Cards
8 - 35
menu
Function:
SETUP CARDSÜ PASS/VOID
This menu allows you to pass cards on the Access Control system once a card ID
has been assigned.
Pass/
Void
Enter Access Level
Enter Visitor Level
Change Access Level?
Not assigned
0
0
Change Visitor Level?
Not assigned
Enter Function Level 0
Change Function Level?
Not assigned
PIN Code Required YES
Change Requirement?
PIN Code not required
PIN Code Required NO
#
Change PIN Code
YES
#
Enter PIN Code
Card Inside Perim?
#
Change Card Location?
Card Inside Perim.
Returns to main menu
Additional Information
Card Range
Enter the range of cards to be passed, from 1 to 9999. To pass a single card, enter the card number and press the # key
twice. Once the card(s) has been passed, the display will prompt for the access level for this/these cards.
Change Access Level?
An access level is a combination of one or more group times. Group times consist of Time Zones applied to door
groups so that once applied to a card, it will limit the card user to having access to certain doors at certain times only.
Up to 250 access levels are programmed by the installer, who will indicate which levels should be assigned to which
cards. When you have assigned an access level, you are prompted for the visitor level.
Change Visitor Level?
The visitor level is used to program temporary cards, which will only be valid for a certain period of time (between a
given start date and time and end date and time). The system allows for up to 250 different Visitor levels, which are
programmed by the installer. Once assigned, you are then prompted for a function level.
8 - 36
Change Function Level?
Function levels give the user the ability to set/arm and
unset/disarm an area by presenting a card to a reader
outside the area entrance door. A function level will give
a card 3 extra capabilities: to unset/disarm an area from
the outside, to unset/disarm an area from inside, and to
set/arm an area once you have left (by swiping your card
at a reader near the exit door). Up to 250 function levels
are programmed by the installer. When you have
assigned a function level, you are prompted to change
the PIN code requirement for the card.
Change Requirement?
This option allows you to decide if a card should also
require a PIN code before it will be granted access
through a door. It also allows you to change the existing
PIN code for the card or create a new one.
system. Once the location has been assigned, press the
key to return to the main menu.
Voiding Cards
The Void Cards option removes a set of cards from the
system.
Voiding a card removes all the card’s settings, from card
ID to access/function/visitor levels.
Exiting the Setup Cards menu
Press NO to exit.
The display will show:
Note The user should be aware that the PIN code created
using this option will apply to all the cards being passed at
this stage
If you have a printer connected to the Controller serial
port, you can now print out the card settings you have
just configured.
Once a PIN code requirement has been assigned, you
will be prompted to identify the card location.
Press YES to print and NO to exit.
Change Card Location?
Before the card is passed, it must be located in the
system. This menu will identify the card as being inside
or outside the alarm area when passed.
When all the system cards can be located at any time, they
can be tracked and controlled effectively. Setting the card
location enables the card for Roll Call and Anti-Passback
functions (both configured using 3GS+), which allow the
installer to identify which cards are in use in the system at
any given time, and to control the use of cards within the
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Setup Cards
8 - 37
menu
Function:
CARD INFORMATION
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT SHIFT
4
This menu allows you to test cards on the system.
CARD INFORMATION
TEST
Unset
No card present
Present any card to the reader.
If the card is not valid, the
display will not change.
This digit indicates card
has been assigned
(if unassigned,
".." will appear).
Card ID
Site Code
CARD 3 -> 1013
SITE : 1234
Door 9
NO
Card Number
Door card has been
presented at
#
Press NO to exit the
menu, or # to view
another card
Additional Information
Testing Cards
The Test menu checks that the card presented to the reader is valid for the system. A card will be valid if it is the right
card type for the reader (proximity, swipe), if it has the correct site code encoded, and if it has been passed on the
system. [See page 8-32: Setup Cards].
The default is No card present. If the card is not a valid format, the display will not change and you can press NO to
exit the test. When you present a valid card to a reader, the display will show the card ID, number, site code and door
at which the card is presented.
8 - 38
DOOR CONFIGURE
menu
Function:
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT
3
The Door Configure menu allows you to set an ID, description and open/locked
properties for the doors on your system.
3
Setup
There are 3 options for
re-assigning Door IDs
CLEAR
This option clears all door IDS
and leaves them unassigned.
Display shows:
press
to move to next door
NO
to exit
AUTO
This option reassigns all door Ids in
ascending numerical order, from the first
Access Control node found to the last.
Additional Information
Each door is automatically given a unique ID, which will identify the door within the system. Time zones are
configured in a separate system menu. [See page 8-44: Time Zone Setup]. So when configuring a door, you can only
assign pre-set time zones. Similarly, door groups (sets of pre-configured doors) are set up within the door group system
menu.
Note Doors can be assigned as 'zone' types the same way as normal zones. As such when the door changes state it will
act in the same way as a zone (with the same 'type' assigned), e.g. if the Exit attribute is set to YES for a door, it will start
the entry time when opened if the system or area is set/armed.
IDs
The system automatically assigns an ID to every new door with an EOL resistor connected to the door input, attaching it
to the next available reader on the node. The door will then be identified by its number, the ID of the reader/lock to
which it is attached, and the ID of the node on which the reader is to be found. For example, Door 1, Node 2, Reader 2.
Clear will clear all existing Door IDs from the system, leaving every ID unassigned.
Note If you Clear existing door IDs, you must follow this by selecting Auto - or the system doors will not function.
Auto scans the system and re-assigns every valid door in numerical order. If a Door ID is cleared from the system, the
next door will be re-assigned to the ID left unassigned.
Manual option not implemented
Door Description
Enter door description required. [See page 8-2: Typing Text].
SETUP: [See Page 8-40]
This menu allows you to setup all door options, timers and time zones.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Door Configure
8 - 39
menu
Function:
DOOR CONFIGUREÜ SETUP
This menu allows you to setup the door options.
Setup
OPTIONS TIMERS
Unset
Half
Unset
ZONES
Help
HALF
HELP
Timers Zones
OPEN INHIBIT?
UNSET
PART
YES
to scroll forward
to scroll back
LOCK INHIBIT?
ASSIGN PINPAD?
ENABLE ANTI-PASSBACK?
YES
to assign
NO
to clear
#
to accept
DOOR SET OPEN INHIBIT?
DOOR UNSET LOCK INHIBIT?
PIN CODE WHEN DOOR SET?
ANY ISO FORMAT CARDS?
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Door 1 Open
Door 2 Lock
Door 3 PINPad
Door 4 ANTI-PB
Door 5 Open
Door 6 LOCK
Door 7 PINPAD
Door 8 ISO
Additional Information
TIMERS: [See Page 8-42]
This menu allows you to setup door related times, such as Door Open Time and Lock Time.
ZONES: [See Page 8-43]
This menu allows you to assign time zones to doors.
All 64 doors are represented by dots. YES selects the option *, which appears on the display, on a door. Selecting NO,
the default, will then remove the option from the door. UNSET scrolls to the next door, PART scrolls back to the
previous door. The * button will toggle between selecting the option for ALL doors and removing the option from ALL
doors.
Open Inhibit?
When this option is selected it prevents the doors being opened by time zone or by manual door control (RKD or PC
menu).
Lock Inhibit?
When this option is selected it prevents doors being locked by time zone or by manual door control (RKD or PC
menu).
8 - 40
Assign Pinpad?
The Pinpad menu allows you to assign PINpads to one,
some or all of the 64 doors available in the system. This
option is coordinated with the PIN code option selected
when setting up cards. PINpad identifies those doors that
may require a PIN code for access and will therefore
need a PINpad installed near the card reader. The
display shows the doors (32 at a time) represented as
dots, followed by the Door ID and PINpad. PINPads will
normally be positioned on the entry side of a door.
YES assigns a PINpad to the reader on Door 1 (default is
NO), and the selection is shown by a *. UNSET scrolls
forward to Door 2, PART scrolls back. Any PINpad
assignment to a door can be removed by scrolling to the
relevant Door and selecting NO. The * button toggles
between PINpads assigned to all doors, and no PINpads
assigned to any doors.
Door 2, PART scrolls back. The * button toggles between
assigning the option to all 64 doors or assigning it to
none.
Door Set Open Inhibit?
When the area for this door is set then it is prevented
from going into free access.
A typical application for this would be a door that is
normally on free access from 9am to 5pm. If the system
is still set/armed at 9am then the door will not go into
free access.
Door Unset Lock Inhibit?
When the area for this door is unset/disarmed then it is
prevented from being locked.
PIN Code when Door Set?
Anti-Passback?
If the door has this option then a PIN code is required when
a card is presented and the area for this door is set.
Anti-Passback is a feature that will help to prevent a number
of different people using the same card.
Any ISO Format Cards?
When a card is used to gain entry to a door that has been set
to Anti-Passback, the same card must be used to exit. So every
entry through the door using this card must be followed by
an exit using the same card. If a ring of doors around an area
have all been set to Anti-Passback, the user can enter through
one door, and exit through any of the other doors in the ring.
In effect, this creates an anti-passback perimeter. Whoever
enters the perimeter will need the same card to exit. This helps
to restrict the use of a card to one user, and creates an effective
card tracking system [see page 8-31: Setup Cards].
This is mainly used for bank lobbies and is only available
on Access Control Node software rev. 1.06 or later.
These cards do not need to be assigned or passed on the
system, so the number of bankcards allowed access is
unlimited. Access granted to bankcards is logged in the
panel access log.
The ANTI-PB menu is used in the same way as PINpad
and Inhibit. 32 doors at a time are represented by dots.
YES sets Anti-Passback on a door (the default is NO) and
the setting is shown by an *. UNSET scrolls forward to
Issue 01 Feb 2000
If the door has this option then any card conforming to
the ISO format will be allowed through the door.
Note All door options can be set up at the keypad, but it
is recommended that all access control features/settings are
implemented using 3GS+ PC software..
Door Configure
8 - 41
menu
DOOR CONFIGUREÜ TIMERS
Function:
This menu allows you to change the timers for individual doors. This allows for
doors to be configured with different times.
Timers
ENTER DOOR NO 1
DOOR 1
Key in directly or scroll to
the door you wish to adjust
the settings for.
ENTER DOOR NO. 3
DOOR 3
press
#
UNSET
to scroll forward
DOOR OPEN TIME = 10
(secs)
PART
to scroll back
LOCK TIME = 5
(secs)
GRANTED TIME = 5
(secs)
DENIED TIME = 3
(secs)
Additional Information
Display returns to sub-menu
display shown above.
Door Open Time
This is the number of seconds the door is allowed to remain open after you have been granted access. This feature
prevents a door from being accidentally left open or intentionally propped open.
The default is 10 seconds and the range is 0 to 255 seconds. To accept the default, simply press #. To enter a new
time, key in the new time. Then type # to accept.
Lock Time
The number of seconds a door lock is released for. This is the length of time the user will have to physically open the
door once he/she has been granted access.
The default is 5 seconds (range 0 - 255). A zero-second value is possible, (called ‘turnstile operation’) which will unlock
the door for a fraction of a second. Press # to accept the default. To enter a new time, over-type the flashing number
with the new setting and press # to accept.
Granted Time
The number of seconds the Green LED (access granted) will light for. The default is 5 seconds.
Denied Time
The number of seconds the Red LED (access denied) will light for.
The default is 3 seconds. Once you have accepted your settings for this door, the menu will prompt you for another
Door Number. Enter the number of your choice, or use the UNSET or PART keys to scroll forwards or backwards to a
particular Door. To exit the TIMERS menu at any stage, press NO.
8 - 42
menu
Function:
DOOR CONFIGUREÜ ZONES
This menu allows you to assign any of the first sixteen preset time zones to
individual doors.
Zones
ENTER DOOR NO 1
DOOR 1
YES
to assign
NO
to clear
#
to accept
#
Time Zone 1
#
PRINT DOOR DATA
?
#
ALL DOORS
?
NO
ENTER DOOR NO 1
DOOR 1
#
PRINTING ...
Additional Information
When you have selected the Door Number, the display will show the 16 available time zones as dots. To assign a time
zone to a door, use the UNSET and PART keys to move to the zone of your choice. Selecting YES assigns that zone to
your Door. NO will clear a time zone previously set. # accepts your settings. The * button toggles between assigning all
time zones to this door or assigning no time zones.
Before leaving the system menu, you will be prompted to print the door data you have just configured. This printout
will detail the settings for all or individual doors in the system.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Door Configure
8 - 43
menu
TIME ZONE SETUP
Function:
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT SHIFT
5
This menu allows you to setup and clear time zones and configure holidays for
use on the Access Control system.
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT SHIFT
5
TIME ZONE SETUP
CALENDAR
Unset
ZONES
Help
CLEAR
Unset
SETUP
Help
ENTER MONTH 1
Assign Holiday status
to days using the
UNSET and PART keys
to scroll, and the YES
key to assign.
Setup
ALL TIME ZONES ?
#
YES
Day 1 Jan
NO
ENTER TIME ZONE 1
#
#
ENTER MONTH 2
CLEARING ...
When holidays are set, return
to sub-menu
Additional Information
Calendar
This option allows you to select the days required as holidays for the Access Control system and is linked to the time
zone setup menu overleaf. Enter the number of the month (Jan=1, Feb=2, etc.). Days are represented on the display
as dots, with 31 days allowed for all months. A day is assigned Holiday status by pressing YES, (default is NO). UNSET/
PART scrolls forward/back. The * button toggles between assigning Holiday status to all days or assigning it to none. #
accepts the settings made for the month and returns to the enter month number prompt. NO then quits the menu.
Clear
This option allows you to clear all or individual time zones form the system.The first option is to clear ALL TIME
ZONES? Pressing YES clears all time zones.To clear individual time zones, press NO.
SETUP: [See Page 8-45]
This menu allows you to setup the time zones on the 3GS access system by specifying the on/off times, the days of
the week and the conditions to be applied during the time zone.
8 - 44
menu
Function:
TIME ZONESÜ SETUP
This option allows you to setup the time zones on the Access Control system.
Setup
ENTER TIME ZONE 1
00:00 00:00
#
TIME SLOT 1 ?
YES
NO
On Time --> 00:00
Off Time --> 00:00
The cursor flashes on the first
digit. Use ENTER to scroll to
On min.s, and Off min.s
and hours
#
TIME SLOT 2 ?
YES
NO
Sunday ?
(Yes/No)
Toggle YES/NO to assign the zone
to this day (and then each day in
turn Mon - Sun, Holiday)and then
press ENTER.
PIN code required:
inside zone (Yes/No)
NO
#
Allow PIN code only
inside time zone
NO
#
Keep door open:
(Yes/No)
NO
#
Keep door locked:
(Yes/No)
NO
#
ENTER TIME ZONE 2
00:00 00:00
Additional Information
Time Zone Setup
Access to a secure area is controlled by means of time zones. A time zone is that period of time when the door to the
area is unlocked, and access is granted. Each time zone is made up of 4 separate ‘on-off’ slots, which means that the
zone can be customised to grant access for busy periods only, and deny access for the rest of the time.
12
12
9
3
9
6
6
07:30 to0 9:00 am
12:00 to 14:30pm
12
12
9
3
6
16:00 to 17:00pm
Issue 01 Feb 2000
3
3
9
6
17:30 to 18:00pm
Time Zone Setup
8 - 45
Time zones and time slots
PIN Code required
The time zone is broken down into four ‘on/off’
programmable time slots. For example, access to an area
on a typical Monday might be busiest from 7:30 - 9am,
12 to 2:30pm, 4 to 5pm and 5:30 to 6pm. Access to the
area is granted during these slots, and denied for the rest
of the 24-hour period. Alternatively, you may have only 2
busy periods during the 24-hour day and will need to
program slots 1 and 2 only, leaving slots 3 and 4 blank.
If a higher level of security is required at a door at certain
times, the PIN code access option allows you to attach a
PIN code to a time zone. If this is set to YES, then any
cards with PIN codes attached [See page 8-32: Setup
Cards] will be required to enter a PIN code when this
time zone is active.
Time zones and days
Time zones can be assigned to any day of the week, or to
a holiday. The above 4-slot configuration might be
suitable for Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, and Thursday
of the week, whereas Friday, Saturday/Sunday and
holidays might need a different configuration. In this way,
a time zone is customised to allow for the particular
requirements of a day and then assigned.
Time zones and cards
If no time zone is assigned to a card, the card will have
24-hour access to the door. If a time zone is attached,
then the card must be presented to the door when that
time zone is active. Further control is provided by
assigning a PIN code to the time zone, which must be
co-coordinated with the setup of the card.
If a PIN code requirement had been assigned to a zone,
cards with PIN code assignments will be prompted for
the PIN code when this zone is active. Cards without PIN
code assignments will be allowed access immediately provided they have been passed for that time zone. The
digits of the PIN code itself are configured during card
setup.
Time zones and doors
The first 16 time zones can be assigned to doors during
door configuration. The properties of the time zone will
control the door when that time zone is active. Any door
assigned the active time zone will remain open/locked
for that time period.
Note: The door must also be configured for PINpad.
Allow PIN code only
This option is only available on Access Control Node
software rev. 1.06 or later. This allows the cardholder to
gain access using just the card's PIN code, without the
need to use the card. If two cardholders' PIN codes
match, however, the system will use the first cardholders
information to log the data. Ideally each cardholder
should have a unique PIN code. This feature is only
enabled when the cardholder has a time zone with the
PIN ONLY attribute set. When the time zone is active the
cardholder can simply enter his code to gain access.
When the time zone has elapsed, card and PIN are
required.
The Duress code is now activated by keying in the code
followed by the hash key (#) on the PINpad.
Door Open
When attached to a time zone, the Door Open option
will keep a door unlocked while the time zone is active.
By assigning this zone to a number of doors, you ensure
that these doors will remain unlocked while the zone is
active. Choose YES to enable this option. # accepts your
settings. Note that the time zone must also be assigned to
the door in page 8-43 Door Configure - Zones.
The menu returns you to the ENTER TIME ZONE
prompt. Choose NO to quit.
Door Locked
Enter the number of the time zone you wish to configure.
By default, the display shows the time zone number and
the time settings of the first two time slots.
When attached to a time zone, the Door Locked option
will keep a door locked while the time zone is active. By
assigning this zone to a number of doors, you ensure that
these doors will remain locked while the zone is active.
Choose YES to enable this option. # accepts your
settings. Note that the time zone must also be assigned to
the door in page 8-43 Door Configure - Zones.
Enter times for Time Slot 1. The # key moves the cursor
from On-time hours and minutes to Off-time hours and
minutes. Press # again to accept your settings.
Printing your time zone data
Setting up new time zones
Assigning zones to days
The menu scrolls through the days Sunday to Holiday.
Press YES or NO to toggle the zone to each day in turn
and # to accept. Note that it is possible to assign more
than one zone to a particular day.
Note If the time zone is setup for a holiday and if the
current day is a holiday then the time zone is active.
8 - 46
The menu returns you to the ENTER TIME ZONE
prompt. Choose NO to quit.
Before quitting the Time Zone Setup menu, you will be
asked if you want to PRINT TIME ZONE DATA? You
have the option to print out the settings for all time zones
or an individual zone.
DOOR GROUP SETUP
menu
Function:
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
.
SHIFT SHIFT
3
This menu allows you to group doors together for use on the Access Control
system.
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT SHIFT
3
DOOR GROUP SETUP
CLEAR
Unset
NO
SETUP
Help
CLEAR DOOR GROUPS?
ENTER DOOR GROUP 1
#
YES
ENTER DOOR GROUP 1
NO
ALL DOOR GROUPS?
ENTER DOOR GROUP 1
#
YES
CLEARING ...
Door 1 Group 2
UNSET to scroll forward, PART
back.
YES to assign a door to a
group, NO to remove the
current assignment.
Additional Information
Clear
* to toggle between all doors
assigned or none
ENTER to proceed to the next
door group
This option allows you to clear the doors from all or individual door groups
Setup
This option allows you to link doors together in a group for use with cards through access levels. If you have already
configured, say, door group 7 and want to re-configure it, simply type ‘7’ to go into the settings for that group.
Otherwise, you can set up each group in turn by completing the menu options for each group and continuing on to
the next.
Having given the number of the group you wish to set up, the display represents each of the 64 doors in the system
(32 displayed at a time) as a dot, followed by the number of the door and group. As with Door Configuration
options, a door is added to the group by pressing YES, (default is NO), UNSET moves forward to the next door, and
PART moves back. The * button toggles between assigning all doors to the group or assigning none. # accepts the
settings made for the group and returns to the ENTER DOOR GROUP number prompt. NO then quits the menu.
Before exiting, the system asks you if you want to PRINT ALL DOOR DATA? You then have the option of printing the
details (i.e. group number and ID of doors contained in the group) of all or individual groups. YES prints the data, NO
quits the menu
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Door Group Setup
8 - 47
menu
Function:
MANUAL DOOR CONTROL
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT SHIFT
7
This menu allows you to permanently open or lock a door or range of doors and to
momentary open a door.
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _ SHIFT SHIFT
7
MANUAL DOOR CONTROL
OPEN
Unset
UNSET
RESTORE
Part
HALF
PERMANENT
Unset
LOCK
Help
HELP
MOMENTARY
Help
HELP
ENTER DOOR NO. 1
Door 1
#
FROM DOOR NO. 1
Door 1
#
Select the range of doors to
be permanently opened /
restored / locked
TO DOOR NO. 64
Door 64
#
Return to sub-menu
Additional Information
This option provides a manual over-ride on all door, time zone and card settings. At any stage, you can access this menu to
open/lock a door or series of doors. Once you have selected your doors, the system will check for Lock/Open Inhibits
operating on these doors [see page 8-39: Door Configure]. If none have been set, the doors can be opened/locked.
The Open menu allows you to open a range of doors permanently - i.e. the door will remain open until you manually
restore the original door settings, or momentarily - you can open one door for the number of seconds for which the door
lock would normally remain open once access has been granted [see page 8-39: Door Configure].
When you select Permanent, you are prompted to enter the range of door numbers you wish to open. Enter the From and
To ranges. When the Permanent condition is set on a door, the green LED (access granted) on the node will flash. This
allows free access through the doors selected until restored or locked.
The Momentary sub-menu will ask you for the number of the door you wish to open. Again, enter the number. The green
LED will light steadily while access is granted.
Restore restores all door settings to their defaults. Enter the range of doors to be restored and # to accept and quit. Once
defaults have been restored, the system is in normal operation and no LEDs are lit.
The Lock menu works similarly to Open. When the Lock is manually set on a door, the card reader attached to the door
will not read or accept any cards. When the door is locked in this way, the red LED flashes to indicate access denied.
8 - 48
menu
Function:
EDIT LEVELS DATABASE
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT SHIFT
8
This menu allows you to setup the access, visitor and function levels for the
Access Control system
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT
SHIFT
8
EDIT LEVELS DATABASE
ACCESS VISITOR FUNCTION
Unset
Half
Help
UNSET
GROUP TIMES
ACCESS
HELP
UNSET
Enter Group Time
3
Enter the number of the Group
Time you wish to set up e.g. 3
Enter Access Level
2
Enter the number of the Access
Level you wish to set up e.g. 2
HALF
HELP
Enter Visitor Level
#
Enter Door Group number 5
Group/Time 3
GROUP TIME 3
Access Level 2
Enter the number of the Group
Time Door Group, e.g. 5
#
Enter Time Zone No.
Group/Time 3
Assign any of the 250 Group
Times to this Access Level, e.g. 3
#
1
Enter the number of the Group
Time Time Zone e.g. 1
#
GROUP TIME 4
Access Level 2
Assign another Group Time to
this Access Level if necessary,
e.g. 4
#
Enter the number of the Visitor
Level you wish to set up e.g. 3
8
Enter the number of the day on
which access is to begin e.g. 8th
A card may be passed for an access level,
which is made up of two Group Times. The
first Group Time is for Door Group 1 for 24
Hour operation and the second Group time is
for Door Group 2 for Time zone 1 (9:00 to
17:00). This will allow the card access to all the
doors in Door Group 1 for 24 Hours a day and
all the doors in Door Group 2 from 9:00 to
17:00.
#
Unset Inside Area
(Yes/No)
#
Enter start month
Enter the number of the start
month, e.g. September, 9
#
Set Area
(Yes/No)
#
NO
Press YES/NO to assign this
option to the Function Level
99
#
........***..............
. . .. . . . . . . . . . .Door 11 Level 3
#
8
Enter the number of the day on
which access is to expire,
e.g. 8th
#
Enter expiry month
8 Sep 1999
NO
Press YES/NO to assign this
option to the Function Level
9
Enter expiry day
8 Sep 1999
NO
Press YES/NO to assign this
option to the Function Level
Enter the number of the start
year, say 1999, e.g. 99
Example
#
Unset Outside Area
(Yes/No)
#
Enter start year
3
Enter the number of the Function
Level you wish to set up e.g. 2
UNSET
Enter start day
#
Enter Function Level
3
Use the UNSET/PART keys to
scroll through the 64 doors, and
press YES/NO to assign these
options to the required doors.
#
10
Enter the number of the expiry
month, e.g. October, 10
#
Enter expiry year
8 Sep 1999
00
8 Oct 2000
Enter the number of the expiry
year, say 2000, e.g. 00
#
Additional Information
Access Levels
All cards assigned on the 3GS system must be given an Access Level for operation. Access levels consist of a list of
Group Times i.e. Door Group and Time Zone combinations. A card is passed on the 3GS system by giving it one of
the 250 available access levels. Each access level is made up of a selection of the 250 group times available. The group
times are made up from any combination of the 250 door groups and 64 time zones.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Edit Levels Database
8 - 49
Function Levels
On the 3GS panel, cards can be used to set/arm or unset/
disarm an area or the entire system. A number of
functions are provided which can be assigned to doors in
the form of a function level. The function level is then
assigned to the card. The doors will typically be set up
with the EXIT attribute.
The function performed depends on the door type e.g..
if the door is type AREA 12 then the function applies to
area 12. In the case of a non-area door type, the function
will apply to the whole system.
The card functions that are provided are:
●
●
Unset/disarm inside the door:
If the area is set/armed, then if a card with this
function is presented to the entry reader, the user is
granted access to the door. When the door is
opened it will start the entry timer. This allows the
cardholder to unset/disarm the system by presenting
the card to the exit reader or entering valid code of
the RKD. The time between presenting the card to
the entry reader and the exit reader must be within
the FUNCTION ENABLE TIME. [See page 8-39:
Door Configure].
Unset/disarm outside the door:
If the area is set/armed, then if a card with this
function is swiped on the entry reader, the user is
granted access to the door. When the door is
opened it will unset/disarm the system or area
immediately.
If the door is set/armed and the card holder tries to
gain access without either of the above unset/disarm
functions, then access is denied and the message
ACCESS DENIED: DOOR ARMED is logged.
8 - 50
●
Set/Arm:
If the door is unset/disarmed, then the cardholder
can set/arm the area/system by presenting the card
to the exit reader and then presenting it to the entry
reader during the FUNCTON ENABLE TIME.
Alternatively the cardholder can use the SET button
to set/arm the area/system.
When any of these functions are performed they are
logged in the security and access logs.
Note If the SET DOOR PROTECT variable is set to NO then
any valid card that has no function assigned will be granted
access if the area is set/armed. This is to allow access to
cards with no functions assigned.
If this variable is set to YES then only valid cards with the
unset/disarm function will be granted access. Cardholders
who normally unset/disarm the system must be given the
unset/disarm function to be allowed access to the building
when the system is set/armed otherwise access is denied.
DEFAULTS TO NO.
Visitor Levels
All cards can be configured as temporary cards using this
facility.
●
●
●
250 Visitor Levels are available on the panel, each of
which can be set-up with a start date and an expiry
date.
A card passed for a Visitor Level will be valid for the
access level it has between the start date and expiry
date.
A visitor card expired message is logged if used after
the expiry date.
menu SETUP SIA
Function:
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT SHIFT
This menu allows you to select a SIA record, set a reporting delay of 0 to 99
seconds and set a combination of two phone numbers to be used to report the
record to the central station. The DM1200 can be programmed to report to
both telephone numbers (x AND y) or either number (x OR y).
Key in
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT
SHIFT
BB
NO
SETUP SIA
BT
AR
Code
01
Delay
UNSET
PART
1 OR 2
Phones
BU
HELP
Alarm zone inhibited
Short or discon on alarm
zone
Zone inhibit removed
FA
System has been Part-Set/
Armed
Alarm area has been Fully
Set/Armed
Block areas 1-32 have been
Fully Set/Armed
Fire Alarm
FR
Fire zone has been reset
FB
Fire zone has been inhibited
FT
Short/discon on Fire zone
SIA Reporting
FU
Fire zone Inhibit removed
SIA (Security Industries Association) reporting provides
greater precision in the reporting of alarm events via a
communications device to a Central Station. When used
with a Europlex DM1200 digital communicator, SIA will
add user name and zone information to every event
reported, and will prioritise events for immediate
transmission, or for transmission following a pre-set time
delay. Once the DM1200 has been configured and
tested [see page 8-63: Setup DM1200 menu], SIA
Reporting is automatically enabled for that panel.
Standard alarm events are assigned SIA codes, according
to the table below.
JA
User Code Entry Timeout
SIA is standard on Version 5.00 software. SIA is only
available on Version 3 or greater of the DM1200.
PU
Short or discon on Panic
zone
Panic zone inhibit removed
RR
Panel has been reset
RX
Test Call
TA
Tamper Alarm
UNSET
Press
UNSET
/
NO
Press # to set the
code delay in seconds
from 1 to 99.
PART
Press # again to set the
phone options, and HELP to
toggle
AND/OR.
CL
NOTE:
Setting the phone numbers
for a particular record to '0
or 0' will disable the
reporting of this record.
for example:
to scroll
forward/back
through the
SIA codes
BA
Code
10
Delay
0 OR 0
Phones
Additional Information
BA 10 0 OR 0
CODE DELAY PHONES
CG
Note Setting the phone numbers
for a particular record to '0 or 0' will
disable the reporting of this record.
For example:
CL1-CL32
OP
OP1 - OP32
PA
PB
PR
PT
Alarm area has been unset/
disarmed
Block areas 1 - 32 have
been unset/disarmed
Panic Alarm activated
Panic zone has been inhibited
Panic zone restored
SIA Code
Alarm Event
YM
Tamper reset following
alarm
Syntax error - system data
corrupted
System battery fault
AR
AC Mains power restored
YP
System power supply fault
AT
AC Mains power fault
YQ
Power Supply fault restored
BA
Alarm zone opened
YR
Battery fault restored
BR
Alarm zone reset
YF
SIA codes are:
Issue 01 Feb 2000
TR
Setup SIA
8 - 51
SOAK MODE
menu
Function:
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
2
SHIFT SHIFT
This menu allow you to monitor troublesome or suspect zones (sensors/
detectors) in an installation.
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT SHIFT
2
SOAK MODE
CLEAR SOAK
?
if soak zone/
doors exist
ZONES
UNSET
DOORS
HELP
UNSET
HELP
SOAK FROM
NO
YES to clear
to soak
more zones
all soaked
/doors
zones/doors
1
ZONE NUMBER _ _ _
SOAK FROM
#
1
DOOR NUMBER _ _ _
#
CLEARED
SOAK TO
1
ZONE NUMBER _ _ _
When "n" is the
number of
zones under
soak test
n SOAK ZONES
Display returns to
Date & Time
Additional Information
Soak Mode
Upon entering this mode the number of zones/doors to
be tested can be chosen, whether an individual zone/
door or a block of zones/doors. TAMPER and DISCON
activations are not ignored.
Zones can be soaked individually or in blocks; for
example, 3 to 3 or 1 to 20.
Activity is only relevant in FULL SET mode and then it is
only logged (no outputs or messages are triggered). No
alarms are triggered in any mode.
8 - 52
SOAK TO
#
1
DOOR NUMBER _ _ _
#
n SOAK DOORS
Display returns to
Date & Time
Soak Mode can be used for troublesome detectors after
adjustment to confirm that their operation is reliable
before use in system. As all open and closed transitions
are logged, with exact time of operation, it is easy to see
how often each soak detector operated and for how
long.
If no activity is logged during the period of a zone’s soak
test, the zone automatically returns to normal status (i.e.
at next UNSET/DISARM after the expiry of “soak days”).
The length of a zone soak test is set in days in the
“Variables” submenu [See page 8-6: Zones/Doors/Vars].
Re-selection of the option allows you to clear all zones/
doors on Soak Test.
menu
Function:
DISABLE MODE
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT
NO
This menu allows you to disable zone/door inputs from reporting any change of
state (including tamper and discon).The input is effectively no longer connected
and can cause no alarm, log and so on. The disable status of inputs is not
cancelled on return to unset/disarm mode and remains off until restored by
selecting Clear Disables.
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT SHIFT
2
DISABLE MODE
ZONES
UNSET
CLEAR DISABLE
if disable zone/
doors exist
?
DOORS
HELP
HELP
UNSET
DISABLE FROM
NO
to disable more
zones/doors
YES
1
DISABLE FROM
1
to clear
all disabled
zones/doors
ZONE NUMBER _ _ _
#
DOOR NUMBER _ _ _
#
CLEARED
DISABLE TO
1
ZONE NUMBER _ _ _
When "n" is the
number of
zones under
disable test
DISABLE TO
#
n DISABLE ZONES
Display returns to
Date & Time
1
DOOR NUMBER _ _ _
#
n DISABLE DOORS
Display returns to
Date & Time
Additional Information
exited automatically from this menu.
Disable Mode
Clearing Disables
The number of disables, if any, is displayed on each
mode change along with a short beep at the RKD.
On entry into this mode if there are inputs already
disabled, the panel will prompt CLEAR ALL DISABLES?
which requires a YES or NO selection.
Disables should only be used as a last resort, for example
to isolate a door with an intermittent tamper fault,
allowing use of the system until the problem is solved.
On selection, the display shows DISABLE MODE followed by
DISABLE FROM1. Key in the number of the input from
which disables are to start and press the # key. Key in the
number at which the disable ends in the same fashion.
The panel then shows n DISABLES , where n is the number
of zones/doors disabled on the system. You are then
Issue 01 Feb 2000
If YES is selected, all disables are cleared. Only disabled
on-line doors are counted in the disable total.
However, disabled doors can be checked to ensure
selection is correct by entering Door Monitor in Service
Mode menu. If the resistance value is enclosed by “/“this
indicates that the input is in fact disabled. Details of
disabled doors are logged.
Disable Mode
8 - 53
OUTPUT TEST
menu
Function:
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT
5
●
●
ENTER OUTPUT NO 1
The Controller, RKD and I/O module relays are
normally OFF (de-energised) - that is, when the output
is turned ON the relay is energised (except for
Controller relay 1 which is fail safe and therefore
normally ON, power removed - output OFF). For this
reason, output1 is Intruder Alarm and is used as the
primary alarm indicator.
#
The system prompts for an output
type to test - for example, 2
You can duplicate output types in order to assign any
number of I/O module relays the same number, in
which case they will respond identically.
OUTPUT TYPE 2 OFF
press Yes to toggle
YES
For example, output 2 drives the 3GS Controller onboard relay to activate the external sounder and an I/O
node output could also be programmed as output 2 to
trigger external security lights when the sounder
operates. You assign output types using the Node
Configure menu. [See page 8-22: Node Configure Outputs].
to toggle output type
2 (relay 2) OFF/ON
OUTPUT TYPE 2
ON
press Yes to toggle
UNSET
PART
to scroll forward
through output types
to scroll back
through output types
NO
to exit menu
ENTER OUTPUT NO 3
NO
Display shows next output type
Press again to exit
FINISHED
Additional Information
The display prompts you to enter an output type (all
outputs set as this type will be triggered simultaneously).
To increment the output type use the UNSET key, to
decrement it use the PART SET key (hold down the key
to auto-repeat). The display will always show the current
state of the output indicated. Use the YES key to toggle
the output ON and OFF. The NO key exits the menu.
Output Types
The 3GS system can control up to 255 unique system
outputs. The Controller has four on-board 1 Amp relays
(default output types 1 to 4) while relays on the I/O
nodes can be addressed to any output type (1 to 255).
Relay outputs can be used to trigger devices for many
applications, such as:
●
Lighting/heating circuit control
Door/security barrier control
OUTPUT TEST
ENTER OUTPUT NO. _ _ _
●
5
This menu allows you to examine the current state of any output on the system
and to toggle it for test purposes.
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
●
SHIFT
Siren/bell/strobe triggering
Camera switching
System set/arm and alarm indication
8 - 54
Note For the DM1200 to initiate communications on
activation of output 1, the unit must be programmed to
view this as a negative trigger. To do this change the output
trigger control from POS to NEG. [See - PERIPHERAL
DEVICES SECTION: DM1200 CHAPTER 12].
Power Consumption
When a 1A relay energises it can typically draw up to
30mA. It is important that you take into consideration
this power consumption when calculating PSU
requirements, particularly if a 6-output node is in use,
where the current drawn by the relays alone may exceed
180mA. Output devices such as sounders/strobes and so
on, will also be drawing large amounts of current.
Remote power supply units should be used to power I/O
nodes in such a situation.
Output functions
Output types range from 1 to 255 with their pre-defined
functions. Output functions range from 1 to 1000. The
255 output types may be mapped to any of the 1000
output functions depending on the system requirements.
[See page 8-68: Edit Output Database]. The system
allows for spare output types with no pre-defined
function. For example, 110, 250 to 255.
The 3GS Controller has 4 on-board 1Amp relays,
defaulted to types 1, 2, 3, and 4, while relays on the
Nodes are not defaulted and can be addressed to any of
255 output numbers.
menu
SYSTEM LOG
Function:
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
YES
This menu allows you to view or print either of the two logs maintained by the
3GS system:
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
YES
SYSTEM LOG
ALARM
ACCESS
UNSET
YES
PRINT LOG
HELP
?
PRINTING...
NO
NO
to quit print-out
System log
Access log
ABORTED
SYSTEM LOG
Bottom line scrolls User
Name, User Number and
nature of event/action taken.
Top line displays Time & Date
event occured (hyphens
change to indicate a new
event occuring).
Access LOG
_MON 24JUL95 *15:15:20
JOHN SMITH
USER 3 SELECTED
SYSTEM LOG
Details of the Access Log will
be displayed here.
_ _ MON 24JUL95 *15:00:45
MARY JONES
USER 8 ACCEPTED
ID SECURITY ALERT
_ _ _MON 24JUL95 *15:00:40
MARY JONES
USER 8 SELECTED
ALERT ACCEPT
UNSET
_MON 24JUL95 *13:55:12
STATUS ALERT
ID SECURITY ALERT
PART
to
to
to
to
scroll
more
scroll
more
forward
recent events
back
recent events
_MON 24JUL95 *12:25:09
OUTPUT 6 OFF
_ _MON 24JUL95 *12:25:05
FRANK WALL
USER 2 SELECTED
UNSET
NO
to exit
ABORTED
Additional Information
●
Alarm and system log. Maintains a record of the last 1000 alarm events.
●
Access log. Stores 3000 access log events.
These logs record all activity on the 3GS system, including keypad input, alerts, activities, access and so on. Each event
is date-time stamped to the nearest second. To clear either log you need to carry out a cold start.
Printing logs
When the option PRINT LOG? is displayed you can print by pressing the YES key (ensure a serial printer is connected and
the serial port correctly configured). Otherwise, press NO to display the log on the RKD.
Viewing logs
You can quickly step through the log display (one line at a time) by pressing the # key. An * appears in the centre of the
date and time display to make the log easily differentiable from the Unset/Disarm mode display. The date and time
remain visible in the display until all information regarding that particular event has been shown. The PART SET key will
rewind one entry at a time to the first entry of the date currently being displayed, while the UNSET key will skip to the
next entry. To leave the system log at any point in the record, press the NO key.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
System Log
8 - 55
menu
Function:
PRINT ALL REPORTS
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT
6
This option provides a print-out of reports on the system configuration.
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
PRINT ALL REPORTS
SHIFT
6
?
NO
PRINT VARIABLES
?
NO
PRINT USER INFO ?
UNSET
to scroll forward
PART
to scroll back
Additional Information
If not all reports are required, press NO and the option to print each in turn is displayed. If the “PRINT LITS?” option is
selected, only those literals which have been modified will be printed. A report print-out may be aborted at any stage
by pressing the NO key. Ensure the serial port, to which the printer is connected, is configured for printer operations.
See page 8-58: Set Data Formats for the correct settings (baud rate, parity etc.).
8 - 56
menu
Function:
SET DATE & TIME
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT
9
The system Date & Time should be set after a cold start. Note that the time is set
in 24-hour clock notation. Use the UNSET / PART keys to scroll through the
digits or key in the digits directly.
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT
9
SET HOUR:
SET DATE/TIME
Edit Hour (1-24)
1
To leave
unchanged
2 DIGITS _ _
SET YEAR : 1996
#
Edit Year if required
To leave
unchanged
4 DIGITS _ _ _ _
SET MINUTE: 1
To leave
unchanged
#
Edit Minute (1-59)
SET MONTH:
Edit Month (1-12)
2 DIGITS _ _
1
#
To leave
unchanged
2 DIGITS _ _
#
SET SECOND :
1
To leave
unchanged
2 DIGITS _ _
Edit Second (1-59)
SET DAY :
Edit Day (1-31):
1
#
Date & Time are now set
To leave
unchanged
2 DIGITS _ _
#
MON 22JUL96 15:15:20
Note: There are two methods of editing the display
1 Key in digits
To backspace :
*
To move forward :
YES
2 Scroll through digits
To increment digits :
Issue 01 Feb 2000
UNSET
To decrement digits:
PART
Set Date & Time
8 - 57
menu
SET DATA FORMAT
Function:
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT
8
This menu allows you to configure the Controller’s three serial ports for local
(direct) connect or remote connect (via modem) to a range of devices, such as a
PC, Printer, pager, modem and so on.
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT
8
SET DATA FORMAT
PORT 1
2400
E,8,1
Unset . ...... Half ............. Help
to exit
NO
To scroll and/or #
accept data
To scroll To scroll To scroll
UNSET
HALF
PORT 1
150
E,8,1
E,8,2
PORT 2
300
N,8,1
N,8,2
HELP
600
PORT 3
O,8,2
O,8,1
1200
E,7,1
E,7,2
2400
N,7,1
O,7,1
N,7,2
4800
Parity, Data Bits,
Stop Bit
O,7,2
9600
19200
Baud Rate
to select displayed configuration #
PRINTER
PORT 1
NO
NO
?
YES
PRINTER
PORT 1
YES
#
#
PAGER
YES
?
YES
PAGER
NO
#
?
?
LOG FILTER
ACCESS FILTER
#
The pager is now selected
32767
255
TRANSMIT NAME: NO
LOG FILTER
32767
ACCESS FILTER
255
To scroll
and/or accept
data press:
YES
TRANSMIT NAME: YES
?
#
ENTER NAME & ADDRESS
#
SYSTEM ID
?
See Typing Text
1
ACCESS CONTROL 0
Note
Dial Mode set to 0 - Remote Communications
Dial Mode set to other - Local Communications
AUTODIAL ID
0
DIAL MODE
0
DIAL
MODE:
DIAL
ACCESS: 0
ACCESS
The port is now set up
for printer operation.
If dial mode set as "3":
3
CODE
ENTER DIAL COMMAND
AT E0 V1 Q0 D
ENTER TEL. . NO. 1
ENTER TEL. . NO. 2
Additional Information
Port 1,2,3
Port 1 refers to the RS232 (9-pin) connector located on
8 - 58
the right of the Controller PCB. Ports 2 & 3 are TTL and
are labelled TX 2/RX2 & TX3/RX3. On ports 2 and 3
the12v supply should not be used to power devices;
instead use 12V supply from 3GS PSU.
4
Output On, Off
5
Lit and Variable
Baud rate
6
8 Bit sentence
You can set up the panel for the baud rates ranging from
150 to 19200.
7
Lit Sentence
8
Cable Fault
9
Soak Zone, Door
10
Inhibit Zone, Door
11
Disable Zone, Door
12
Enable Zone, Door
13
Access Status Changes
14
Literal Sentence
15
Door Change
Ports can be set to perform the same local function (for
example 2 ports set for printer).
Parity, data bits and stop bits
Select the appropriate communications protocol.
Parity:
E = Even Parity
N = No Parity
O = Odd Parity
Data Bits:
8/7 = 8 or 7
Stop Bits:
1/2 = 1 or 2
Printer
For direct connection to a printer this must be set to YES.
Serial Port 3 defaults to PRINTER: YES.
When set to YES data is transmitted out to this port.
Transmit Name
The name and address entered during the initialisation
sequence of the system (usually after a cold start) can be
printed at the start of every logged text if required.
Pager
For connection to a local pager, set this to YES. Messages
will be formatted for the pager before being transmitted
on this port.
The default is: 32767 = all system and alarm events.
Access Filter
This allows for filtering of access (of events based on
access log type). To filter certain access log types change
these values. See the table below for a list of access log
types.
Access Log Filter
Log Filter
This controls which event types of logged data are output
to the serial port. It allows for filtering of log events based
on the log type. The log filter consists of a 16 bit word,
where each bit represents a log type. Each log type is
shown in the table below. Zone changes are controlled
by bit 1. If the bit is SET, then reporting of zone changes
is ENABLED. If the bit is not SET, then the log type will be
skipped when reporting. Add the number of each log
type together to generate the appropriate log filter, e.g.
the default value of 32767 allows all events
(1+2+3+......+15=32767).
System (Alarm) Log Filter
Log Type
Description
1
Zone Change
2
Status Change (Alert, Clear, Cancel)
3
User Select, Accept, Denied
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Log Type
Description
1
Door Event
2
Card Event
3
Access Node Event
4
Access Exception
5
Time Zone Change (state=0=normal, 1=free access, 2=locked
6
‘Control Door Event
7
Access User Select, Accept, Denied
8
Log Card Select, Accept, Denied
The default is 255 (all access events)
Set Data Format
8 - 59
System ID
Dial Access
This is used for distinguishing between panels during
polling when multiple units are connected to a single
serial line. Valid values for a SYSTEM ID are from 0 to
127 inclusive.
This options controls the access code requirement.
Set to 0 for a remote printer set-up. When using the
system in auto-dial modem configuration, SYSTEM ID is
usually set to a fixed value for all panels (for example 1).
Access control
This variable determines the level of control available to
the remote user over a particular panel. Changing this
value impacts the level of control available to remote
users. See the ESCO Protocol documents for details.
Dial mode
Decides if the panel will dial out and if so when. Also
controls communications mode. The legal values are:
0
Direct connect.
1
Dump log data when available to a remote
device.
2
Dump log data to a remote device when variable%’ is set from the panel, for example by
time command.
3
Remote Communications. Allowed based on
dial access. The panel dials the programmed
modem telephone numbers when data has
been logged.
Important If a DM1200 Digital Communicator is
connected, the Dial Mode must be set to 0. If another
communications device such as a modem is in use, set Dial
Mode to 3.
8 - 60
0
Unrestricted access. No access code required.
1
Password access. Access code required before
serial comms.
2
Callback. Controller will hang-up after a valid
connect sequence from the communications
device and ring the pre-programmed telephone number.
Autodial ID
This may be set as any number between 0-9999 and is
recognised by communications software as a unique
account number for the installation.
Enter Dial Command
This is a set-up command sent by the system to the
modem before the modem dials out. The default
command for the 3GS Controller is:
AT E0 V1 Q0 D
Enter tel. No. 1
This is the number dialled by the system when contacting
a remote location. This must not be left blank if dial
mode is non-zero.
If successful communications cannot be established, a
back-up number will be dialled (below).
Enter Tel. No. 2
This is the back-up number which is dialled if connection
is not established using the primary telephone number.
This may be left blank if a back-up facility is not required.
Modem communications
The following describes important parameters and
modem settings required for high speed modem
configuration (9600 bps and 19200 bps) to the 3GS
Controller
The commands detailed refer specifically to Multitech
modems. For other modem types, please refer to
manufacturer manual for equivalent settings.
The following tables show parameters to be set for
modem communication (in this case Multitech modem)
with Panelman / ED2000:
Normal settings:
Parameter
Description
AT Command(s)
Echo
Turn echo off
E0
Response
Include connection speed in response
X1
Verbose
Modem responds in ‘words’ rather than code
V1
Auto Answer
Accepting incoming call after specified number of rings
S0=1
Flow Control
Both Hardware and Software based flow control must be disabled
&E3
DTR Signal
The PC will normally provide its modem with Data Terminal
Ready (DTR) signal. If this is not available the Modem will not
respond.
The panel doesn’t provide DTR, so its modem must be configured to ignore this signal
&D2 (PC)
&D0 (Panel)
High speed settings:
Parameter
Description
AT Commands
Max Speed
Sets upper limit for incoming and
outgoing speeds
$MB19200
$SB19200
V.42 Error Correction
Disable Error Correction. This means
carrier signal will be established once
speed is matched
AT&E0
Data Compression
Data Compression should be disabled
AT&E14
V.32 Terbo Tones
For communication at 19200bps the
connection response CONNECT
19200 (rather than CONNECT
14400) is required. Not all Multitech
modems support this feature
AT#V0
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Set Data Format
8 - 61
menu
Function:
FORCE CALL
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT FULL
This menu allows you to initiate a call from the 3GS to the telephone number
programmed in the Set data Formats menu or to the telephone number
programmed in the DM1200 menu.
SHIFT
FULL
FORCE CALL
COMMUNICATING...
PORT n
n = selected port.
The display returns to
date and time.
Additional Information
By selecting Force Call the 3GS will dial the connected modem’s primary telephone number [see page 8-58: Set Data
Formats] and establish communications with a remote PC. This could be used as a test function or to allow personnel
at a remote location to perform system maintenance using Panelman software. The 3GS serial port will already have
been configured and a DM1200 or modem connected.
8 - 62
menu
Function:
SET UP DM1200
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT SHIFT
FULL
This menu allows you to configure the Controller to communicate via the
Europlex DM1200 digital communicator.
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT SHIFT
FULL
SET UP DM1200
Select the port to which the
DM1200 is connected
PORT 1
PORT 2
PORT 3
unset............half...........,,help
UNSET
HALF
By default, port 2 is
configured for DM1200
communications protocol.
HELP
See "Check Before
Programming”
NO RESPONSE
CHECKING...
PORT 2
DM1200 PROGRAMMER
!! PRESS ANY KEY !!
#
DM 1200
Additional Information
DM1200: [See DM1200 Chapter 12, Page 12-11]
This menu gives you access to the DM1200 programming menus for configuration.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Set Up DM1200
8 - 63
USER SETUP
menu
Function:
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
This menu allows you to set up users and user names. You, the installer, cannot
assign options to system users, this must be done by the Master User. The
Master User has all options, by default, and this cannot be removed.
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT UNSET
USER SETUP
ID.S
OPTIONS
UNSET
NAMES
HALF
HELP
ENTER USER NO. 3
To select displayed user
Change ID Codes
Assign Options
UNSET
NO
. . . .
?
PART SET
NEW CODE _ _ _ _
#
?
HALF SET
?
FULL SET
?
BELL TEST
?
MODE 6
?
MODE 7
?
MODE 8
?
MODE 9
?
SET DATE/TIME
?
CHANGE ID
?
USER SETUP
?
SYSTEM LOG
?
HOUR ADJUST
?
Assign Names
Key in a user
name (see
"Typing Text").
<
USER CODE
Alternatively key in user number or
scroll through users using UNSET
key.
#
#
NO
To withhold an option
YES
To assign an option
EDIT TIME COMMANDS ?
INHIBIT MODE
?
ENTER USER NO. 4
NO
8 - 64
to exit
#
To accept all data
Display shows next user number
SHIFT UNSET
Additional Information
ID Codes
The first step should be to change the master default
code (1020) by selecting “ID.S”. All system users should
be assigned codes in the same fashion. If required, the
user can assign his/her own code by using the “Change
ID” option (the master user must give the user this
option). An ID code must have 4 digits.
Note The 3GS has a “Duress” facility whereby in a crisis
situation a user may activate a silent panic alarm (no bells/
sirens and communication is initiated) by incrementing
their ID code by 1. For example if code is 1239, entering
1240 will generate a duress alarm. Therefore it is not
advisable to assign sequential codes (for example 1234,
1235) as the lower code cannot utilise the Duress facility.
Options
The system users can be assigned options as required.
Press YES to assign an option, NO to withhold and scroll
forward. When the options have been assigned press #
to accept. The next user number is displayed. When
scrolling through the user help menu, a user will only see
those options which have been assigned to
Issue 01 Feb 2000
them.
If the “USER SET UP” option is given to a user, that user
may assign options to other users. However, the user is
restricted to assigning only those options they possess
themselves.
Names
Up to 23 characters may be entered for a user name.
This greatly enhances the interpretation of the system
log, identifying by name who set/armed or unset/
disarmed the system etc. When “NAMES” is selected, a
flashing cursor appears. Place the text overlay on the
keypad to identify characters and key in names as shown
in “Typing Text”.
As an alternative to the “User Set Up” option, codes/
options/names may be downloaded from a PC using
Panelman software.
The first option to be displayed is “Unset?”. To give a user
the option to unset/disarm the panel, press the YES key.
Continue in this fashion until the required options are
assigned and then press # to accept the data.
User Setup
8 - 65
menu
Function:
AREA SETUP
SHIFT
2
The Area Setup menu allows you to set the number of areas to be active in the
system and assigns Area Set/Arm and Unset/Disarm rights to the system users,
keypads to areas and programming area names.
Additional Information
The system currently allows for up to 32 areas, and can
be set/armed for any number of areas up to 32.
Setting the number of areas in the system is an installer
option only. The option to assign user rights to areas is
available to both Installer and Master User.
Providing the user with an area gives them the right to
set/arm or unset/disarm that area. However, the user
must also be given the PART SET user option for area set/
arm, and the HALF SET user option for area set/arm
[See - SOFTWARE SECTION: USER GUIDE CHAPTER 9].
This allows the user to be given the right to set/arm or
not set/arm an area. Installer’s are not allowed to set/arm
or unset/disarm areas.
Once the user set/arm or unset/disarm rights have been
assigned, they are effective immediately, so that
individual users will only be able to set/arm or unset/
disarm those areas to which they have rights. PART and
HALF keys are used for Area Unset/Disarm and Area
Setting/Arming. [See - SOFTWARE SECTION: USER
GUIDE CHAPTER 9]. Setting the number of area to 0 will
configure the system for no areas and PART and HALF
keys are used to PART SET and HALF SET the system.
Area Keypads
Use this option to assign keypads to areas so that
messages for individual areas can only be seen on the
keypads assigned to the area.
The system may be set up so that each area has a
keypad installed at a point convenient to the Exit/Entry
route. In this case, you should assign this keypad to the
area. Once assigned, the keypad will display only those
alert messages relating to that particular area, and when
the user is setting the system, will display the number of
that area first, allowing instant setting.
Alternatively, one keypad may be positioned at a point
central to a number of areas, for example Areas 5 and 7.
In this case, the keypad can be assigned to both areas,
and will then display messages for these two areas only.
When setting, the display will prompt the user to first
set/arm Area 5, followed by Area 7, and will then scroll
through the other areas configured.
When arming an area the keypad shows the current
area(s) to which the keypad is assigned. However, the
flashing cursor enables the user to key in the number of
any area instantly and set/arm that area, provided the
8 - 66
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
USERS
UNSET
KEYPADS
PART
SHIFT
2
DESCS
HALF
#
NUMBER OF AREAS
24
Key in the number of blocks to be
active in this installation, e.g. 24
#
ENTER USER NUMBER
2
Assign Set/Unset rights to User 2
for each area in turn.
#
AREA-2
Area Number 1
NO?
YES
NO
AREA-2
Area Number 2
NO?
YES
NO
#
The display then scrolls through
the rest of the areas configured
for the installation.
to return to the user prompt
ENTER USER NUMBER
NO
Use YES/NO keys to assign/deny rights
3
to quit
Assign Set/Unset rights to User 3
for each area in turn.
user has setting/arming rights.
In the example shown, the keypad has been assigned
to Areas 5 and 7.
Enter the node number of
the keypad to which you
want to assign areas.
By default, the node
number of the keypad you
are currently using will be
displayed.
ENTER NODE NO. 4
keypad
This keypad will now display messages for Areas 5
and 7.
#
AREA UNSET
Area Number 5
AREA UNSET
Area Number 7
AREA-1
Area Number 1
Zones and doors that are open in the areas assigned
to a particular keypad can be displayed at any stage
by pressing the * key.
No?
Assign area(s) to this
keypad using the YES/NO
keys
NO
Private Mode
The private mode feature prevents two separate users
from configuring the system at the same time. When
one system RKD is in use, an attempt to key in at any
other system the RKD will produce the message:
System Busy... Please Wait. The keypad continues to
display this message until the user at the other keypad
has finished, when it returns to normal day/date/time.
Area Descriptions
Like 3GS zones, doors or cards, system areas can be
given individual descriptions for ease of identification.
Descriptions are entered by entering text. [See page
8-2: Typing Text]. Once entered, the description is
effective immediately and is given in any alert
messages, log entries and printed reports.
AREA-5
Area Number 2
YES?
YES
AREA-7
Area Number 2
YES?
Areas 5 and 7 have now
been assigned to this
YES
The display then scrolls
through the rest of the
Printing Area Information
When you exit the Area Setup menu, you are
prompted to Print Area Options? and to Print Modes?
When you print Area Options, the resulting report
details the user area rights, number and name of
system users, areas assigned to keypads, and total
number of areas in the system. The Print Modes option
will give a report on the current status of each area on
Issue 01 Feb 2000
#
to return to node prompt when finished
the system.
Area Setup
8 - 67
menu
Function:
EDIT OUTPUT DATABASE
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT SHIFT HELP
This menu allows you to map an output function to an output number (1 - 255).
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT SHIFT HELP
EDIT OUTPUT DATABASE
UNSET
to scroll forward
PART
to scroll back
#
to edit the
standard outputs
AREA ENTRY/EXIT ?
#
to edit the Area
E/E outputs
AREA SET ?
# etc.
AREA ALARM ?
#
AREA BELL ?
#
AREA STROBE ?
#
AREA FAIL TO SET ?
#
AREA FIRE-X ?
#
MISCELLANEOUS ?
#
AREA WARNING ?
#
AREA DETECTOR RESET ?
#
DOOR FORCED ?
#
DOOR LEFT OPEN ?
#
PRINT OUTPUT DATABASE?
YES
STANDARD ?
Additional Information
In a complete 32-area, 64-door system, each area will require an output for the following events: Area Set/Arm, Area
Fail to Set/Arm, Area Alarm, Area 10-minute Warning, Area Detector Reset, and also (depending on the device type
device in use) Area Strobe, Bell or Fire-X.
Given the limit of 255 different output numbers, it will be necessary to customise the output list to suit individual
systems. For example, if the installer wants Area Fails To Set/Arm condition to drive the system buzzer, and all Areas are
programmed in the same way, then the output types Area 1 to Area 32 Fail to Set/Arm (by default outputs 144 to 175)
may all be given the same output number 8. In this way, an Area Fail to Set/Arm condition in any area will result in
activating the system buzzer.
If there are 30 doors on the system, the Door Forced condition for all 30 doors may be set to the same output number,
for example number 7 Internal Bell, and so all doors will respond in the same way when forced.
In the default output list, outputs 110 and 250 to 255 are unassigned. Certain output types have been given a zero
default value. The table below lists all available output types and their current values. The sub-menus divide the
outputs into standard, Area exit/entry, etc.
8 - 68
Menu
option
Function
O/P
no.
Menu
option
Output
O/P
no.
Standard
Intruder
1
Area Fail to
Set/Arm
Area 1 to Area 32 Fail to
Set/Arm
144 175
External Bell
2
Common Area Fail to Set/
Arm
176
Panic
3
Area 1 to Area 32 Fire-X
177 208
Full Set/Full Arm
4
Common Area Fire-X
209
Fire
5
PIN Code Alert
210
Tech
6
PIN Code Duress
211
Internal Bell
7
Installer On-Site
212
System Buzzer
8
Line Fault
213
Verified Alarm
9
Raid Camera
214
Modem
10
Photo Entry
215
Exit/Entry Area 1 to 32
11 - 42
Suspicion
216
Common Area Exit/Entry
43
Unset Local
250
Area 1 Set/Arm to Area
32 Set/Arm
44 - 75
Duress
251
Common Area Set/Arm
76
✭Area 1 to Area 32 10m
warning
0
Area 1 Alarm to Area 32
Alarm
77 108
✭Full Set/Full Arm 10m
warning
0
Common Area Alarm
109
✭Area 1 to Area 32 Det.
Reset
0
Area 1 Bell to Area 32
Bell
111 142
✭Common Area Det.
Reset
0
Common Area Bell
143
Door Forced
✭Door 1 to Door 64
Forced
0
Area 1 to Area 32 Strobe
217 248
Door Shunted
✭Door 1 to Door 64
Left Open
0
Common Area Strobe
249
Area Exit
Entry
Area Set/
Arm
Area Alarm
Area Bell
Area Strobe
Area Fire-X
Miscellaneous
Area Warning
Area Detector Reset
✭: The output type has not been given a default value.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Edit Output Database
8 - 69
menu
Function:
RADIO PA ASSIGN
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT SHIFT
This menu allows you to setup radio panic attack button units on the system, assign
descriptions to these units and allocate options to each one.
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT SHIFT
*
RADIO PA ASSIGN
RPA'S
Unset
DESCS
Half
OPTIONS
Help
UNSET
HALF
HELP
RPA’s
Descs
Options
Additional Information
RPA: [See Page 8-71]
These units must be learned onto the system and assigned an RPA number to function correctly. Each RPA button unit
has a unique number encoded into its memory for identification.
Descs: [See Page 8-72]
This is a 23 character text message for the RPA user name or RPA location.
Options: [See Page 8-73]
Each RPA can be assigned a set of options based on the button combinations.
8 - 70
*
menu
Function:
RADIO PA ASSIGNÜ RPA’S
This menu allows you to put an RPA unit on the system.
RPA’s
Sample Serial No
RPA No
Default Description
RPA 1
RPA 1
->
0123456789
UNSET
PART
Example
In this example Radio PA0123456789 is assigned as
RPA 1.
Display shows
RPA 2
RPA 2
UNSET
to scroll forward
through zones
to scroll back
through zones
To re-assign as RPA 2
-> NOT ASSIGNED
Press top button on
Radio PA-0123456789
and display prompts: ASSIGNED TO RPA 1
REASSIGN... YES / NO
YES
RPA 2
-> 0123456789
Radio PA - 0123456789 is
now assigned as RPA 2.
RPA 1 is now unassigned
PART
RPA 1
RPA 1
-> NOT ASSIGNED
*
To clear an assignment,
Additional Information
Each Radio PA (RPA) unit is encrypted with a unique ten-digit serial number. The 3GS Controller uses this serial
number to identify the RPA. In order for the system to recognise individual units, it is necessary to assign an RPA
NUMBER to each unit from 1 to 126. This is achieved by selecting the “RPAS” option and pressing any RPA button.
The RPA’s serial number is displayed along with an RPA number. RPA numbers may be reassigned if required.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Radio PA Assign
8 - 71
menu
RADIO PA ASSIGNÜ DESCRIPTIONS
Function:
This menu allows you to program a RPA description.
Descs
EDIT RPA DESCRIPTION
#
ENTER RPA NO. 1
RPA 1
Scroll to the RPA you wish
to enter a description for.
UNSET
UNSET
PART
ENTER RPA NO. 3
RPA 3
to scroll forward
through zones
to scroll back
through zones
#
RPA 3
RPA 3
#
Type in RPA Description up
to a maximum of 24
characters using the method
shown in Typing Text at the
start of this chapter.
When complete.
Additional Information
An alphanumeric description of up to 24 characters (i.e. RPA user’s name) may be assigned to each RPA unit after it has
been assigned an RPA number. This is achieved by placing an overlay card on the numeric keypad and inputting characters from within the “DESCS” menu option. A default description (based on the RPA number) will already exist, e.g.
RPA 1. Edit this description using the method described in Typing Text at the start of this chapter. Alternatively, descriptions can be entered using Panelman
8 - 72
menu
Function:
RADIO PA ASSIGNÜ OPTIONS
This menu allows you to setup RPA options for each unit.
IMPORTANT : By default, the RPA
units have NO options and therefore
will NOT operate until options have
been assigned as YES.
Options
UNSET
ENTER RPA NO. 1
RPA 1
PART
Scroll to the RPA you wish
to assign options for.
to scroll forward
through zones
to scroll back
through zones
#
RAID
RPA 1
NO?
The system displays the
first option for RPA 1
UNSET
DELAYED RAID
RPA 1
NO?
RAID CANCEL
RPA 1
NO?
SUSPICION
RPA 1
NO?
PHOTO ENTRY
RPA 1
#
NO?
To assign an
option
NO
To deny an option
(or leave at
default
To accept these options
ENTER RPA NO. 2
RPA 2
NO
YES
The next RPA number is displayed
Continue to assign options as
shown above
to exit
Additional Information
There are currently six programmable options which provide an arrangement of uses for the RPA buttons. Individual
buttons (or a combination of buttons) can be assigned an option within the Radio PA Set Up menu, provided it is
granted to the RPA unit within the Options menu first. For example, on RPA units, if the left button is required to activate a Delayed Raid option, and the right button is to activate Raid Cancel, both of these options must be granted to the
individual RPA unit concerned. By default, RPA’s are assigned no options and therefore failure to assign options as
described means the units will not operate. As up to 7 different button configurations may be obtained by pressing the
buttons singularly and as combinations, all seven options may be assigned to each RPA unit. Details of these options
are given overleaf.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Radio PA Assign
8 - 73
Raid
The Raid option causes an instant silent alarm. When selected, this option turns on the Panic and Raid-Camera outputs
and triggers the pager units immediately. NO alert appears on the RKD until a System Unset/Disarm is performed,
whereby a ‘Radio Panic Alarm’ is displayed along with the RPA description that triggered the alert. The action is
recorded in the system log.
Delayed Raid
This option operates identically to the “Raid” option except that the activation of the Panic output is delayed for 90
seconds. This provides the opportunity to cancel the panic output (assuming the “Raid Cancel” option has been
granted) and therefore prevent consequent action, e.g. central station communications.
Raid Cancel
This option resets the Panic and Raid-Camera outputs provided it has been selected within 90 seconds of the Panic
output being triggered. The pager units are triggered and the action is recorded in the system log. The user must still
unset/disarm the system to clear the Panic alert messages.
Suspicion
When selected, this option turns on the suspicion output (which will, typically, activate the same camera as the raid
camera output) and triggers the pager units immediately. A suspicion alert is displayed with the RPA description that
triggered the alert and is recorded in the system log.
Photo Entry
When selected, this option turns on the suspicion output for approximately 5 seconds which will activate a CCTV
camera and record personnel entering the premises.
8 - 74
menu
Function:
TIME ADVANCE
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT SHIFT
YES
This menu allows you to advance the time on the 3GS.
ENGINEER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT SHIFT YES
TIME ADVANCE
FINISHED
The system clock has now
been adjusted to 5 seconds
before the next pre-set time
command.
TUE 02JAN96 00:04:20
Display shows adjusted
date & time
Additional Information
This option will advance the system clock to five seconds before the next pre-set time command. This is useful when
testing or demonstrating the operation of such time commands. The option is available to all users with the “Date/Time
Adjust” option.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Time Advance
8 - 75
menu
Function:
LITERAL EDIT AND HOLIDAY SCHEDULER
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT HALF
This menu allows you to change system literals and schedule system holidays for
alarm operation.
SHIFT UNSET
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
Print Option
LIT. EDIT.
Unset
The option to print all literals
or only those which have
changed is given on exit.
to exit
NO
HOL. SCHED
Help
UNSET
HELP
XXXXX BYTES FREE
HOLIDAY SCHEDULER
PRINT LITS ?
where x = available
RAM space
LITERAL :
to exit
YES
NO
FRI MAY 01
TYPE 00
FRI MAY 01
TYPE 00
1
To print
Key in a literal
number, eg. 2
PRINT ALL LITS ?
LITERAL NUMBER _ _ _ _
NO
YES
Only literals
that have been
edited are
printed.
LITERAL :
#
2
All literals
are printed.
#
EDIT
COPY
DEFAULT
FRI MAY 01
UNSET
Edit Literal
HALF
TYPE 01
HELP
Copy Literal
Default Literal
<
EDITING LITERAL NO. 2
#
Key in the new text to
appear in the literal
eg Literal 177 which
contains the text
"Zone Tamper
Alarm", :
# to select a source literal
COPY LITERAL
(the preceding literal is
always displayed)
1
If you wish to select another
literal as the source literal,
key in a new number, eg:
10
The contents of literal 10 is
now copied to literal 2.
ZONE TAMPER ALARM
EDITING LITERAL NO. 177
Key in 1
0
LITERAL :
8 - 76
#
3
Display shows next literal
number
Key in the
holiday number
to be assigned
to the selected
day.
Additional Information
Literal Edit
WARNING: This function is for advanced users only
and any modifications to literals may compromise the
operation of the system.
Submenus are:
●
●
●
Edit Allows entry / deletion of characters.
Copy Copies strings and thus avoids repetitive
typing.
Default Returns literals to original state, i.e. after a
Cold Start.
Edit
This function allows the changing of the literal selected.
The content of the literal is displayed. If the literal is
empty of text the display will be blank.
into another (target). The contents of the target literal will
be overwritten. The literal that is displayed before
selecting the COPY function is the target literal.
Default
This function returns a literal to its factory default
settings.
Holiday Scheduler
Holiday types are configured within the system literal file
and are identified by a 2-digit number.
To assign, use the UNSET/PART keys to select the
relevant day, and the HALF key to select the correct
month. Key in the type number and press #.
The holiday is now set.
Copy
This function will copy the contents of one literal (source)
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Literal Edit and Holiday Scheduler
8 - 77
COMMAND MODE
menu
Function:
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT
1
This menu provides you with direct access to the power of the command string
interpreter.
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT
1
COMMAND MODE
<
Enter command to execute.
Display returns to Date & Time.
Additional Information
WARNING: This function is for advanced users only and any modifications to literals may compromise the
operation of the system.
When a command string is entered, the 3GS will execute it immediately. Should an error occur during the execution,
a "SYNTAX ERROR" message is displayed and the command string aborted.
Any command string up to the maximum length of 127 characters may be entered. A blank display is presented each
time, but the most recently entered string is stored in literal 498. The most commonly used and simple commands
are for direct control of the system outputs.
For example:
S2
Will set output 2, both the on-board relay and any other node outputs assigned as output 2.
R2
Resets the same output.
B1841
Will generate an unused RKD sound pattern.
B0
Will turn off the RKD buzzer.
8 - 78
menu
Function:
SOFT START
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT
7
This menu allows you to reset the 3GS system.
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT
7
ARE YOU SURE ?
YES
RKD 2I/1O 0000000031
V02 10MAY95 001 1 2
3GS 200 V1.00 20 NOV 95
3GS -OS V1.30 20 NOV 95
UPDATING DATABASE
ENTER NAME/ ADDRESS
Key in Name/Address
(see "Typing Text")
#
SOFT START
INITIALISE NODES ?
NO
YES
To reinitialise
ringnet
PSU TYPE = 4AMP
BUSY... RE-SHEDULING
MON 24JUL95 15:15:20
Additional Information
A Soft Start is a system requested reset which does not remove any programmed data. When selected, the keypad
buzzer sounds and the display prompts “ARE YOU SURE?”. Pressing NO returns the system to stand-by mode. A soft
start alert message is generated and this must be accepted in the normal fashion [See page 8-81: Accept All Alerts].
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Soft Start
8 - 79
menu
Function:
UNSET/RESET
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
UNSET
This menu allows you to disarm the system and put the 3GS into Unset mode
(i.e. normal daytime operation). When selected, all system alarm outputs are
reset. This option is only available to the installer in Unset mode. This means
that the installer cannot unset/disarm the system but can use the unset function
to reset system outputs.
Enter the premises via the
correct entry route.
The entry buzzer will
sound.
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
UNSET
USER CODE ????
WAIT...
UNSET
System goes into Standby
mode and display shows
MON 01JAN96 15:15:20
Additional Information
Unset/Disarm Mode
When in Unset/Disarm mode, the display alternates showing the date & time along with any system warnings or alert
messages. An open zone will have its description displayed, however the zone state “open” is not indicated.
Zones which are in a TAMPER or DISCON (disconnected) condition will cause both the zone description and zone
state to appear on the display. An alert message is generated, buzzer sounds, and an alarm is recorded in the system
log. Pressing the ENTER key in this mode causes the display to skip quickly through the various messages.
Unsetting/disarming the system also starts a battery test and will cause any battery problems on the system to be
reported.
Note The installer code (default = 1010) is only valid when the system is in unset/disarm mode.
8 - 80
menu
Function:
ACCEPT ALL ALERTS
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
0
This menu allows you to clear all alert messages from the display.
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
0
1 ACCEPTED
FRI 30JUL99 12:15 PM
The number of alerts cleared is shown
temporarily before returning to the day,
date & time
Any number of alert messages
may be accepted using this
method, eg:
FRI 30JUL99 12:15 PM
CODE ENTRY TIME OUT
FRI 30JUL99 12:15 PM
***ALARM***
FRI 30JUL99 12:15 PM
++CALL SERVICE++
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
0
3 ACCEPTED
FRI 30JUL99 12:15 PM
Additional Information
Alert messages are flashing messages displayed to alert the user that a particular condition exists/existed on the system.
Alert messages must be accepted, as shown in diagram above. This will remove the message and silence the buzzer.
When the alert accept option is selected, all alert messages which are currently displayed are accepted (removed).
If the condition that caused the alert message still exists, a steady warning message will remain on the display until the
condition indicated no longer exists.
Entry to the ALERT ACCEPT option is not logged but acceptance of any alert message is logged along with the identity
of the user.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Accept All Alerts
8 - 81
menu
Function:
EDIT TIME COMMANDS
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
This menu allows you to edit the execution times of automatic time commands.
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT
Key in new time
command (24-hour
EDIT TIME COMMANDS
0 2 : 00
/[ SUNDAY HOUR ]
Press
Press
*
*
YES
to backspace.
to move forward.
#
24 : 00
Display shows next time
command
/[LOG DUMP]:%
#
24 : 00
/[AREA 1 10M WA
24 : 00
/[AREA 32 10M WA
24 : 00
/[FULL SET 10M
24 : 00
/[L.W. AREA1 WA
24 : 00
/[L.W. AREA 32 WA
24 : 00
/[HUA TEST SAT
24 : 00
/[L.W. FULL SET
24 : 00
/[SIA TEST CALL
TO
TO
FINISHED
System then prompts you to
print time commands
PRINT TIME COMMANDS ?
NO
YES
PRINTING...
Display returns to Date & Time.
8 - 82
SHIFT
*
Additional Information
An automatic time command is a programmed
command string which instructs the 3GS to execute a
function at a pre-set time. For example, the system could
be instructed to automatically FULL set at 18:00.
Modification of these commands is normally performed
using the “Literal Edit” function and should only be
undertaken by experienced installers. This mode is a
simplified “time command edit” function which allows
the user to modify the TIME at which the action will
occur without allowing alteration of the command. The
new time must be valid (24-hour format) or the
procedure will not continue. After adjustment is made
the ENTER key should be pressed to program the new
time into the system.
Movement forward and backward through the time
strings is provided by the UNSET and PART keys.
SUNDAY HOUR
Checks for Hour change on Sundays.
LOG DUMP
Sets dial-out variable for system to dial a remote PC/
Printer.
AREA 1 10M WARN to AREA 32 10M WARN
Automatic arming commands for Areas 1 to 32.
These commands (one for each block) start a 10-minute
warning time (to inform people that they must leave the
building) after which time the relevant area will arm. Half
way through the 10min warning time the keypad buzzer
pattern will change to indicate 5 minutes left. At the end
of this time the area will set/arm automatically.
cancelled by unsetting/disarming the area within this 10
minute warning time.
BATTERY TEST
This command sets a time (1 per day) at which an
automatic battery test will be carried out.
FULL SET 10M WARN
Automatic arming command for the full system. Works in
the same way as the Area 10-minute Warning but in this
case the full system will arm.
Late working time commands
These commands allow for late working on the premises.
They will arm the system/area if the first arming time
command is cancelled. These are:
L.W. AREA1 WARN to L.W. AREA32 WARN
L.W. FULL SET WARN
For example AREA1 10M WARN may be set/armed to
7pm and the L.W. AREA1 WARN set/armed to 9pm.
Normally the first time command would arm the area 1
at 7pm. However, if the user cancels the first time
command so that he/she may work late then the first
time command is ignored and the system will be armed
by the second time command at 9pm.
Late working time commands should only be used for
areas that have to be set/armed by a certain time.
SIA TEST CALL
Sets a time at which the DM1200 will send SIA messages
to the Central Station receiver to ensure line integrity.
The standard Automatic Set time command can be
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Edit Time Commands
8 - 83
menu
Function:
INHIBIT MODE
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
This menu allows you to temporarily isolate troublesome zones/doors, which
may be preventing the system from setting. It is important to be aware that
zones/doors which are inhibited will only report a Tamper or Discon state i.e.
Open and Closed states are ignored.
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
NO
INHIBIT MODE
ZONES
UNSET
DOORS
HELP
UNSET
INHIBIT FROM
1
INHIBIT FROM
#
If inhibited zones exist
ZONE NUMBER _ _ _
INHIBIT TO
HELP
1
#
n INHIBITS
#
1
DOOR NUMBER _ _ _
#
n INHIBITS
Display returns to Date & Time.
To Clear Zone Inhibits
CLEAR ALL INHIBITS
YES
CLEARED
Back to inhibit zones
Display returns to Date & Time.
To Clear Door Inhibits
CLEAR ALL INHIBITS
?
NO
8 - 84
DOOR NUMBER _ _ _
INHIBIT TO
ZONE NUMBER _ _ _
1
?
NO
YES
CLEARED
Back to inhibit doors
NO
Additional Information
Inhibiting
Inhibiting a zone/door prevents openings and closings
having an effect on the system. If zones/doors have been
inhibited, on selection of FULL set mode, a message will
indicate how many are inhibited.
Selection of this option is logged by the system and an
asterisk appears beside the log entry to indicate the zone/
door has been inhibited manually (zone/door may also
be inhibited via literal commands). The identity of the
user to select the option is also logged.
Clear Inhibits
To clear inhibits, re-enter Inhibit Mode using the installer
code followed by the NO key. You are prompted to
select zones/doors. Once selected the message “CLEAR
ALL INHIBITS?” will appear in the display. Press YES to
clear the inhibited zones/doors. Press NO to inhibit more
zones/doors. Inhibits are automatically removed after
performing an unset/disarm from FULL SET mode.
Note Zones/doors can only be inhibited when the Inhibit
attribute has been set to YES.
The INHIBIT function can be re-entered any number of
times to inhibit more zones/doors, existing inhibited
zones/doors will not be affected.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Inhibit Mode
8 - 85
8 - 86
9
USER GUIDE
In this chapter
■
Introduction. ............................................... 9-1
■
3GS System keypad/display ........................ 9-2
■
Menu options ............................................. 9-3
■
Navigating the Help menu .......................... 9-4
■
Unset/Reset menu ...................................... 9-5
■
Accept All Alerts.......................................... 9-6
■
Part Set/Unset Individual Area..................... 9-7
■
Half set/Set Individual Area ........................ 9-8
■
Full Set ....................................................... 9-9
■
Unable to Set.............................................. 9-10
■
Setting an Individual Area ........................... 9-11
■
Unsetting an Individual Area ....................... 9-12
■
Coded Reset ............................................... 9-13
■
Set Date & Time.......................................... 9-14
■
Change your own ID................................... 9-15
■
User Setup.................................................. 9-16
■
Area Setup ................................................. 9-19
■
Radio PA Assign .......................................... 9-20
■
System Logs................................................ 9-22
■
Radio PA Test .............................................. 9-23
■
3GS Access Control .................................... 9-24
■
Setup Cards................................................ 9-25
■
Passing and Voiding Cards .......................... 9-27
■
Card Information ........................................ 9-29
■
Manual Door Control.................................. 9-30
■
Hour Adjust ................................................ 9-31
■
Edit Time Commands .................................. 9-32
■
Inhibit Zones/Doors .................................... 9-33
■
User Option Assignments............................ 9-34
■
Area Descriptions........................................ 9-35
■
User Area Assignments ............................... 9-36
■
Typing text .................................................. 9-38
■
Index .......................................................... 9-39
Company Web Site address: www.europlex.com
Europlex Technologies [Ireland] Ltd.
Europlex Technologies [UK] Ltd.
Clonshaugh Industrial Estate, Clonshaugh, Dublin Unit 11, Malmesbury Business Park, Malmesbury
17, Ireland.
SN16 9JU, Wiltshire, England.
Tel: +353 - 1 - 2500500
Fax: +353 - 1 - 25005901
Tel: +44 - 1666 - 825430
Fax: +44 - 1666 - 824423
e-mail: [email protected]
e-mail: [email protected]
Europlex Technologies [USA] Ltd.
Europlex Technologies [Canada] Inc.
Suite 106, 1700 Enterprise Way, SE Marietta, GA Unit 6, 70 Dynamic Drive, Scarborough,
30067, USA
Ontario, M1V 2N2, Canada.
Tel: +1 - 770 - 426 - 9787
Fax: +1 - 770 - 426 - 9790
Tel: +1 - 416 - 754 - 4313
Fax: +1 - 416 - 754 - 8992
e-mail: [email protected]
e-mail: [email protected]
WARNING
While this system is an advanced design integrated security system, it does not offer guaranteed protection against
burglary, fire or other emergency. Any alarm system, whether commercial or domestic, is subject to compromise or
failure to warn for a variety of reasons.
Therefore, good installation practices, thorough testing and regular maintenance by the installing company and
frequent testing by the user are essential to ensure continuous satisfactory operation of the system. It is recommended
that the installation company offer a maintenance program and instruct the user with the correct procedure for use and
testing of the system.
Copyright
Europlex Technologies [Ireland] Ltd. (hereby referred to as Europlex) 1999. All rights reserved. No part of this
publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer
language in any form or by any means electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual or otherwise
without the prior written permission of Europlex.
Disclaimer
Europlex make no representations or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaim any
implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose. Further Europlex reserve the right to revise
this publication and to make changes from time to time in the contents hereof without the obligation of Europlex to
notify any person of any such revision.
3GS Version 5.00: 3GS User Guide - Issue 01 - 2000. Manual Code 6086. January 2000.
CONTENTS
Introduction
1
3GS System Keypad/Display
2
Menu options
3
Navigating the Help Menu
4
Unset/Reset
5
Accept all Alerts
6
Part Set/Unset Individual Area
7
Half Set/Set Individual Area
8
Full Set
9
Unable to Set
10
Setting an Individual Area
11
Unsetting an Individual area
12
Coded Reset
13
Set Date & Time
14
Change your own ID
15
User Setup
16
Area Setup
19
Radio PA Assign
20
System Logs
22
Radio PA Test
23
3GS Access Control
24
Setup Cards
25
Passing and Voiding Cards
27
Card Information
29
Manual Door Control
30
Hour Adjust
31
Edit Time Commands
32
Inhibit Zones/Doors
33
User Option Assignments
34
Area Descriptions
35
User Area Assignments
36
Typing Text
38
Index
39
INTRODUCTION
This manual is intended as a quick reference User Guide for the 3GS System.
User Menu
The User Menu, by which the user programs the system, is accessed via the keypad by keying in your User Code plus
the option key Help:
This will allow you to choose one of the menu options available.
Display
The 3GS system has a two line by 24 character LCD display e.g.
When you are navigating through the Help menu:
●
The first line shows the option
●
The second line shows how to directly select the option without using the Help function.
Alert Messages
When in normal operation, the system will display the day, date and time on the first line of the display. The second
line will flash any recent system events or information (such as a fault with one of the fuses or battery, or an alarm
condition).
If the condition continues, e.g. Battery Problem, the message displays steadily instead of flashing. This message will
continue to display until you remove the message. [See page 9-6: Accept All Alerts].
If the system is in Full Set/Full Arm mode [see page 9-9: Full Set], the message will display steadily and the buzzer will
also sound.
Pressing the
key will give information on the areas/zones affected.
These messages can be removed from the display (and the buzzer silenced) using the Alert Accept procedure.
Keypad Private Mode
The 3GS is designed to allow only one user at a time to operate the system.
If the display shows:
when you attempt to use the keypad, this means that a user is
operating the system at another keypad. Wait until the system is free before attempting to use the keypad again.
Year 2000
All 3GS systems are Year 2000-compliant.
Alarm Duress Code
3GS has an in-built Alarm Duress Code feature, which allow you to trigger a silent Duress alarm by simply keying in the
first 3 digits of your code, and then the fourth digit plus 1. For example, if your code is 1234, then by keying in 1235
you will trigger a Duress alarm, which will not display on the panel and will not sound an alarm, but will send a trigger
directly to your central security station.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Introduction
9-1
3GS SYSTEM KEYPAD/DISPLAY
9-2
MENU OPTIONS
The system is programmed using the Help menu options:
In sequence, you can use these menus to:
●
Disarm the system and reset all warning devices
●
Remove system display messages and silence the buzzer
●
Part set the system and Unset/Disarm an area
●
Half set the system and Set/Arm an area
●
Full set the system
●
Reset the system following an alarm
●
Set the system date and time
●
Change existing user codes
●
Set up new users
●
Set up a new area system
●
View system log
●
●
Adjust the system for summer / winter hour change (daylight saving
time)
Isolate a troublesome zone that is, for example, preventing the
system from arming
All of these options are accessed by entering your CODE followed by the
HELP key.
Your installer will have configured your own unique CODE, which will
allow you to display and scroll through the options available to you.
An option is selected by pressing the YES key
.
Use the UNSET key to move to the next option
Use the PART key to move back
To exit without selecting an option, use the NO key
Note Only options which have been assigned to a user are displayed. The
Master user will have all options.
Once the help routine is entered a selection must be made within 90
seconds, otherwise the system will exit from this menu.
Note The hash button
Issue 01 Feb 2000
acts as an ENTER key for the keypad.
Menu options
9-3
NAVIGATING THE HELP MENU
To navigate the Help menu options use the UNSET, PART, YES, NO,
Their functions are explained below.
9-4
keys.
UNSET/RESET
Unsetting/Disarming the System
Select the Unset/Reset option to disarm the system when you enter the
premises, or to cancel alarms, bells etc. after an alarm activation.
This will put the 3GS into Unset/Disarm mode (i.e. normal daytime
operation). The system alarm outputs (buzzers etc.) which had been
activated are reset to normal.
After an Alarm Activation
After an alarm activation proceed directly to the control panel enter the
code and press Unset.
The display will show:
Followed by:
followed by the cause of the alarm, i.e. which zone has been opened.
Example:
Alarm alert message:
Zone alert message:
These messages will be flashing.
To clear flashing (Alert) messages follow "Accept All Alerts"
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Unset/Reset
9-5
ACCEPT ALL ALERTS
Alert messages are flashing messages displayed to alert the user that a
particular condition exists/existed on the system.
Accepting the alert will remove the message and silence the buzzer. When
the Alert accept option is selected, all alert messages which are currently
displayed are accepted (removed).
If the condition that caused the alert message still exists, a steady warning
message will remain on the display until the condition indicated no longer
exists.
ALERT ACCEPT is logged along with the identity of the user.
Some examples of Alert Messages
9-6
PART SET/UNSET INDIVIDUAL AREA
Your system will be set up as either:
●
●
a standard alarm system with one alarm area, or
a multi-area system, with up to 32 separate alarm areas
within one.
A standard alarm system is set/armed using the Part, Half, and
Full procedures.
The Part and Half options are used to unset/disarm and set/
arm individual areas within the multi-area system.
Part Set
With a standard alarm system, you can isolate particular areas
of the premises and set/arm these areas independently of the
rest of the system.
Part Set allows you to protect the perimeter of a premises
while allowing free movement through the exit and access area
(e.g. from door, hall).
This would typically apply to the day or evening operation of
the system when people are on the premises and using the
common exit. There is free access to the areas being used while
the rest of the building is armed.
There are no entry or exit times associated with this mode and protection is applied instantly.
The display remains blank and will only change to show alert and warning messages.
If selected while entering the building while the entry timer is running, the entry mode is cancelled and the buzzer is
silenced.
●
If selected by mistake refer to “Unset/Reset”.
●
If unable to set/arm refer to “Unable to Set”.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Part Set/Unset Individual Area
9-7
HALF SET/SET INDIVIDUAL AREA
HALF Set is used to provide full perimeter protection (including
exits) when people are on the premises and all exits are locked,
i.e. late working operation.
This mode immediately arms the perimeter and the Exit zones,
i.e. no exit timer applies.
If selected when entering the building, the entry mode is
cancelled and the buzzer is silenced.
●
If selected by mistake refer to “Unset/Reset”.
●
If unable to set/arm refer to “Unable to Set”.
9-8
FULL SET
This option will set/arm the entire system. Ensure that all zones
(doors, windows, etc.) which are not on the exit/entry route
are closed.
Exit Sequence
Enter your user code and press FULL. Leave via the exit route.
The buzzer will stop at the end of the exit time and the system
will fully set/arm.
The buzzer will sound during the exit routine. At the end of
the exit time, if all zones are closed, the buzzer will stop. The
system will then become Fully Set/Armed if:
1
the exit time expires, or
2
the ‘exit terminator’ button is pressed.
If a zone is still open, the system will wait indefinitely for a
clear condition, then set/arm when the zone is closed.
During the exit period the buzzer will sound with one of two
possible tones, a long beep indicates that all zones are closed
and that the system will set/arm correctly when the exit time
expires; a short beep indicates that one or more zones are
open and the system will not SET/ARM until all these zones
have closed.
Multi-Area system configuration
In a multi-area system, Full Set has the effect of setting/arming
all areas plus the Common Area.
Alarm on exit
If the user strays from the exit route a local alarm will be
generated, tripping internal/external bells.
Action to take:
●
Return to control panel;
●
Select ‘UNSET’ [See page 9-5: After An Alarm Activation].
●
Remove alert messages [See page 9-6: Accept All Alerts].
●
Reselect “Full Set” and exit the premises.
Entry Sequence
When you enter the building, the system will be Fully Set/
Armed. The entry buzzer sounds and the entry timer begins. This gives you a specific number of seconds in which to go
to the keypad and Unset/Disarm the system. Otherwise a full alarm is generated along with the alert message “CODE
ENTRY TIMEOUT”. In this case repeat the Unset/Disarm procedure to silence the alarm.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Full Set
9-9
UNABLE TO SET
If attempts to Part, Half, Area or Full Set the system fail, the system buzzer briefly sounds and the display briefly shows:
This is normally due to an zone or door being open away from the exit route.
Note The system will display which zones are open. In an multi-area system, the display does not indicate which zones
are open until you press the
key.
For example:
Action to take:
●
Go to the Area concerned and close the zone(s).
●
Return to the keypad and reselect the required ‘set/arm’ mode.
●
Leave via the exit route.
The system buzzer will stop when:
1.
The Exit time expires or
2
When the ‘exit terminator’ button is pressed (if fitted).
9 - 10
SETTING AN INDIVIDUAL AREA
In an Multi-Area system, the whole premises may be divided into up to 32 separate alarm areas, which can be set/
armed and unset/disarmed independently of each other.
Note Please ensure that the Master User has given you the Part/Area Unset and Half/Area Set options, and that the areas
have been assigned to you. [See page 9-6: Accept All Alerts].
Setting an area
The installer or Master User will tell you which areas have been assigned to you, and you will be able to set/arm or
unset/disarm these areas only.
To set/arm an area, key in your Code plus HALF.
The display will prompt you to set/arm the area you are now leaving
Press
or
Press
to abort the procedure.
The display will show
to set/arm this area.
the exit buzzer begins and you can now leave the area.
Multi-Area Setting
Please consult your installer on setting more than one area.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Setting an Individual Area
9 - 11
UNSETTING AN INDIVIDUAL AREA
Unsetting/Disarming an area
Unsetting/disarming areas is similar to setting/arming areas, except that the PART key is used. You will be able to unset/
disarm only those areas that have been assigned to you.
Key in your Code plus PART.
The display will give you the option to unset/disarm the area:
To unset/disarm area 1, press
Press
or
to abort the procedure.
The display will show
followed by
Note Please ensure that the Master User has given you the Part/Area Unset and Half/Area Set options, and that the areas
have been assigned to you. [See page 9-16 and 9-19: User Setup and Area Setup].
Areas and Full Set
The Full Set option operates in an multi-area system in the same way as in a standard alarm system. Keying in your
code plus FULL will arm all areas and begin the exit timer.
Note To Full Set the system (all areas) you must be assigned the option by the Master User.
Common Area
The Multi-Area system consists of up to 32 Alarm areas plus a Common Area (usually the entrance/exit lobby or front
door).
The Common Area sets/arms and unsets/disarms automatically:
●
When all the other areas are set/armed, the Common Area automatically sets/arms.
●
When one area is unset/disarmed, the Common Area automatically unsets/disarms.
9 - 12
CODED RESET
Under normal conditions, the system can only be re-armed (after an alarm activation) following a service/installation
company visit.
When an alarm has occurred the display will show a CALL SERVICE message and the user will not be able to re-arm the
system.
When enabled, the Coded Reset option allows you to re-arm the system, avoiding the need to call an installer to the
site.
When you have acknowledged an alarm, the keypad will continue to display the message:
If you attempt to re-arm the system, the keypad will beep, and then briefly display the message:
You should now contact the Security Control Station for a release code. If the Security Control Station is unable to give
you a release code, contact your installer.
User Reset Procedure
Select Coded Reset.
The display will show a random 4-digit number.
Contact the Control Security Station with this random number.
The Central Station operator then converts this number to a 4-digit return code
acceptable to the system.
When you receive your return code from the Central Station operator, return to the keypad, and press the
key.
The display will prompt you to enter the return code:
Key it in at the prompt. If the code is incorrect, the display will show:
When you have keyed in the correct code, the display will show:
You can now re-arm the system by selecting Full Set.
Note All users who have the FULL SET option will automatically be assigned the Coded Reset option. [See page 9-16:
User Setup].
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Coded Reset
9 - 13
SET DATE & TIME
The time is set in 24-hour clock notation.
To adjust the time for the Summer/Winter hour
change (Daylight Saving Time), [See page 9-31:
Hour Adjust Option].
9 - 14
CHANGE YOUR OWN ID
This option allows the user to change the
ID code normally assigned to them by the
Master User.
When the option is selected, the user is
prompted to enter a new 4-digit code. To
avoid duplicate codes, a second choice of
code is requested.
Once both codes have been entered the
system will either reject or accept the
user’s choice. If rejected the user must
repeat the procedure and enter two new
codes. If accepted, the system will assign
one of them (chosen at random) and will
indicate which code is to be used.
This option is cancelled after use so each
user has only one opportunity to change
their own code. The Master user may, of
course, grant the option again if required.
Once chosen the code is completely
private.
Remember the two codes you have
entered! The one chosen by the system as
your new code will be indicated by either
‘1’ or ‘2’.
Once changed, test your code to ensure
that the system has accepted it. In not,
consult your Master User or installer.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Change your own ID
9 - 15
USER SETUP
This menu is used to set up new users on the system, entering their names and assigning
ID codes and options.
Changing User ID Codes
This option allows the Master User (user 2) to change individual ID codes for all
other system users (3 - 126).
Note User ID codes must be 4 digits in length.
The new ID code is accepted and functioning as soon as you enter it.
Press
at the user number prompt to exit the ID codes menu
when finished.
You should now give the user the required options.
9 - 16
Changing User Options:
The Master User can assign the following menu options to all users. Some
options are linked to other functions, so that assigning an option to a user may
automatically give the user other options as well.
●
Unset/Reset (also Accept All Alerts)
●
Part Set / Area Unset/Disarm
●
Half Set / Area Set/Arm
●
Full Set (also Coded Reset)
●
Set Date/Time
●
Change ID
●
User Setup (also Setup Areas and Radio PA Assign)
●
System Log (also Test Radio PA, Setup Cards, Card Information and
Manual Door Control)
●
Hour Adjust
●
Edit Time Commands
●
Inhibit Mode
Any user can be assigned some or all of these options. The Master User has all
of these options by default.
Note By default, User 1 is the installer and User 2 is the Master User.
Note The User Options menu also features Mode 5/6/7/8/9 options. These
options are for installer use only and cannot be accessed.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
User Setup
9 - 17
Changing User Names
This feature is used to enter individual user names into the system.
Text is entered via the keypad using the procedure described in Typing Text, but it
is recommended that this be carried out by the installer.
9 - 18
AREA SETUP
The Area Setup menu allows a Master User to assign areas to the system users (3 to
126).
NoteThe option to set/arm or unset/disarm an area is configured by the Master User in
the User Setup menu.
The number of areas to be used in the system is configured by the installer, – the
Master User assigns areas to users.
NoteUser descriptions and PIN codes are set up in the User Setup menu.
The system currently allows for up to 32 areas. The Master User enters the number
of the user to whom the area is to be assigned, and then scrolls through each area in
turn, assigning or denying that area to that user.
NoteTo be able to set/arm or unset/disarm an area, the user must be given:
the Part/Area Unset and Half/Area Set options,
and the Set and Unset option for that area,
using the User Setup menu.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Area Setup
9 - 19
RADIO PA ASSIGN
3GS allows for up to 126 3-button Radio Hold-Up handsets. This option is used to setup Radio PA (RPA) units for use
on a 3GS system. Each RPA unit must be given a system ID number and a description (optional), and can be assigned
up to five different functions, for example, SUSPICION, RAID etc.
Adding a new RPA to the system
When you key in your code plus SHIFT SHIFT *, the display will show:
Press
to enter the RPAs menu. The display will show:
In this example we will add RPA 3 to the system, so use the
shows:
key to scroll forward until the display
Now press any button on the RPA
The display will now show:
where the 10-digit number is the serial number
encoded into the unit at the factory. This unit has now been entered into the system as RPA 3.
Press
to return to the RPA menu.
Giving the RPA unit a Description
At the prompt
press the
key to enter the Descriptions menu.
The display will show
followed by:
Key in the number of the unit to which you want to give a description (e.g. 3) and press the
9 - 20
key.
The display will show:
The first character will be flashing, and you can now enter a
description.
When finished, press the
key, ensuring that the cursor is in the vertical position as described in Typing Text.
Setting the RPA Options
The RPA unit has no options assigned by default, and so must be set up for use with the Radio HUA system. The unit
can be assigned five different functions:
●
RAID
●
DELAYED RAID
●
RAID CANCEL
●
SUSPICION
●
PHOTO ENTRY
Each function will be explained by the installer and is activated by pressing a combination of the three buttons on the
unit. The button combinations are also set up by the installer and will be explained by him.
To assign options to the RPA Unit, press
to enter the Options menu.
The display will show:
Enter the number of the RPA unit to which you want to assign options e.g. RPA 3, which now has the description
‘Security 1’.
The display will show
Assign the RAID option to this unit by pressing YES.
Use the NO key to deny the option and the UNSET key to move to the next option.
When finished assigning options, press the
key to return you to the main RPA
Number prompt.
To return to the main menu, press
When you press NO, again, you will be prompted
If you
have a printer connected to the 3GS controller you can now print off the RPA options you have just configured.
Press
Issue 01 Feb 2000
to exit the menu and return to the normal display.
Radio PA Assign
9 - 21
SYSTEM LOGS
The 3GS alarm log is a record of all system activity
(keypad input, status alerts, alarm activations etc.)
and this may be viewed or printed if a hard-copy is
required. The detail and length of the log provides an
invaluable record of the system operation for both
fault finding and alarm analysis.
The alarm log is 1000 events long (the Access Log is
3000 events) and each event is detailed with exact
date and time to the nearest second. System events
are displayed chronologically with the most recent
events appearing first.
The alarm log gives 4 details for each event, which
are appear on the display in sequence:
●
●
●
●
the date and time of the event;
the user name or zone number (e.g. Master
User);
the user number or zone description (e.g. User 2
Selected);
and the action taken (e.g. System Log)
Alarm and Access Logs
3GS gives 2 types of log: the standard Alarm Log,
which displays all the system events (as described
here); and the Access Log, which displays only
Access Control-related events, such as Invalid Card
Entry, Door Forced, and Time Zone Setup. The
Access Log should be viewed using 3GS+.
Printing the Alarm and Access
Logs
When the option "PRINT LOG?" is displayed, if a
serial printer is connected and the serial port
correctly configured, a print-out of the log can be
generated by selecting the YES key. Otherwise, any other key should be pressed and the log will be displayed.
Viewing the Alarm and Access Logs
The log display can be stepped through quickly one line at a time by pressing the
key. The "*" appears in the
centre of the date & time display to make the log easily differentiable from the Stand-by/Unset/Disarm mode display.
The date and time remain visible in the display until all information regarding that particular event has been shown.
The PART SET key will ‘rewind’ one entry at a time to the first entry of the date currently being displayed, the UNSET
key will skip to the next entry. To leave the system log at any point in the record, press the NO key.
9 - 22
RADIO PA TEST
This option allows you to test each RPA unit in turn to ensure that the functions are correctly configured.
The system buzzer will sound intermittently to indicate that the test is in progress.
The display will show
followed by
Your installer will give a list of the button combinations for each option. When you press a button or combination of
buttons, the display will show the option assigned to that button and the field strength of the signal.
For example, if RAID has been assigned to the right (green) button, press this button. The display will show:
If the right (green) button has not been assigned to this function, the display will show
indicating the button that you have just pressed.
Note NOTE: Some units may not show the percentage value.
Using the list given to you by the installer, go through each option in turn, ensuring that the right button combination
gives you the right option.
When finished, press
Press
to exit. The display will prompt:
to confirm.
When the RPA battery is low..
When the RPA battery level is low, the test information will not appear on the display.
Instead, the display will show
Replace the battery.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Radio PA Test
9 - 23
3GS ACCESS CONTROL
3GS can control up to 64 doors with internal and external readers, and 10,000 cards/tokens per system.
Access Control Readers
A variety of reader types are supported:
PIN code, magnetic stripe cards, proximity cards, ‘hands-free’ cards or a combination of card and PIN
code.
LED displays
Card readers may display a variety of LED indications:
Setting the system using access cards
3GS allows for cards to control setting/arming and unsetting/disarming of the complete alarm
system, or parts of it (i.e. areas). Please consult your 3GS installer for details.
●
●
●
Unset/Disarm inside the door: If the area is set/armed, then when a card with this
function is presented to the entry reader, the user is granted access to the door. When the
door is opened it will start the entry timer. This allows the cardholder to unset/disarm the
system by presenting the card to the exit reader.
Unset/Disarm outside the door: If the area is set/armed, then when a card with this function is swiped on the
entry reader, the user is granted access to the door. When the door is opened it will unset/disarm the system or
area immediately.
Set: If the area is unset/disarmed, then the cardholder can set/arm the area/system by presenting the card to the
exit reader and then presenting it to the entry reader during the FUNCTON ENABLE TIME. Alternatively the
cardholder can use the SET button to set/arm the area/system after pressing the card to the exit reader.
Note Please consult with your installer before operating these functions
Asset Protection
3GS Access Control can also be configured to protect assets (such as PCs). By locating tokens placed inside the asset,
and fitting ‘hands-free’ readers at doors. 3GS can be set up to report the illegal removal of the assets. Please consult
your installer for details.
3GS allows for visitor cards, holidays, a multitude of access levels, anti-passback, car park control, roll call of building
occupants and much more. Consult your 3GS installer for more details.
9 - 24
SETUP CARDS
3GS has a capacity of up to 10,000 access cards. This menu will set up the cards for use with the system.
Note The 3GS panel menus for cards are similar to those of 3GS+ Software. The card settings entered into the panel
can be uploaded to the PC and vice versa. Using 3GS+ to change access cards settings is recommended.
Cards.. Assign
To pass cards into the 3GS system, they must be given a card
ID between 1 and 9999.
SET UP CARDS
CARDS OPTIONS PASS/VOID
Unset .. Half ..
Help
This menu allows you to assign IDs to cards in 2 ways:
UNSET
●
Select. Batches of cards with pre-coded numbers of
between 1 and 9999 can be passed directly into the
system and given corresponding system IDs. the first card
of the batch becomes Card ID 1, the second becomes
Card ID 2, etc.
UNSET
LEARN
UNSET
SELECT
HELP
UNSET
PROG. FROM DOOR 1
Door 1
Learn. The card to be passed is of unknown origin and
the pre-encoded number is not known. In this case the
card is presented at a card reader, assigned to a system
door, and then given a system ID.
HELP
ASSIGN
UNSET
In effect, this gives you 1-to-1 mapping, automatically
assigning IDs to cards.
●
HALF
Identify the door at which you are
setting up the card. This frees all
other doors on the system for
normal use
ENTER CARD ID 1
CARD 1
Select the beginning and end of
the range of pre-programmed
cards to be mapped into the system.
FROM CARD _
1
Card 1
#
TO CARD _
9999
Card 9999
You will be prompted if the ID has already been assigned,
in which case you can over-write the existing card, or
choose the next available ID.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
By default, the display is
CARD 1 ->
CARD 1
NOT ASSIGNED
Card 1 of this range has now been given
ID no. 1, Card 2: Id no. 2 etc.
Setup Cards
9 - 25
Cards.. Options
The Options menu is used to assign a PIN code to one or a range of cards, and to restore the settings of cards that have
been deleted from the system.
When an invalid PIN code has been entered three times, the card to which the code is attached will be deleted from
the system.
The Restore menu will restore this card to the system without the need to set the card up again.
See the menu below.
9 - 26
PASSING AND VOIDING CARDS
Once a Card ID has been assigned, the card can then be passed into the system.
Card Range
Enter the range of cards to be passed, from 1 to 9999. To pass a single card, enter the
card number and press the
key twice.
Once the card(s) has been passed, you will be prompted for the Access level for this/
these cards.
Change Access Level?
Change Access Levels ?
Not Assigned
NO
/
YES
Enter Access Level No. 1
#
#
current
assignment
An Access level is a combination of a limited time period and a group of doors, so that
once applied to a card, it will limit the card user to having access to certain doors at
certain times only. Up to 250 Access levels are programmed by the installer, who will
indicate which levels should be assigned to which cards. When you have assigned an
Access level, you are prompted for the Visitor Level.
Change Visitor Level?
Change Visitor Level ?
Not Assigned
NO
/
#
YES
Enter Visitor Level No. 1
#
current
assignment
The Visitor Level is used to program temporary cards, which will only be valid for a certain period of time (between a
given Start Date and End Date). The system allows for up to 250 different Visitor levels, which are programmed by the
installer. Once assigned, you are then prompted for a Function level.
Change Function Level?
Function levels give the user the ability to set/arm and unset/disarm an Area by presenting a card to a reader outside
the Area entrance door. A Function level will give a card 3 extra capabilities: to unset/disarm an area from the outside,
to unset/disarm an area from inside, and to set/arm an area once you have left (by swiping your card at a reader near
the exit door). Up to 250 Function levels are programmed by the installer. When you have assigned a function level,
you are prompted to change the PIN code requirement for the card.
Note Please consult your installer on the correct procedure for setting/arming or unsetting/disarming the system using
your card.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Passing and Voiding Cards
9 - 27
Change Requirement
Change PIN requirement?
PIN code not required
YES
PIN Code required: YES
Yes/No
#
NO
/
Change PIN Code ?
Not Assigned
#
YES
NO
Current PIN code: ****
New PIN code:
#
This option allows you to decide if a card should also require a PIN code before it will grant access through a door. It
also allows you to change the existing PIN code for the card or create a new one.
Note The user should be aware that the PIN code created using this option will apply to all the cards being passed at
this stage
Once a PIN code requirement has been assigned, you will be prompted to identify the card location.
Change Card Location?
Change Card Location?
Card inside perimeter
NO
/
YES
Card inside perimeter YES
(Yes/No)
#
#
When passing the card, you must establish where the card actually is at the time of passing. The Roll Call and AntiPassback functions allow the installer to identify which cards are in use in the system at any given time, and to control
the use of cards within the system. This menu will identify the card as being inside or outside the alarm area when
passed. When all the system cards can be located at any time, they can be tracked and controlled effectively. When
you have assigned the card a location status, press the
key to return to the main menu.
Voiding Cards
SET UP CARDS
The Void Cards option is used when you have a set of cards that you want to be removed
from the system.
Voiding a card removes all the card’s settings from the system, from system ID to access/
function/visitor levels.
CARDS OPTIONS PASS/VOID
Unset .. Half ..
Help
UNSET
HALF
HELP
PASS CARDS
Exiting the
Setup Cards
menu
?
NO
YES
VOID CARDS
Press
?
to exit the Setup Cards menu.
YES
FROM CARD NO 1
The display will show:
Key in the first card number in
the range, and press
#
TO CARD NO 15
If you have a printer connected to the controller serial port, you can now print out the
card settings you have just configured.
Key in the last card number in
the range, and press :
#
Press
9 - 28
to print and
to exit the menu.
To void a single card, enter a
range of, say, 2 to 2
CARD INFORMATION
The Card Information menu allows you to test the validity of a card and check that the
card settings that you have configured have been entered into the system.
Select the menu option. When the prompt
appears, swipe
the card or present it to the reader.
The display will then give details of the card ID, site code (which is configured by the
installer) and door at which the card is being presented.
Note When a card is presented, the display may not always show the card number.
If the display does not show any information about the card, present the card to the reader
again.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Card Information
9 - 29
MANUAL DOOR CONTROL
The Manual Door Control feature gives
the user a manual over-ride on all system
door settings.
MANUAL DOOR CONTROL
At any stage, the user can use this menu to
open/lock a door or series of doors.
OPEN
Unset
Once you have selected your doors, the
system will check for Lock/Open Inhibits
operating on these doors [See page 8-39:
Door Configure]. If none have been set,
the doors can be opened/locked via the
keypad.
The Open menu allows you to open a range
of doors permanently - i.e. the door will
remain open until you manually restore the
original door settings, or momentarily - you
can open one door for the number of
seconds for which the door lock would
normally remain open once access has
been granted [See page 8-42: Door
Configure - Timers].
When you select Permanent, you are
prompted to enter the range of door
numbers you wish to open. Enter the From
and To ranges. When the Permanent
condition is set on a door, the green LED
(access granted) on the node will flash. This
allows free access through the doors
selected until restored or locked.
UNSET
RESTORE
Part
HELP
HALF
PERMANENT
Unset
LOCK
Help
MOMENTARY
Help
HELP
ENTER DOOR NO. 1
Door 1
#
FROM DOOR NO. 1
Door 1
#
Select the range
of doors to be
permanently
opened / restored
TO DOOR NO. 64
Door 64
#
Return to sub-menu
The Momentary sub-menu will ask you for the number of the door you wish to open momentarily. Again, enter the
number. The green LED will light steadily while access is granted.
Restore restores all door settings to their defaults. Enter the range of doors to be restored and press
to accept
and quit. Once defaults have been restored, the system is in normal operation and no LEDs are lit.
The Lock menu works similarly to Open. When the Lock is manually set on a door, the card reader attached to the
door will not read or accept any cards. When the door is locked in this way, the red LED flashes to indicate access
denied.
9 - 30
HOUR ADJUST
This option adjusts the system clock to automatically take account
of the Summer / Winter time change (Daylight Saving Time).
It must be selected during the week prior to the Sunday on which
the hour change is to occur at 2.00am.
A warning message is displayed until the function is executed “Hour Change Sunday”.
The system will automatically set the hour forward or back as
appropriate.
The option toggles on and off – you cancel the hour change by
selecting it again.
Note Hour Adjust should only be selected during March/April and
October.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Hour Adjust
9 - 31
EDIT TIME COMMANDS
An automatic time command is a programmed command string which instructs the
3GS to execute a function at a pre-set time. For example, the system could be
instructed to automatically Full set the premises at 18:00.
Certain time commands are for installer use only, as indicated below. The other
commands are for Master User use.
This mode is a simplified "time command edit" function which allows the Master
User to modify the TIME at which the action will occur without allowing alteration
of the command.
The new time must be valid (24-hour format) or the procedure will not continue.
After adjustment is made the
key should be pressed to program the new
time into the system.
Movement forward and backward through the time strings is provided by the
UNSET and PART keys.
SUNDAY HOUR
Checks for Hour change on Sundays. Installer user only.
LOG DUMP
Sets dial-out variable for system to dial a remote PC/Printer. Installer user only.
AREA 1 10M WARN to AREA 8 10M WARN
Automatic arming commands for Areas 1 to 8.
These commands (one for each block) start a 10-minute warning time (to inform
people that they must leave the building) after which time the relevant area will
arm.
BATTERY TEST
This command sets a time (1 per day) at which an automatic battery test will be
carried out. Installer user only.
FULL SET 10M WARN
Automatic arming command for the full system. Works in the same way as the
Area 10-minute Warning but in this case the full system will arm.
Late working time commands
These commands allow for late working on the premises. They will arm the system/
area if the first arming time command is cancelled. These are:
L.W. AREA1 WARN to L.W. AREA32 WARN
L.W. FULL SET WARN
E.g. AREA1 10M WARN may be set to 7pm and the L.W. AREA1 WARN set to
9pm. Normally the first time command would arm the area 1 at 7pm. However, if
the user cancels the first time command in order so that he/she may work late then
the first time command is ignored and the system will be armed by the second
time command at 9pm.
SIA TEST CALL
Sets a communication parameter. Installer use only.
9 - 32
INHIBIT ZONES/DOORS
This option is used for temporarily isolating troublesome zones (doors, windows,
movement detectors, etc.) which may be preventing the system from setting.
Zones/doors may be inhibited singly or in blocks.
Note The problem zone/door will be indicated on the display, e.g. Zone 3 Tamper,
Door 4 Open. Inhibit Mode provides two identical sub-menus, for zones and doors.
Use the appropriate sub-menu to implement the inhibit.
If zones/doors have been inhibited, on selection of FULL set mode, a message
will indicate how many are inhibited.
Selection of this option is logged by the system and an asterisk appears beside
the log entry to indicate the zone has been inhibited manually (zone may also
be inhibited via literal commands). The identity of the user to select the option
is also logged.
Operation
Having entered the user CODE and then pressed the NO key, the display will
read "INHIBIT FROM 1". Enter the number of the first zone to be inhibited
followed by
. The next displayed message is "INHIBIT TO 1".
Enter the number of the last zone in the block to be inhibited. This will be the
same as the first zone if only one zone is required. After the second parameter
has been entered the display will show "n INHIBITS" where n is the number of
zones/doors inhibited) and the buzzer will sound briefly before returning to
UNSET mode displaying the date and time.
The INHIBIT function can be re-entered any number of times to inhibit more
zones/doors, existing inhibited zones/doors will not be affected.
Clear Inhibits
To clear inhibits, re-enter Inhibit Mode using the engineer code followed by the
NO key. The message "CLEAR ALL INHIBITS?" will appear in the display. Press
YES to clear the inhibited zones. Press NO to inhibit more zones or to view
those zones which are already inhibited.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Inhibit Zones/Doors
9 - 33
USER OPTION ASSIGNMENTS
Use these tables to record the options that have been assigned to the system users.
User User Name (max. 24 characters)
No.
9 - 34
AREA DESCRIPTIONS
Use these tables to record the descriptions of the areas on your system.
Area no.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Area Description (max. 24 characters)
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Area Descriptions
9 - 35
USER AREA ASSIGNMENTS
Use this table to record the assignment of areas to users.
User name (max. 24 characters) User no.
9 - 36
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
User name (max. 24 characters) User no.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
User Area Assignments
9 - 37
TYPING TEXT
This is a function normally carried out by the 3GS Installer. Ensure your 3GS system is configured with full text
descriptions for all alarm zones, areas, alarm users and access card holders before it is handed over.
Installer
Keypad
Overlay
9 - 38
INDEX
Numerics
32-Area system 19
32-area v. standard alarm
system 7
3GS+ software 25
A
Accept All Alerts 5
Accept all alerts
how to 6
Access level 27
Adding a new RPA to
the system 20
Alarm on exit
procedure 9
Alarm v. Access logs 22
Alert messages 1, 6
Area setup 19
Assigning IDs to cards 25
Assigning user options 17
B
Battery
for RPA unit 23
C
Call Service display 13
Card
Function level 27
Location 28
PIN code requirement 28
Range 27
Visitor level 27
voiding 28
Card information 29
Cards
Access level 27
Assign 25
Options 26
Change ID 15
Changing PIN code for a card 28
Changing user ID codes 16
Changing user names 18
Changing user options 17
Clearing zone inhibits 33
Coded Reset 13
Common Area 12
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Index
9 - 39
D
Default codes 17
Door control, manual 30
Door Open menu 30
Door, inhibiting a 33
E
Edit Time Commands 32
Entry 9
Entry sequence 9
Entry/Entry Sequence 9
Exit sequence 9
F
Full Set 9
Function level 27
H
Half Set 8
Help menu 3
HOUR 31
Hour Adjust 31
I
Inhibit mode 33
L
LCD display 1
Learn cards procedure 25
LED functions 2
Locating a card on the system 28
Lock/Open Inhibits 30
Log, system 22
M
Manual door control 30
Menu options 3
N
Navigating the Help menu 4
Not Selected 7, 8, 9
P
Part Set 7
Passing Cards 27
Perimeter protection 8
Permanent/Momentary door open 30
Printing the Log 22
Printing the log 22
R
Radio PA Assign 20
9 - 40
Radio PA Test 23
Radio PA Unit 20
Removing alert messages 1
Restore door menu 30
RPA unit
battery low 23
RPA unit descritpions 20
RPA unit options 21
S
Select cards procedure 25
Setting all areas 12
Setting areas 11
Setting date and time 14
Setting the system 9
Setup Cards 25
Site code 29
Summer/Winter hour change 31
System date and time 14
System Keypad 2
System Log 22
T
Testing the Radio PA units 23
Text entry 38
Typing text 38
U
Unable to set the system 10
Unset /Reset 5
Unsetting an area 12
Unsetting the system 5
User ID codes 16
User names 18
User Option Assignments 34
User reset procedure 13
User Setup 16
V
Viewing the log 22
Visitor level 27
Voiding Cards 28
Y
Year 2000 14
and 3GS systems 14
Z
Zone, inhibiting a 33
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Index
9 - 41
9 - 42
3GS PERIPHERAL DEVICES
ABOUT THIS SECTION
The Communications section describes the communication components of the 3GS system.
It is divided into the following chapters:
Communications
●
Serial port wiring details, for connection to a PC, modem and other comms devices.
Peripheral Devices
●
Self activating bell.
●
Hand held terminal.
Appendices
Technical Specifications
10
HAND-HELD TERMINAL
In this chapter
■
Overview..................................... 10-1
■
Main menu .................................. 10-3
- RKD emulation
- Data buffer function
- Utilities mode
HHT OVERVIEW
The infra-red hand held terminal (HHT) is a compact,
battery operated device for use with the 3GS system.
You use the HHT to communicate with the nodes on the
system and to extract information such as input and
output status, voltage and current draw, Ringnet
communications status and so on. You can also use the
HHT to emulate an RKD node in order to program the
system (via either the infra-red link or over a direct
Parallel Port
connect link to the controller serial port.)
The HHT filesaver (or Panel Data Buffer) facility allows
you to transfer a complete system configuration to or
from a panel or PC.
Serial Port
Hand-Held Terminal
25-Way D Type
Parallel Cable
9-Way D type
Serial Cable
(female plug both ends)
Parallel Printer
3GS Controller
PC or Laptop
Issue 01 Feb 2000
HHT Overview
10 - 1
Infra-red port communication
Battery save feature
Note the following guidelines for effective infra-red data
transmission between the HHT IR port and node IR port:
When operational, if there is no key input within a 180
second period, the unit will automatically power down.
If, however, infra-red data transmission is active, it will
override the power-down feature and the HHT will
continue to operate for up to ten minutes.
●
●
●
●
The maximum distance between devices should not
exceed ten metres.
For optimum performance, IR ports should not be
facing more than 30 degrees away from the direct
signal path.
If there are two nodes close to each other you can
lock on to one or the other by holding the HHT
closer to the required node.
Ensure that there is no physical obstruction between
both devices.
e
30°
Max. Operational Angle
30°
30°
30°
Parallel printer connection
In addition to its infra-red capabilities the (HHT) can be
connected directly to the 3GS controller as indicated
below. This configuration enables the HHT to behave as
a filesaver allowing full up and downloading of files.
Having the HHT connected in this way introduces a
parallel port into the system. A parallel printer can now
be connected to the parallel port on the HHT using a
standard 25-way D Type parallel printer cable, for
downloading log information and so on. In addition, the
configuration also allows for RKD emulation.
Serial connection
When the HHT is operating in RKD emulation mode you
can choose between infra-red link and serial link. If you
are using the HHT filesaver function, only a serial link
may be used. Two 9-way D type female connectors are
wired as shown below (cable supplied by Europlex).
HHT
Connector 2
9-Way D type
Female
Connector 1
9-Way D type
Female
Max. 1.5M
Powering the HHT
When mobile, the unit is powered by four 1.5V alkaline
long-life batteries. These will provide a typical battery life
of 60 hours. On power-up the display indicates the
battery power status (OK/Low).
If a separate power source is available, you can connect
a 9-12VDC power supply to the HHT’s jack socket.
Pin 1 is the cable screen braid
1
1
2
3
3
2
4
6
5
5
6
4
7
8
8
7
9
Pin 9 is not connected
9
The following diagram shows how the HHT can be
connected by either a parallel port or serial port:
10 - 2
MAIN MENU
Power-up
Modes of operation
To turn on the HHT, press the # button for at least one
second. A number of status messages will be displayed,
after which you will be requested to enter a 6-digit
passcode (the default is 123456).
The main menu provides three modes of operation:
Incorrect code entered
●
RKD Emulation
●
Data Buffer (Filesaver)
●
Utilities
Display messages guide you through the menu structure.
The keys you will be using within any mode are: UNSET,
PART, YES, NO, HELP and # (ENTER).
If you enter an incorrect code you will have the option of
re-loading the default settings; in this case any
information stored in memory will be lost. If you do not
require the code function, you may remove it from
within the Utilities menu.
You can press the HELP key at any stage to exit to the
previous menu.
To turn on Hand-Held Terminal press #
for 1 second. Display shows:
DATA TERMINAL
. . . © EUROPLEX 1995 . . .
BIOS V2.0
S/W V2.0
21 JULY 1995
21 JULY 1995
512K FLASH BATTERY OK
S - PORT = 2400 EVEN 8 1
TEST VERSION
USER NAME DISPLAYED HERE
<
ENTER Code . . . . .
Enter default code 123456
and press
#
ENTER Code ? ? ? ? ? ?
INCORRECT TRY AGAIN !
UNSET
Scroll forward through a menu
PART
Scroll back through a menu
HELP
To exit a menu/exit to power down
YES
To accept an option
NO
To reject an option
#
To accept data
SELECT : RKD EMULATION
>>
<<
?
EXIT
YES
RKD
YES
Data
YES
Utilities
UNSET
SELECT : DATA BUFFER
>>
<<
?
EXIT
UNSET
SELECT :
UTILITIES
>>
<<
?
EXIT
UNSET
To exit and power down
press until display shows:
HELP
POWER DOWN !
ARE YOU SURE ? (Y/N)
Press
YES
to power down unit.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Main Menu
10 - 3
RKD Emulation Mode
Press the NO key to enter RKD emulation mode. The
HHT will now operate as an RKD node on the system.
The RKD Emulation mode allows you to control,
program and interrogate the 3GS system in the same
manner as an RKD node. You can do this either remotely
using the IR link or directly by connecting a cable
between serial port 1 on the 3GS Controller and the
HHT serial port.
If the HHT infra-red link is broken for more than 30
seconds, the unit will exit emulation mode and return to
the “RKD via IR Data Link” menu option.
RKD via serial port
The following options are available:
●
RKD via IR Data Link?
●
RKD via Serial Port
As described previously, a serial connection can be made
between the Controller and HHT. The default
communications protocol for both devices is set as:
RKD via IR data link?
After selecting this option, point the HHT at the IR node
port. The HHT will make ten attempts to initialise
communications and if unsuccessful will display the
message “Failed to find a node”. When communications
are established with a node, the node’s autonomous
menu structure is displayed. You can view the menu by
scrolling using the UNSET and PART keys. You can toggle
the node’s output state by pressing the # key.
RKD
●
baud rate: 2400
●
parity: Even
●
data bits: 8
●
stop bits: 1
To change these settings press the NO key. [See page 109: Utilities Mode - Serial Port]. When communications
have been established, the HHT will emulate an RKD.
Point the HHT at the node to
initialse remote communication.
Press
RKD VIA :
>>
<<
IR DATA LINK ?
EXIT
Press
RKD EMULATION IR MODE
. . . POINT AT NODE . . .
YES
UNSET
NO
to enter RKD emulation mode:
to activate
infra-red data
link.
1
2
MON 24JUL95 15:15:20
FAILED TO FIND A NODE !
System messages will
appear on HHT display,
Press
RKD VIA :
SERIAL PORT
?
>>
<<
EXIT
UNSET
NODE 1
LID TAMPER
YES
to activate
If serial link is not successful:
direct connect
RKD VIA :
SERIAL PORT
?
serial link.
LOOKING FOR PANEL !
PANEL NOT ON-LINE !
S-PORT = 2400 EVEN 8 1 ?
RKD functions may now be
performed using the HHT
(option selecton/programming
LOST CONTACT WITH NODE
HELP
Menu of node the HHT is currently communicating
with (in this case an I/O node) is displayed - press
the UNSET key to scroll through.
I/O
V02
Input Analog
Resistance Value
Input Number
Zone Number
Exit Emulation Mode & Power Down
Routine:
To exit emulation mode and
power down the unit proceed
as follows:
1
8I/1O
10JUL95
TAMPER OK
FUSE OKAY
0000000032
002
1 2
12 . 7 V
100mA
I 01 = 2109
Z9
-C
I 02 = 2179
Z10
-C
Input State
UNSET
PART
to scroll
forward/back
through node
menu.
Output number
#
+
*
RKD VIA :
IR DATA LINK ?
>>
<<
EXIT
Press
HELP
until display shows:
I 03 = 2144
Z11
-C
I 04 = 2179
Z12
-C
I 05 = 2144
Z13
-C
I 06 = 2182
Z14
-C
I 07 = 2144
Z15
-C
I 08 = 2182
Z16
-C
Output State
Output type (1-255)
assigned to output
Press the following
keys simultaneously:
01=ON
8
Press
POWER DOWN !
ARE YOU SURE ? (Y/N)
Press
YES
to power down unit.
Alternatively, if the IR link is broken
for more than 30 seconds, the
HHT will exit emulation mode and
display the following message:
#
to toggle output.
01=OFF
8
LOST CONTACT WITH NODE
Followed by:
RKD VIA :
IR DATA LINK ?
>>
<<
EXIT
to exit, go to
10 - 4
2
After a further 180 seconds of
keypad inactivity, the HHT will
automatically power down.
Data Buffer (Filesaver) mode
Data
P.D.B. CHECKING FILES
Display shows (briefly):
ALL FILES OK !
8 FILES (320K) FREE
P.D.B.:
>>
FILE MANAGER
?
<<
EXIT
YES
UNSET
P.D.B.:
>>
FILE UPLOAD
?
<<
EXIT
YES
UNSET
P.D.B.:
>>
FILE DOWNLOAD
?
<<
EXIT
UNSET
UNSET
UNSET
FILE UPLOAD FROM :
P.C. ?
3 FILES (320K) FREE
DELETE FILE ?
UNSET
FILE DOWNLOAD TO:
PANEL ?
Prints to
parrallel
printer
3 FILES (320K) FREE
PRINT FILE ?
FILE UPLOAD FROM :
PANEL ?
YES
UNSET
Delete
UNSET
Up
FILE UPLOAD FROM :
DM1200 ?
UNSET
FILE DOWNLOAD TO :
P.C. ?
List
3 FILES (320K) FREE
LIST FILES ?
UNSET
Down
UNSET
FILE UPLOAD FROM :
PRINTER PORT ?
FILE DOWNLOAD TO:
DM1200 ?
UNSET
UNSET
The Data Buffer (Filesaver) mode allows you manage and
transfer 3GS literal files. You can store up to eight system
configuration files in the unit. You can download these
files at a later stage to a PC running Panelman, to a
parallel printer or to a DM1200 digital communicator.
File Upload?
The following sub-options are available:
●
Note In this mode, you must transfer data via a serial
connection rather than via IR comms.
The following options are available:
●
File Upload
●
File Download
●
File Manager
Issue 01 Feb 2000
●
●
Panel? Use this option to upload a system’s
configuration (zone descriptions/types, variable
settings, literal file changes, and so on) in file format
for later restoration (for example, after a cold start) or
for transfer to a PC.
PC? Use this option to upload a Panelman file via
the PC serial port.
DM1200? Use this option to upload literals 387/388/
389 from the DM1200. These literals are stored in
the DM1200’s EEPROM and contain digital
Main Menu
10 - 5
communicator/modem set-up data such as
telephone or account numbers.
●
●
Printer Port? This option allows the HHT to capture
data sent by the controller (via serial port) as if it
were sending it to a printer. Typically this could be
the system log.
File Download?
Use this option to download a stored file to the
Controller, a PC or DM1200.
Delete
File Manager?
To delete individual files...
The following sub-options are available:
●
Delete Files? Use this option to delete files
individually or as a group. Note that codes are only
stored in one location at any one time. If you select
the Wipe Codes option when performing an upload,
all codes (including default codes) will be removed
from the 3GS Controller. Therefore, before a
download is performed, the HHT is storing the only
file containing these codes. It is important to
consider this before deleting a file.
3 FILES (320K) FREE
SELECT DELETE FILE ?
List Files. Use this option to view the number of
stored files and see the file size in kilobytes. The file’s
name and origin are also displayed if programmed.
Press the YES key to view the contents of a log
printout. Press the UNSET key to increase scroll
speed.
DELETE FILE 1 ?
DESCRIPTIONS 0.9K
To scroll through files press:
1 DESCRIPTIONS 0.9K
DELETE FILE 2
ARE YOU SURE ?
2 PRINTOUT 46.5K
YES
YES
4
FULL UPLOAD 12K
THE BANK CENTRE
DELETING FILE 2
FILE DELETED OK!
SOFTWARE VERSION:
3GS 200 V1.X 10 AUG 1995
returns to previous menu
LITERAL VERSION: LIT 3
3GS 200 AUG 95
●
_ _ _ _ _ _ _SYSTEM LOG_ _ _ _ _ _ _
___________________
UNSET
UNSET
THURS 14 SEPT95 16:05:36 USER 1
PAUL BYRNE SELECTED SYSTEM LOG
Press
log.
UNSET
●
to scroll faster through
THUR 14 SEPT95 08:15:55 USER 3
ANN KELLY ACCEPTED ALL ALERTS
7 EMPTY FILE 0.0K
THUR 14 SEPT95 08:15:40 USER 3
ANN KELLY SELECTED UNSET
UNSET
WED 13 SEPT95 18:30:20 USER 1
PAUL BYRNE SELECTED FULL SET
8 EMPTY FILE 0.0K
WED 13 SEPT95 12:05:36
ID SECURITY ALERT
UNSET
HELP
Etc....
To exit the log.
10 - 6
DELETE ALL FILES !
VERIFY ERASE...
INSTALLATION : POST OFFICE HQ
DATE:
THUR 14 SEPT95 16:06:00 USER 2
6 EMPTY FILE 0.0K
DELETE ALL FILES !
CHECKING FILE AREA 123K
_________________ ___
UNSET
5 PANELMAN 10.3K
3GS CONTROLLER UPLOAD + CODES
YES
YES
UNSET
UNSET
YES
DELETE ALL FILES !
ARE YOU SURE ?
When file to be deleted
is displayed, press:
NORMAL UPLOAD 4.7K
CITY CENTRE PLAZA
3 FILES (320K) FREE
DELETE ALL FILES ?
NO
DELETE FILE 2 ?
PRINTOUT 46.5K
3
UNSET
#
List
UNSET
To delete all files...
●
File from Panel. This option displays (flashing) the
HHT’s current serial port settings. If they do not
match the source device’s serial port settings press
the NO key. (See diagram on next page).
Node Data Function. Use this option to upload the
data relating to all nodes on the system, as follows:
node serial number, node type, node ID, number of
node inputs/outputs, software version, node status.
File Download. This option displays (flashing) the
HHT’s current serial port settings. If they do not
match the target device’s serial port settings press the
NO key. After downloading a file to the 3GS
controller you should perform a cold start. This
prevents conflict between the system’s log and the
downloaded literal file. (See diagram on next page).
Diagram
Up
FILE FROM PANEL:
S-PORT = 2400 EVEN 8 1 ?
NO
YES
3GS PANEL ON-LINE !
NORMAL UPLOAD ?
YES
UPLOAD IN PROGRESS
FILE 7
LITERAL x
UNSET
3GS PANEL ON-LINE !
FULL UPLOAD ?
(where x = literal file number)
YES
UPLOAD IN PROGRESS
READ/WIPE CODES ?
UNSET
Press
3GS PANEL ON-LINE !
DESCRIPTIONS UPLOAD ?
UNSET
UPLOAD IN PROGRESS
FILE 7
LITERAL x
YES
YES
to remove user codes from
controller and transfer to HHT.
(where x = literal files)
UPLOAD IN PROGRESS
ARE YOU SURE ?
YES
UPLOAD IN PROGRESS
FILE 7 USER OPTION x
UPLOAD IN PROGRESS
CLEARING PANEL CODES x
(where x = number of user options/codes)
UPLOAD IN PROGRESS
FILE 7 UPLOADED OK !
YES
3GS PANEL ON-LINE !
NODE DATA UPLOAD ?
Down
FILE TO PANEL:
S-PORT = 2400 EVEN 8 1 ?
NO
YES
Utilities
3GS PANEL ON-LINE !
DOWNLOAD FILE 1 ?
DESCRIPTIONS 0.9K
Press
UNSET
to scroll through files:
DOWNLOAD FILE 2 ?
PRINTOUT 46.4K
UNSET
YES
DOWNLOAD TO PANEL
FILE 2
LITERAL x
(where x = literal files)
DOWNLOAD FILE 3 ?
NORMAL UPLOAD 4.7K
UNSET
DOWNLOAD TO PANEL
FILE 2 DOWNLOADED OK!
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Main Menu
10 - 7
Utilities Mode
The Utilities? mode has the following options:
Utilities
UTILITY : SERIAL PORT
>>
<<
?
EXIT
YES
Serial
UNSET
UTILITY : PRINT SET UP
>>
<<
?
EXIT
YES
Print
YES
Code
PART
to scroll forward
UNSET
to scroll back
UNSET
UTILITY : CODE SETUP
>>
<<
?
EXIT
UNSET
UTILITY : NAME CHANGE
>>
<<
?
EXIT
YES
Name
YES
Backlit
YES
Lang
UNSET
UTILITY : BACKLIT SETUP
>>
<<
?
EXIT
UNSET
UTILITY : LANGUAGE SETUP
>>
<<
?
EXIT
UNSET
UTILITY : LOAD DEFAULT
>>
<<
UNSET
10 - 8
?
EXIT
YES
Default
HELP
to exit
YES
to acceptan option
NO
to reject an option
#
to acceptdata
●
Serial Port: Use this option to configure the HHT’s serial port for direct serial communications with other devices.
Serial
Baud Rate
Parity
S-PORT = 2400
BAUD = 2400 ?
EVEN
8
1
Stopbits
Databits
To change Baud Rate, press
until desired baud rate
is displayed on bottom line.
NO
150
Press
300
UNSET
600
YES
1200
To accept press
- the top line changes
to reflect new choice.
to leave Baud Rate
unchanged and to scroll
to next comms. setting.
2400
4800
9600
19200
S-PORT = 2400
PARITY = EVEN ?
NO
YES
8
ODD
1
EVEN
NONE
to change.
UNSET
to accept new setting.
S-PORT = 2400
DATABITS = 8 ?
EVEN
8
to leave unchanged
and to scroll to next
comms. option.
8
1
7
NO
to change.
YES
to accept new setting.
S-PORT = 2400
STOPBITS = 1 ?
●
EVEN
EVEN
UNSET to leave unchanged
8
and to scroll to next
comms. option.
1
1
2
NO
to change.
YES
to accept new setting.
UNSET to leave unchanged
and to scroll to next
comms. option.
Print Setup: Use this option to print out the current settings and parameters for the HHT. This includes: the serial
number, software version, user name, serial port settings, backlight parameters and language setup. (See diagram
below).
PRINTING SETUP ...
Check if printer is
on-line/connected:
Print
PRINTER NOT READY !!
returns to utilities menu
●
Code Setup: Use this option to change or remove the passcode required to access the HHT main menu. (See
diagram). The default code is 123456. You have three attempts to enter the correct code. After three failed
attempts you will need to reload the default setup (this will overwrite any existing files).
CHANGE CODE ?
YES
ENTER NEW CODE . . . . . .
>
>
Code
#
CODE REMOVED
VERIFY
NEW CODEOK . . . . . .
#
CODE CHANGE OK
Inconsistent code entered:
NO
REMOVE CODE ?
CODES NOT THE SAME !
YES
REMOVE CODE !
ARE YOU SURE ?
YES
CODE REMOVED OK
NO
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Main Menu
10 - 9
●
Name Change: Use this option to change, enter or edit the user’s company name and address. (See diagram
below). You place the alphabetic card over the HHT keypad and select the required letters using the Shift key
(ensure the Shift key is in the Up position before entering the next letter).
>
Name
returns to utilities menu
●
Backlit Setup: Use this option to adjust the display backlight parameters. (See diagram below). Use the UNSET
and PART keys to scroll between Level/On Time and YES/NO keys. On Time refers to the number of seconds the
backlight will remain on for once a key has been pressed. Level refers to the intensity of the display backlight.
Once the required settings are displayed on the top line, press Help to save and exit.
Backlit
BACKLIT 50% FOR 5 SECONDS
LEVEL = 50% ?
To change Backlit Level, press
until desired level (0% - 100%)
is displayed on bottom line.
NO
To accept press YES
- top line changes
to reflect new choice.
Press
UNSET
to select "On Time" (1-10 secs.).
BACKLIT 50% FOR 5 SECONDS
ON TIME = 5 ?
●
NO
to change.
YES
to accept
new setting.
UNSET
to leave unchanged
and return to
Backlit Level.
Language Setup: Use this option to load default language for setup defined markets. (See diagram below).
Lang
COUNTRY = IRELAND
IRELAND ?
UNSET
COUNTRY = IRELAND
FRANCE ?
UNSET
COUNTRY = IRELAND
GERMANY ?
UNSET
COUNTRY = IRELAND
HOLLAND ?
UNSET
COUNTRY = IRELAND
ENGLAND ?
UNSET
10 - 10
●
Load Default: Use this option to load the factory programmed default settings. (See diagram).
Default
LOAD DEFAULT SETUP ?
NO
YES
ARE YOU SURE ?
NO
LOAD DEFAULT SETUP =
IRELAND ?
YES
UNSET
LOAD DEFAULT SETUP =
GERMANY ?
YES
UNSET
LOAD DEFAULT SETUP =
FRANCE ?
YES
LOADING DEFAULT SETUP !
UNSET
LOAD DEFAULT SETUP =
HOLLAND ?
YES
UNSET
LOAD DEFAULT SETUP =
ENGLAND ?
YES
UNSET
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Main Menu
10 - 11
10 - 12
11
EUROPLEX UNIVERSAL
INTERFACE CARD (EUIC)
In this chapter
■
EUIC Overview ................................................. 11-1
■
Connecting the EUIC to the 3GS Controller ....... 11-2
■
Connecting the EUIC to the PC.......................... 11-3
■
Connecting the EUIC to the Video Multiplexer ... 11-4
■
Hardware ......................................................... 11-5
■
EUIC programming software ............................. 11-6
■
Default Setup.................................................... 11-7
EUIC OVERVIEW
The EUIC provides output mapping functions for the 3GS
Controller. The mapping feature is generally used for
controlling CCTV video multiplexers and other security
peripherals. The board is microcontroller based and has
three serial communication ports.
One serial port communicates with the 3GS Controller
(the panel port). The second and third serial ports are
called the host serial ports. The second port is used to
send a command message to an attached video
multiplexer and the third port is used to program the
EUIC via a PC.
EUIC
J1
P1
J3
PC
3GSController
The general set-up of a 3GS integrated security and
access system with the EUIC is shown in the diagram
opposite. The EUIC polls the 3GS system to determine
the states of the zones and doors and the outputs on the
system. When a zone, door or output state changes (an
event occurs) a command string code is then executed.
A command string can cause two types of actions:
1
Control devices connected to the 3GS System.
2
Send a command message to the video multiplexer.
The EUIC command string code is a simple text based
language. The PC port is used to configure and
programme the EUIC. A text based protocol is used to
communicate settings and commands to the EUIC. A
programming application for Windows 95 / 98 is
provided which simplifies programming further by
providing a windows based graphical user interface
(GUI).
Video Multiplexer
1
2
3
a Microprocessor
b Eprom
c Ram
d Battery
4
e PC Port 2 (J3)
f LED 3
g Video Port 1 (P1)
5
h LED 2
Issue 01 Feb 2000
PGM
DATA
9
CNTL
0V
J
+12V
TX
K
RX
OV
L
+12V
i Default Link (J2)
j Reset Switch
8
7
6
k Panel Port (J1)
EUIC Overview
11 - 1
CONNECTING THE EUIC TO THE 3GS CONTROLLER
The EUIC requires a 12V DC supply cable capable of
providing 200mA. This can be supplied by the power
pins on the 3GS ports 2 or 3, if no other peripherals are
attached. Otherwise the power must be supplied from
the main system power supply.
Port 2
Port 3
3GS
0V 12V TX RX 0V 12V TX
RX
To connect the EUIC to the 3GS Controller
1 Connect the serial cable to the panel port on the
EUIC using the push-on connector.
2 Select the 3GS port you want to use and set it up to
the same settings as those chosen for the panel port
on the EUIC. The EUIC Tx connection is wired to the
3GS Rx connection and the EUIC Rx connection is
wired to the 3GS Tx connection. It is suggested to use
a baud rate of 19200 as this provides the best
performance for the system.
3 Attach the serial cable to the 3GS port.
4 On power-up, LED 1 on the EUIC should flash briefly
along with LED 3.
If there are no command lines present LED 1 will go
out and LED 3 will remain on.
EUIC to 3GS Panel Port (J1)
0V 12V TX RX
11 - 2
If there are any command lines present in the EUIC,
i.e. program strings, LED 1 will continue to flash. This
indicates successful communications with the 3GS. If
communication with the 3GS was unsuccessful, LED
1 will go out.
CONNECTING THE EUIC TO THE PC
To connect the EUIC to the PC
1 Use a null modem cable with a 9 way female
termination on the EUIC end.
2 Insert the female end into Port 2 (J3) on the EUIC.
3 Ensure that the correct PC comms port is selected
and its communications settings match that of the
EUIC host port settings. Otherwise no
communications will take place between the PC and
EUIC. [See page 11-7: Default Setup].
4 Start the EUIC programming software package and
modify the PC communications settings to match that
of the EUIC host port settings.
It is suggested that these settings are left at the default
settings unless they have to be changed for interfacing
with a video multiplexer.
5 Open the comms port on the PC and press the Reset
button on the EUIC.
The software version and current settings are
displayed on the PC if communications are properly
set up.
6 If unreadable text or no text is displayed then either
the comms port is not correctly connected or the
settings are incorrect. In this case, check the
connections and retry.
If this does not resolve the problems then connect the
Default Link. This resets the EUIC comms settings for
all the ports to the default settings.
Alternately try all the different PC communications
settings until the correct setting for the EUIC is
chosen.
PC Port Connection
7
8 5 6
2 3
7
8 5 6
2 3
EUIC Port 2 (J3)
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Connecting the EUIC to the PC
11 - 3
CONNECTING THE EUIC TO THE VIDEO MULTIPLEXER
To connect the EUIC to the video multiplexer
1 Use a cable as specified in the video multiplexer
manual with a 25 way female termination on the
EUIC end.
2 Insert the female end into port 1(P1) on the EUIC.
3 Start the EUIC programming software package.
4 Open the comms port on the PC.
5 Ensure that the communications settings of the EUIC
host port match the settings specified for the video
multiplexer – otherwise no communications will take
place between the EUIC and the video multiplexer.
Remember to change the PC settings to match these.
6 Select Video Options in the Communications menu
and choose the option for the multiplexer connected
to port 1.
7 Press Reset on the EUIC as requested, to save the
video selection to the battery backed memory.
8 The EUIC software version and current settings are
displayed on the PC if communications are properly
setup.
Video Port
EUIC Port 1 (P1)
2
3
Tx
Rx
11 - 4
4
5
7
CTS Gnd
20
9 When an alarm command is executed by the EUIC it
will transmit the set alarm channel command using
the appropriate protocol to port 1. This can be
observed by a brief flash on LED 2.
10 When the event is false and the alarm has to be
cleared again the EUIC will transmit the clear alarm
channel. These transmissions will activate and clear
the alarm channels on the video multiplexer. If this is
not the case then it is likely that either the comms
port is not correctly connected or the settings are
incorrect. Check the connections and retry.
11 If this does not resolve the problem then you can
connect the Default Link, to reset the EUIC comms
settings for all the ports to the default settings. [See
page 11-7: Default Setup].
Alternately try all the different PC communications
settings until the correct setting for the EUIC is
chosen.
HARDWARE
This section describes the main hardware features of the
EUIC.
The unit requires 12V DC @ 200 mA to operate. The
command string code and the serial port set-up are saved
in non-volatile memory (i.e. battery backed-up RAM). A
reset switch (SW1) is provided to reset the unit at any
time.
Panel port
This is the standard Europlex communication port
consisting of a 4-way terminal block. The four
connections are 0V, 12V, and Tx and Rx. This connection
supplies the power for the EUIC.
The port can be set-up as follows:
Port 1 (P1 - Video Multiplexer port)
This port consists of a 25-way male D-type connector.
RS232 signal levels are used. Tx data (pin 2), Rx data (pin
3), 0v (pin 7) are used. LED 2 on this port will flash
during communication on the port. Flow control is
provided, so the RTS (pin 4) must be connected to CTS
(pin 5) if no flow control is provided by the video
multiplexer system.
Port 2 (J3 - PC port)
This port consists of a 9-way female D-type connector.
RS232 signal levels are used. Tx data (pin 3), Rx data (pin
2), 0v (pin 5) are used. LED 3 on this port will be on to
indicate that this port is operating. No flow control is
provided.
●
baud rate: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200
●
parity: even, odd or none
Default link (J2)
●
data bits: 7 or 8
●
stop bits: 1 or 2.
This is 5-way terminal block header (i.e. the terminal
block is not supplied). On power up of the unit or
following a reset, the PGM pin is checked. If PGM is
connected to 12V then the EUIC will load the default
serial port set-up, the link should be removed for normal
operation.
Note Bolded text is the default settings.
LED 1 on this port will flash during communication with
the alarm system. It is recommended to use the
maximum speed setting to optimise system performance.
Host port
The host port consists of port 1 (i.e. the video multiplexer
port) and port 2 (the PC port). That is, both port 1 and
port 2 share the same communication set-up. This port
can be set up as follows:
●
baud rate: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200
●
parity: even, odd or none
●
data bits: 7 or 8 data bits
●
stop bits: 1 or 2
This has to be set to the default setting of the video
multiplexer.
Housing
The EUIC is supplied as a PCB only. The mounting holes
and the size of the PCB are the same as the DM1200 (i.e.
the EUIC will mount in the same fixings as the DM1200).
Serial cables
No serial cables are provided with the unit, but should
be made up according to the details provided within this
chapter.
Serial cables compatible with the video multiplexer
system should be used on port 1.
If no flow control is provided on the video system then a
null modem cable must be used.
A standard null modem cable can be used on port 2 for
PC connection.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Hardware
11 - 5
EUIC PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
To install the software
Phone Number
1 The EUIC is supplied with a Windows 95/98 based
programming application. It requires a PC with a
100MHz Pentium processor and 32M of RAM or
better.
Direct to Com Port 1
2 Insert the floppy disk provided and open the
appropriate drive in Windows Explorer.
Stop bits 2
Bits per second 9600
Parity none
Flow control none.
3 Double click on setup.exe to start the installation.
4 Follow the Installshield instructions for the selection
of the destination directory and program options.
Settings Menu
5 To start the application click on the Start button,
select the Programs folder and click on
Euic_Programmer.
Emulator auto detect.
Terminal keys
Back scroll buffer lines.
6 To get information on all the EUIC hardware and
programming features select the Help option on the
main program window.
ASCII Settings sending
Hyper Terminal
Echo typed characters locally.
If Hyper Terminal is used for programming the EUIC then
the suggested settings in default mode are as follows.
ASCII Settings receiving
Send line ends with line feeds
Append line feed to incoming line ends.
Force incoming data to 7 bit ascii.
Wrap lines that exceed terminal width.
11 - 6
DEFAULT SET-UP
Setup details
Host port
This section describes the default set-up of the
communication ports. This is the set-up of the EUIC
following a default set-up load as described in the
hardware section of this chapter. The command string
code is not cleared on a default set-up load.
The Default host port settings are as follows.
Panel port
The default panel port settings are as follows.
●
●
●
●
●
baud: 19200
parity: none
data bits: 8
stop bits: 1
panel address: 1
●
baud: 9600
●
parity: none
●
databits: 8
●
stopbits: 2
Ensure that the PC comms port settings match these so
that communications between the PC and EUIC can take
place.
Since these settings are also used for the video
multiplexer communications (if applicable) they must
match the video settings as specified in the video
multiplexer users manual.
Ensure that the 3GS port settings match these so that
communications between the 3GS and EUIC can take
place.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Default Set-up
11 - 7
11 - 8
12
DM1200 DIGITAL COMMUNICATOR /
MODEM
In this chapter
■
DM1200 Overview.............. 12-1
- digital communicator operation
- modem operation
■
DM1200 Installation ........... 12-2
■
DM1200 Programming ....... 12-8
DM1200 OVERVIEW
The DM1200 is a combined 16-channel digital
communicator and 1200 baud modem.
●
●
The digital communicator monitors the 3GS
controller and reports alarm activity to a central
station(s).
The modem communicates with a remote printer or
PC running software such as Eurodial (monitoring),
Panelman (maintenance) or 3GS+ (access control).
The unit can be connected to one of the 3GS serial ports
(default = port 2) and its communication parameters
may be programmed from the 3GS keypad. For
connection details see the 3GS Communications section.
Digital Communicator Operation
The digital communicator monitors the 3GS control line
(CTRL) to determine the state of the system outputs.
Modem Operation
When the DM1200 is programmed to report to a remote
PC it reads the value stored in the panel’s modem dial
variable every two seconds.
This variable is used by the 3GS to initiate a call to a
remote PC and may be set by a time command or via a
literal. If this variable is set to 1 and there is log
information to report, the DM1200 dials the preprogrammed primary remote phone number and
establishes a connection with the remote PC. The
DM1200 disconnects the line when the remote PC hangs
up its modem.
Note Note: If the DM1200 detects a channel activating
during remote communication (with the PC or printer), it
aborts modem communication and dials the alarm central
station.
When programming the DM1200, the engineer maps
the 3GS outputs to the DM1200’s channels, which can
number up to 16 in fast format or 8 in slow format.
If an output changes state and the delay timer has timed
out, the DM1200 seizes the phone line (disconnecting
any other apparatus connected) and dials a preprogrammed number.
The appropriate signals are sent to the alarm central
station receiver, indicating the type of alarm activation.
The DM1200 will disconnect and may dial another
central station and repeat the process if so programmed.
Upon contacting the central station, the DM1200 waits
for a handshake signal from the central station receiver.
During this period the unit transmits a "comfort" tone
every two seconds.
If a remote PC dials in, the DM1200 will pick up the line
after the pre-programmed number of rings have been
detected. It will establish a "connect" with the remote
modem. At this point it allows FULL communications
with the 3GS controller if UNRESTRICTED access is
programmed.
Upon receiving the fast format handshake, it transmits
the account code associated with the dialled telephone
number and the channel information in fast format.
If CALLBACK mode is programmed, on receipt of an
incoming call the DM1200 answers, hangs up, and then
calls back the number.
When the acknowledge signal (kissoff) is received, the
DM1200 releases the line. If the receiver sends a slow
format handshake, the DM1200 will report in slow
format. If the DM1200 is unable to communicate with
the alarm central station receiver, it releases the line and
re-dials. It will dial a secondary receiver number if
programmed to do so. The DM1200 can also be
programmed to send alarm information in SIA and
CONTACT-1D formats (version 3.1 or greater).
The DM1200 also allows communication to a remote
printer. If the mode dial variable is set and there is log
information to report, it dials the pre-programmed
number and dumps to the remote printer.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Dm1200 Overview
12 - 1
DM1200 INSTALLATION
requires shunt wire connection is not permitted. The
DM1200 may cause bell tinkle. This product is BABT
approved and should carry the BABT approval label.
Power Supply
BABT Approval Compliance
The DM1200 has been approved for use of the following
facilities:
Loop Connect, Auto-calling, Auto-dialling, MF dialling,
Automatic repeat attempts, Series connection, Operation
in the absence of proceed indication, Auto-clear from
call-originating end. Any other usage will invalidate the
approval of the apparatus if as a result it then ceases to
conform to the standards against which the approval was
granted. The DM1200 is suitable for connection to any
BT PSTN circuit with loop-disconnect or multi-frequency
dialling.
Series Connection - The DM1200 has a Series Equivalent
Number (SEN) of 0.3. The SEN represents the portion of
the maximum allowable impairment which is taken up
by a series apparatus. The DM1200 has a nominal
insertion loss of 0.025dB, and a nominal series resistance
value of 195 milliohms.
Note To avoid occasional difficulties in making calls from
other apparatus connected to the telephone network via
more than one series apparatus, or problems in telephone
conversation between both parties, the total of SEN values
of all series apparatus should not approach or exceed 1.0.
If such difficulties are experienced, the user should consult
the accredited service engineer and NOT the telephone
company. An associated telephone may only be connected
via the series connection provided i.e. it should be
connected to the C and D terminals on theDM1200, NOT
in parallel with the A and B connections.
Connection of the DM1200 to a main apparatus that
12 - 2
The DM1200 operates using 12Vdc with a current
consumption in a quiescent state of 50mA and a
maximum current requirement of 100mA when active.
Use the connection directly from the PSU inside the
cabinet. Do not use the +12V from the 3GS PCB.
The 12 volt supply is monitored and a low-battery signal
is generated if the supply drops to 10.5V +/- 0.5V for
longer that 15 seconds.
Should the 12Vdc required for operation be taken from
another power source the warning below should be
adhered to.
WARNING: The DM1200 is intended for use with a
low-voltage supply of 12Volts D.C.(typically 1A psu)
which is normally derived from the 3GS PSU as shown in
the diagram opposite. The DM1200 has no user
protection against excessive supply voltages, and users
should ensure that any power supply or other equipment
used in conjunction with the DM1200 complies with the
relevant legal safety requirements when properly
assembled, installed, and maintained, and used correctly.
The DM1200 should be located and secured in its
designated position within the host panel and suitably
isolated (by stand-off bushes) from the host panel main
PCB and from any mains supply or excessive voltage
source, by a minimum clearance distance of 10mm.
PTT Line connection to PSTN
The DM1200 is connected to the PSTN at terminals A &
B (see diagram overleaf). A connection to Earth must also
be made. If it is required to connect another device to
the line (e.g. telephone) it should be connected at C and
D.
Diagram
PSU
0V
+12V
DM 1200
E
0V
+12V
CNTL
TX
RX
CNTL
3GS
RX 1
TX 2
+12V
0V
Incoming telephone line
A
B
A
Main Instrument
B
C
D
Master Socket
Issue 01 Feb 2000
PTT Line
Note :All connections to the host panel and the power supply
MUST be made before any connection to the PSTN. Connection
to the PSTN should only be made by an engineer authorised by the
telephone company, and ONLY after the DM1200 has been installed
within it’s host panel, the cover of which must be fastened to prevent
access. The DM1200 must always be installed in it’s host panel.
Failure to install the DM1200 in accordance with these instructions
will invalidate any approval given to it.
DM1200 Installation
12 - 3
Connecting a local printer
Important: The maximum distance between the
A local serial printer can be connected to the DM1200.
Data is output to the printer at TTL levels from the
DM1200 in the following format:
DM1200 and the printer should not exceed 25 metres.
Baud Rate: 1200 or 300
Connect the 25-way modem interface to the printer
interface as shown in diagram below.
Parity: EVEN
Remote Printer
Stop Bits: 1
Connect the printer using serial cable as shown in
diagram below.
DM1200 LEDs
The LEDs will indicate the operational status of the
DM1200 (see diagram below).
If the DM1200 does not operate as expected re-check
the wiring connections and your programmed
configuration.
12 - 4
Programming the DM1200
menu forward.
YES - Used to enter a menu/option or to select an option.
PREVIOUS - Moves cursor to the right or scrolls the
current menu back.
NO - Used to scroll forward through menu options, i.e.
refusing them, and to toggle between certain options.
ENTER -Used to accept current/displayed data.
QUIT - Used to exit from an option to sub-menu or from
sub-menu to root menu.
NEXT - Moves cursor to the left or scrolls the current
SHIFT/DELETE- Used to select keypad characters. Also
used to delete characters if held down for more than 1
second.
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
SHIFT
SHIFT
FULL
SET UP DM1200
Select the port to which the
DM1200 is connected
By default, port 2 is
configured for DM1200
communications protocol.
PORT 1
PORT 2
PORT 3
unset............half...........,,help
UNSET
HALF
HELP
See "Check Before
Programming”
CHECKING...
PORT 2
NO RESPONSE
DM 1200 PROGRAMMER
No key pressed
!! PRESS ANY KEY !!
KEY
Version number & Checksum displayed
VER P X.X CS YYYY
COUNTRY
ENGINEER CODE------
Incorrect code entered
INSTALLER CODE _ _ _ _
#
Default Installer code=123456
ENGINEER CODE ERROR!
0
NO
DEFAULT DM 1200?
YES
TELEPHONE NUMBERS?
YES
DIALLING OPTIONS?
YES
CHANNEL OPTIONS?
YES
FORMAT OPTIONS?
YES
LINE MONITOR OPTIONS?
YES
NO
1
NO
2
NO
3
Enter the central station numbers and
account codes. Make a test call.
Program telephone numbers for remote
PC access via modem.
Enter this option to configure the unit’s
dialling sequence, e.g. ‘Number of Call
Attempts’, ‘Inter call time’ etc.
This option allows you to assign outputs
and telephone numbers for up to 16 channels
(max 8 channels-slow format). If a channel is
not being used it should be left at its default
setting where it is assigned as output 0.
Configure Slow/Fast format or SIA options.
Also configures the test call.
NO
4
NO
OUTPUT OPTIONS?
5
YES
NO
6
SERIAL PORT SETUP?
YES
PROG ENGINEER CODE?
YES
ADVANCED OPTIONS?
YES
PRINTER?
YES
NO
7
NO
8
NO
9
Issue 01 Feb 2000
The DM 1200 offers a line monitoring facility
which can be configured to report line
failure under various conditions.
The DM 1200 has 2 on-board outputs and
may also be configured to control up to 4
panel outputs.
Use this to configure the DM 1200 to operate
with the host panel’s serial port. The message
‘COMMS OK!’ must appear on exit from this
option to ensure operation with the 3GS.
Select this option to enter a new installer code.
This option is solely intended for advanced
users with specialised applications for the
DM 1200 and therefore it should not be
necessary to enter this option for normal
operation of the unit.
Select this option to perform a print-out to
a local printer.
DM1200 Installation
12 - 5
Quick Programming for SIA Central Station
In this example the DM1200 is set up to report to a SIA central station.
TELEPHONE NUMBERS ?
W 12345678
YES
#
CENT. STAT. PHONES ?
PHONE 2 ACC1 8888
YES
"W" instructs the
DM1200 to wait for a
dial tone before dialling
the programmed
Key in primary central
station telephone number
(max 24 digits).
Key in central
station account
code (4-digits)
#
CENT. STAT. PHONE NO 1
#
PHONE 2 CS = SIA
#
W 87654321
CS PHONE NUMBER 3
#
HELP
PHONE 1 ACC1 9999
CEN. STAT. PHONES?
#
HELP
PHONE 1 ACC2
TELEPHONE NUMBERS
#
HELP
PHONE 1 CS = SIA
ARE YOU SURE?
#
CS PHONE NUMBER 2
#
12 - 6
YES
END
Quick Programming for Modem Operation
To program the DM1200 to communicate with a remote PC, simply program two phone numbers in the remote
phones option.
TELEPHONE NUMBERS ?
YES
CEN. STAT. PHONES?
NO
MAKE TEST CALL NOW?
NO
REMOTE PJONES
YES
PRIMARY PHONE?
YES
Backup number if DM 1200 fails
to contact the primary number
W 123456
#
BACKUP PHONE?
YES
W 654321
#
PRIMARY PHONE?
HELP
REMOTE PHONE?
HELP
TELEPHONE NUMBERS?
Issue 01 Feb 2000
DM1200 Installation
12 - 7
DM1200 PROGRAMMING
Before programming...
Before attempting to program the DM1200, note the
following:
●
●
●
●
Ensure the DM1200 Eprom label is version 2.2 or
greater. Older versions are not compatible with the
3GS system.
For SIA reporting ensure the DM1200 is version 3.0
or greater.
Ensure that the DM1200 connections to the 3GS
port are correct - as shown in the Communications
section.
If possible, connect the DM1200 to Port 2 of the
Controller, as port 2 defaults to the DM1200
communications protocol. If another port is used,
select SET DATA FORMAT and set the
communication protocol as follows:
●
Baud rate: 1200
●
Parity, data, stop bit: E,8,1
●
Printer: No
●
Access control: 31
●
Log filter: 32767
●
Access filter: 255
●
Dial mode: 0
DM1200 User’s Guide. There are however some
inconsistencies between the key functions shown in the
manual and the 3GS keypad.
These are outlined in the table below.
DM1200
User Guide
3GS
keypad Key Function
EQUIVALENT KEY
QUIT
HELP
Exit from an option to a sub-menu.
NEXT
UNSET
Moves the cursor to the left or
scrolls forward through a menu.
+
PREVIOUS
YES
YES
NO
NO
ENTER
SHIFT /
DELETE
To program the DM1200 to report as a "digi" and a
modem, adhere to the following:
The 3GS Controller must be configured to operate in
LOCAL communications mode (Dial Mode:0). This
allows the DM1200 to poll the 3GS Controller for
output data, log events etc. [See page 8-58: Set
Data Format].
2
If you are using Eurodial monitoring software, then
LOCAL communications mode (step 1) must be set
in two stages.
3
Program the “digi” telephone numbers, account
codes and reporting sequence. See below.
4
Program the MODEM primary and backup telephone numbers. See below.
Programming the DM1200
The flow chart examples on the following pages show
how to program a basic set up for the DM1200.
Note that the DM1200 settings shown in these examples
are based on Irish telecom default settings. The settings
you see will depend on the country default selected. To
change these settings and configure the DM1200
successfully, it is vital to be familiar with the programming
techniques and options which are explained in the
12 - 8
Moves the cursor to the right or
scrolls back through a menu.
To Enter a menu option or to select an
option.
To scroll forward through menus, i.e.
rejecting options or to toggle
between certain options.
The Enter key is used to accept data.
ENTER
Programming sequence - checklist
1
PART
SHIFT
The Shift / Delete key has a dual
function:
To select alphanumeric keypad
characters by rotating the cursor to the
required position (see "Typing Text").
To delete characters if held pressed
down for more than 1 second.
Digital communicator reporting
The DM1200 can be programmed to dial 4 separate CS
phone numbers, with 2 accounts per number. The unit
attempts to contact telephone number 1 and if
unsuccessful then calls telephone number 2 etc.
Note The two accounts per number facility is available to
split system software only.
Each line is then set to one of the following formats: SIA,
CONTACT ID, DUAL, or SLOW.The Contact ID format is
a high-speed protocol using DTMF tones, giving block
and zone information. For a more complete explanation
of Dual and Slow formats, please see the DM1200 User’s
Guide.
SIA reporting
The SIA protocol will transmit alarm events as SIA
messages. The system must be configured for SIA
Reporting using the Setup SIA menu. [See page 8-51:
Setup SIA for a description of this menu and a list of SIA
codes].
●
●
●
●
●
Max. SIA Messages Sets the maximum number of
SIA messages to be sent per call. [See page 8-51:
Setup SIA].
Single. Acc/Call Selects whether one or multiple
account codes can be transmitted on one call.
2-Digit Event Numbers In the case of a system of
100-plus zones, this option should be set to transmit
4-digit event numbers. This option is receiverdependant.
Block Modifier This is enabled if block software is
being used.
ASCII Text Enables the sending of text with event
information.
When enabled, the Wait Command will allow the
DM1200 the time to gather more event information,
while still connected to the CS.
Note The above options are dependant on the
capabilities of the CS receiver.
communication between the DM1200 and a remote PC
or printer.
After entering the DM1200 default code press YES to
“TELEPHONE NUMBERS” and press NO to “CENT STAT
NUMBERS?”. Press NO to the test call display and select
“REMOTE PHONES?” Type in primary and back up
numbers. The examples shown are:
Primary: 98765432
Back Up: 23456789
If the DM1200 default settings (shown below) are those
required by the communications software in use, exit by
pressing HELP twice. When the display prompts “ARE
YOU SURE?” press the YES key.
DM1200 Modem Default Settings
If necessary, Parity and Baud Rate may be changed in
DM1200 menu “Serial Set Up”. Dial Access may be
changed in the DM1200 menu “Telephone Numbers Remote Phone Options”. Data bits must be set at 8.
●
Parity:Even
Important SIA Reporting is available on Version 3.0 of the
Europlex DM1200 only.
●
Baud Rate: 1200
●
Data Bits: 8
Modem communication
●
Dial Access:Unrestricted
The diagram overleaf shows how to program for modem
Issue 01 Feb 2000
DM1200 Programming
12 - 9
Diagram
DM 1200
P 2.2
CS 3655
ENGINEER CODE - - - - - -
#
Enter DM1200 default code 1 2 3 4 5 6
TELEPHONE NUMBERS ?
YES
CENT. STAT. NUMBERS ?
Repeat for secondary telephone
number :
YES
"W" instructs the
DM1200 to wait for a
dial tone before dialling
the programmed
number.
Key in primary central
station telephone
number (max 24
digits).
Key in central
station account
code (4-digits)
CENT. STAT. NO 1
CENT. STAT. NO 2
#
#
W 87654321
W 12345678
#
#
PHONE 1 ACC 9999
PHONE 2 ACC
8888
#
#
CENT. STAT. NO 3
to exit
HELP
CENT. STAT. NUMBERS ?
CHANNEL NUMBER 02
DM1200 Main Menu
HELP
On the flow chart, a black
outline indicates DM1200
MAIN MENU option. TELEPHONE NUMBERS ?
#
RES
#
POS DELAY=000
#
#
PHONES 1R2. Contact phone
number 1 oR 2. Call
sequence: 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
#
NO
OUTPUT 10 PHONES 1R2
DIALLING OPTIONS ?
CHANNEL NUMBER 01.
Channel number 1 will
report to a central
station number.
#
CHANNEL OPTIONS ?
CHANNEL NUMBER 03
YES
RES: Transmit restore signal
after channel activation.
POS: Positive trigger (3GS
output turned ON viewed as
activation). DELAY = 003:
Delay before channel
reports (3 seconds).
12 - 10
Press
CHANNEL NUMBER 01
RES
HELP
POS DELAY=003
ARE YOU SURE ?
#
#
#
HELP
YES
OUTPUT 03 PHONES 1R2
#
to exit.
CHANNEL OPTIONS ?
#
#
OUTPUT 03. When this
3GS output trips (03), the
channel number (03) above
reports.
#
NO
END
#
13
INTELLIBELL
In this chapter
■
Intellibell Overview ......................... 13-1
■
IntelliBell connection diagram ......... 13-2
■
IntelliBell programming................... 13-3
■
Self-activating bell .......................... 13-5
INTELLIBELL OVERVIEW
Function
The IntelliBell (IB) has been specifically developed by
Europlex to interface with its 3GS controller. The IB
connects to the data line and monitors the state of the
control line to determine the state of its outputs.
The unit activates its piezo sirens and/or strobe when
certain pre-programmed panel outputs are triggered. A
second model of the unit is available which incorporates
a Voice Annunciator Board (VAB) and Speaker as an
alternative to the sirens. A pre-recorded message is
replayed on activation of the VAB.
The unit has one on-board zone and reports tamper
alarms, self-test failures, detected foam ingress and
drilling using this zone.
12
1
3 4
f Battery - See wiring diagram overleaf.
g Drill detect link - See wiring diagram overleaf. The
unit has a drilling detect feature whereby the presence of drilling is reported to the panel. This feature
may be enabled by removing a "detect" link and connecting a mass inertia sensor.
h Back tamper - See wiring diagram overleaf.
i End-of-lines (EOLs) - See wiring diagram overleaf
j Xenon tube and system active LED - See wiring diagram overleaf.
k Programming keys
Key Functions
key - to scroll back through a menu.
to increase a numerical value.
2
key - to move to a menu option.
to accept a numerical value.
key - to scroll forward through a menu.
to decrease a numerical value.
Note: a horizontal bar indicates
keys to be pressed simultaneously.
Press
keys - to exit from a menu.
l Data BUS - See wiring diagram overleaf. Feed all
FRN COM SKIN
TAM
LG CONT DATA - +
12V
1 ½ 2
EOL
BT
SNR - + 1 2
COM
BATTERY SIREN
1 N M L
K J 9 87 6 5
a Voice annunciator board (VAB) mounting holes The Sounder facilitates speech replay via an optional
add-on Voice Annunciator Board (VAB) and Speaker.
The speaker replaces the piezo sirens and both it
and the VAB are factory installed. The pre-recorded
message is stored in memory.
b Foam ingress detect receiver - To protect against
foam ingress, there are 2 infra-red optical beams on
the board. If both beams are broken a tamper will
be generated.
c Programming display - [See page 13-4: Programming].
d Foam ingress detect transmitters - Use with the
foam ingress detect receivers.
external cables (Data line, DC power, etc.) through
the cable entry grommet in the cabinet. Connect
Data, Control, and Ground to the IB as shown. Secondary power is supplied via a NiaCad battery pack.
Connect the battery pack leads (red: batt+, black:
batt-) after primary power has been applied. The
"System Active" LED should blink to indicate the unit
is functioning correctly.
Note A maximum of 30m of alarm cable is recommended
between 3GSController and IB. A higher specification cable
is recommended for distances greater than 30m. LEM
Ground should be connected to COM at the 3GS
Controller.
m VAB connector
n Front tamper and skin tamper - See wiring diagram
overleaf. There are two lever tamper switches on the
cabinet. If the double skin is punctured, a short
between both skins activates a tamper. An activation
of any tamper is reported to the panel using the onboard zone. Remove the lid tamper switch transit
stop. Ensure that the tamper lever makes firm contact with the wall when the unit is mounted.
e Sirens - See wiring diagram overleaf.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
IntelliBell Overview
13 - 1
EOL 1
EOL 1/2
EOL 2
B TAMP
COM
SENSOR
BATTBATT+
SIREN 1
SIREN 2
LG
CONT
DATA
0V
+12V
F-TAMPER
COM
SKIN
INTELLIBELL CONNECTION DIAGRAM
IB Unit
Drill
Detect
Disable
Link
Xenon Tube &
System Active LED
Front Tamper
(N/C)
Sirens
2K2
2K2
+
Battery
EOL Circuit
Back Tamper
(N/C)
Double Skin (N/O)
12V
}
0V
System PSU
3GS Input e.g. I1
CNTL
WARNING! High Voltage!
The conformally coated
components within the
highlighted area operate
at high voltage. Take
care not to damage the
coating on these
components.
3GS Panel
COM of 3GS Input
Programming
Event Reporting
The IB may be programmed with or without the
sounders silenced, either prior to installation or when online with a panel.
The IB will report zone state changes as they occur.
Literal Commands will decide what action to take. The IB
will report the following local events on its zone:
Prior to Installation
a Zone Tamper/Short
Connect 12Vdc and ensure that the front and back
tamper switches remain closed, the skin tampers open,
and the foam ingress detect beam uninterrupted. If it is
required to keep the sounders silenced, the control line
and LEM ground line must be connected also. Program
the IB using the programming flowchart below and
disconnect power when finished.
After Installation
If you wish to program the IB after installation, you
should assign an output to the Program Enable Output in
the Outputs menu. If this output is turned ON at the
panel before programming can begin the IB will ignore
any signal from the panel turning on sounder or strobe.
Default Settings
The factory default settings are shown below. Selecting
reset (RS) from the main menu will restore these values.
Note that when an option is set to 0 it is disabled.
Outputs
Minutes
Back tamper is open
●
Lid tamper is open
●
Skin tamper is closed
●
Drilling detected
●
Foam ingress detected
b Zone Open - due to self test
●
Strobe failure
●
Sounder failure
●
Battery failure
c Zone Discon
●
A loss of 12 Volt power supply
●
A loss of control line
Bell Test
SO
2
Sounder
ST
7
Strobe
After any IB activation or a maintenance visit by an
Installation Engineer, a Bell Test is recommended. This
will activate the IB from the control panel for a short
period of time.
TE
0
Self Test
Output Functions
PE
49
Program
SP
15
Sounder ON
BA
0
Battery Test
Both Sounder and strobe functions are enabled by
default.
13 - 2
●
There are four output functions available on the IB and
they operate as follows:
a Sounder Output (SO) - On the control panel, output
2 is the external sounder output. Setting the Sounder
Output (SO) function to 02 will cause the IB
sounder to activate when this panel output is triggered.
The Sounder Output is set as 02 by default, but this
maybe changed to any panel output if required.
b Strobe Output (ST) - On the control panel, output 7 is
the internal sounder output. In the same manner as
above, setting the Strobe Output (ST) to 07 will
cause the strobe to activate when this panel output is
triggered. The Strobe output will remain On until
reset by the panel.
c Battery Test - BA The unit will initiate a battery test
after this programmed time (range 1-90 minutes). If
the stand-by battery measures below 7.1 Vdc, a test
failure is logged in the IB log. If set as 0, the test is
disabled.
d Sounder Operation - SO The sounder ON period
may be programmed within the range of 1 to 90
minutes. It may also be disabled, whereby the
optional Voice Annunciator Board (VAB) is driven by
the alarm output.
Sounder Operation
The Sounder is switched on either by the Sounder
Output or by the IB in response to the 12 Volts supply (or
the control line) becoming disconnected. When this
happens the IB Sounder Timer starts.
●
Sounder - Sounder Output Operation
When the Sounder is switched on by the Sounder Output, the Sounder stays on until the Sounder Output is
switched off or the IB Sounder Timer expires or the
Strobe Output goes off from the on state.
If the Sounder Output is on switched again the Sounder
will not sound. The only way the sounder will come on
Issue 01 Feb 2000
again is after the Strobe Output goes off from the on
state.
●
Sounder - 12V Disconnect Operation
When the Sounder is switched on by the IB after a 12
Volts disconnect, it stays on until the IB Sounder Timer
expires or the Strobe Output goes off from the on state.
If the Sounder Timer expires, the IB goes into powerdown mode until the power is reconnected. If the 12
Volts supply is disconnected again the Sounder will not
sound.
The only way the Sounder will come on again is if the
Strobe Output goes off from the on state. Note that a
12V disconnect will cause the Sounder to sound even if
the Sounder has already completed a Sounder operation for the sounder period.
A 12 Volts disconnect is regarded as any voltage under
9.5 Volts and a 12 Volts reconnect is regarded as any
voltage above 11.5 Volts. This means that if the voltage
drops below 9.5 Volts for 5 seconds or more, then the
IB will sound for the programmed period and go into
powerdown mode until the power supply recovers to
12 Volts. The installer must ensure that when a power
supply driving the IB has a mains failure, the resulting
drop in supply voltage to the IB does not go below 10.5
Volts.
Note Disabling the sounder without a VAB installed will
configure the unit to operate without an audible alarm.
IntelliBell Connection Diagram
13 - 3
INTELLIBELL PROGRAMMING
Programming Menus
Idle mode
START
Display returns to idle mode
after 30 seconds of
programming key inactivity.
8 8
to initialise programming
Outputs
o P
1 P
Battery Test
Minutes
6 A
5 o
Sounder
5 t
Strobe
to to
decrease increase
to to
decrease increase
System Type
5 Y
Reset
r 5
0 0
Sure?
Absolutely?
3GS
Operation
3 G
Follow
Sounder
F S
Applex
Operation
A P
Follow
Alarm
F A
Sounder
Period
5 P
Sounder
Enable
5 E
Minutes
Sounder
2 0
5 o
5
Speaker
5 P
A 6
0 0
Log Messages
The IB log records system events and
may be viewed when programming
8 8 Press
to to
decrease increase
Sounder
Output
5 o
0 2
Strobe
Output
5 t
0 7
Self Test
Output
t E
0 0
Program
Enable
Output
P E
0 0
First event is then displayed (flashing)
C F
Press
= Data line control failure.
to clear and scroll through other events.
t A = Local tamper generated.
P S = Power supply failure.
b A = Battery self-test failure.
d r = Drilling Detected.
13 - 4
Strobe Operation - The Strobe Output switches on and
switches off the Strobe. By default the IB option ’Strobe
Follows Sounder’ is cleared. When the ’Strobe Follows
Sounder’ option is set by the operator, the Strobe is
controlled only by the Sounder Output.
Program Enable Output - PE A Program Enable output
must be programmed for this feature to be used. When
this output is turned "on" the IB will be fully disabled.
Typically this output would be used to allow the
Installation Engineer to attend to the IB after an alarm.
Self Test Output - TE This output function controls the
unit’s self test operation. By default it is set to 0 and
therefore disabled. When the TE output is set and
triggered by the panel, the unit will execute three
consecutive tests. The sounder, strobe and battery
circuits are tested and if nothing is reported to the panel
within 30 seconds, the engineer may conclude that the
three circuits have passed their tests.
Note This output must be switched off for the IB to return
to normal operation.
panel output is triggered. Likewise, the Strobe output will
remain ON until reset by the panel.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Reset Memory - RS The IB memory may be reset by
selecting this menu option and following the flow chart.
The process of resetting memory is made difficult to
erroneously select by requiring the engineer to press all
three programming keys simultaneously twice in
succession.
IntelliBell Programming
13 - 5
SELF-ACTIVATING BELL
To connect a Self-Activating Bell (SAB) to the 3GS system
see diagram below.
13 Shield
14 1a
15 1b
16
17
18
19
Siren
2b
0V
Back Tamper
20 0V
21 Front Tamper
22 Bell Hold Off
23 Tamper Return
24 Control Line
Tamper
SUPPLY +
SUPPLY TRIGGER
TAMPER RTN
STROBE +
STROBE BATTERY +
BATTERY -
2a
470R
+
Typical SAB
Standby
Battery
Internal
Siren
+
+
3GS PSU
25 1 NO
26 1 Com.
27 1 NC
28 2 NO
29 2 Com
30 2 NC
31 3 NO
32 3 Com
33 3 NC
34 4 NO
35 4 Com
36 4 NC
13 - 6
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
Output 4
14
NETWORK ROUTER
In this chapter
■
Network Router Overview ............... 14-1
NETWORK ROUTER OVERVIEW
Description
The Europlex RS232/422 Network Router is used to connect up to 8 3GS Panels (or any other addressable RS232 /
RS422 device) via RJ45 Slave Output connections. A PC serial port cable and 8 RJ45 to 25 pin D-Type Slave Output
Cables are provided.
Frontplate
1
Each RJ45 connection and cable has all the signals necessary to enable a 3GS to be accessed by either RS232 or
RS422. Both RS232 and RS422 devices can be connected to different ports on the same network router.
a LEDs
●
LED8 - Communications indicator channel 8
●
LED7 - Communications indicator channel 7
●
LED6 - Communications indicator channel 6
●
LED5 - Communications indicator channel 5
●
LED4 - Communications indicator channel 4
●
LED3 - Communications indicator channel 3
●
LED2 - Communications indicator channel 2
●
LED1 - Communications indicator channel 1
●
Power LED (red)
Backplate
1
2
3 4
a RS232/RS422 Slave outputs 1- 8
b RS232 Master (PC serial port)
c RS422 Master
d Power connection 12V
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Network Router Overview
14 - 1
Sample Connection Diagram
9 WAY D-TYPE TO 25 WAY D-TYPE
Master RS 232
D-TYPE 25 WAY
EUROPLEX
12V DC PSU
RS232 / 422 NETWORK ROUTER CARD
R-J45 CONNECTORS
POWER CABLE ONE SUPPLIED
WITH EACH RS232 / 422
NETWORK ROUTER
RS 232
RS 422
LDAC / MINI
LDAC
MODEM
RS 232
REMOTE
3GS
CONTROLLER
LOCAL 3GS
CONTROLLER
3GS CONTROLLER
14 - 2
Additional Information
Note See diagram on previous page for typical connection of multiple 3GS Controllers (remote and local) via the network
router to a PC.
Connecting a local or remote PC
The network router has both an RS232 and RS422 Master Input. This enables a local PC to be directly connected to
the Network Router via the RS232 Master Input. Alternatively, the Network Router can be placed up to 1.6 Kilometres
away from the controlling PC and connected via the RS422 Master Input.
To connect a local PC to the network router over RS232, a standard PC serial cable is used. This cable is provided.
To connect a remote PC over RS422 to a Network Router, a LDAC (or another Network Router) is required beside the
PC to convert to RS422.
You cannot connect both a RS232 and RS422 Master Input at the same time.
Note
Connecting the Network Router to a remote PC via a LDAC
NETWORK ROUTER
LDAC TERMINAL BLOCK
REMOTE MASTER INPUT
(RJ45)
Cable colour
PIN Number
PIN Number
Signal Name
Blue/White
1
1
A
Blue
2
2
B
Brown/White
3
B-
GND
Brown
4
2
R2 IN
Orange/White
5
3
T 1 OUT
Orange
6
B-
GND
Green/White
7
Green
8
Connecting to RS232 devices (local 3GS or via Modem)
For the wiring details on how to connect a Network Router to a modem or 3GS, see the table below.
NETWORK ROUTER SIDE (RJ45)
Channel 1- 8
PIN Number
3GS
Port 1
Port 2/Port 3
MODEM CONNECTIONS
Modem 25 Pin D-Type
Cable Colour
Blue/White
1TX Positive
Blue
2 TX Negative
Brown/White
3 0V
7 GND
0V
7 GND
Brown
4 TX
2 RX IN
RX
3 RX
Orange/White
5 RX
3 TX OUT
TX
2 TX
Orange
6 0V
7 GND
0V
7 GND
Green/White
7 RX Positive
Green
8 RX Negative
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Network Router Overview
14 - 3
Connecting to RS422 devices (remote 3GS panels)
A 3GS panel can be connected to a remote PC via placing a LDAC or Mini-LDAC close to the panel and connecting
this to the Network Router as outlined in the table below.
NETWORK ROUTER
LDAC TERMINAL BLOCK
SIDE (RJ45)
Cable colour
PIN Number
PIN Number
Signal Name
Blue/White
1TX Positive
1
A
Blue
2 TX Negative
2
B
Brown/White
3 0V
B-
GND
Brown
4 TX
2
R2 IN
Orange/White
5 RX
3
T 1 OUT
Orange
6 0V
B-
GND
Green/White
7 RX Positive
Green
8 RX Negative
The panel can now be placed up to 1.6 Kilometres from the network router, depending on the type of cable used.
Connecting multiple Network Routers
Should you wish to control more than 8 panels from one PC serial port, you can cascade multiple network routers
together by connecting any of the Slave Output Channels from one Network Router to a Master Input Channel (DType connector) of another router. Cascading four routers together allows one serial port to control up to 29 3GS
panels.
Network Router to Remote Master Input
To connect from one network router to another remote Network Router, wire as outlined in the table below.
NETWORK ROUTER 1
NETWORK ROUTER 2
SLAVE OUTPUTPUT (RJ45)
REMOTE MASTER INPUT
Cable colour
PIN Number
PIN Number
Cable colour
Blue/White
1TX Positive
7 RX Positive
Green/White
Blue
2 TX Negative
8 RX Negative
Green
Brown/White
3 0V
3 0V
Brown/White
Brown
4 TX
5 RX
Orange/White
Orange/White
5 RX
4 TX
Brown
Orange
6 0V
6 0V
Orange
Green/White
7 RX Positive
1 TX Positive
Blue/White
Green
8 RX Negative
2 TX Negative
Blue
14 - 4
Powering a Network Router.
A Network Router is powered from a 12 volt DC supply. A power cable is provided which will enable connection to
any 12 DC Europlex PSU. Each Network Router requires 700mA for proper operation. The Power LED (Red) on the
front panel is on when the unit is powered up.
Using the Network Router.
Each Network Router has 10 LEDs on the front panel. See Frontplate diagram at the start of this chapter.
STATUS:
This LED blinks when the master communicates
Power LED:
This is on once the Network is powered up.
Channel 1..8:
This LED blinks when either the master communicates or the slave responds.
Note The Network Router will not operate correctly if the slave output (3GS panels) do not have unique addresses.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Network Router Overview
14 - 5
14 - 6
3GS APPENDICES
ABOUT THIS SECTION
This section details the technical specifications of all the 3GS system components and gives an overview of the
Europlex PC products.
Technical Specifications
●
Details of all 3GS component specifications
3GS+
●
3GS Access Control Management Software
PanelMan 3GS
●
3GS Intruder Panel Manager
15
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
In this chapter
■
3GS Controller ................... 15-1
■
3Amp Power Supply ............ 15-2
■
4Amp Power Supply ............ 15-3
■
8Amp Power Supply ............ 15-4
■
RKD node ........................... 15-5
■
8 I/O node ......................... 15-6
■
6 Output node.................... 15-7
■
Intellipower node................ 15-8
■
Access Control node ........... 15-9
■
HUA node .......................... 15-10
■
LEM node ........................... 15-11
■
Encryption node.................. 15-12
■
HHT ................................... 15-13
■
EUIC................................... 15-14
■
DM 1200 ............................ 15-15
■
IntelliBell ............................ 15-16
■
Network Router .................. 15-17
3GS Controller
PCB dimensions
150mm x 246mm
Cabinet dimensions:
3GS Euro Small E- CAB - 1236
465mm length x 450mm height x 130mm depth*
3GS Euro Large E - CAB - 1237
465mm x 450mm x 130mm
Power supply
8-14V via PSU connector J4
Quiescent current
200mA
Serial port power supply
Not suitable for powering Aux devices.
Ringnet interface
RS485, 307.2K baud
Memory backup
Lithium battery
Temperature range
-10°C to +40°C
Humidity range
0% to 90% (non-condensing)
Nodes
100
On-board zones
8 dual end-of-line using 2K2 (US: 1k470) resistors
(Expandible to 200 using nodes)
Zone loop response
500mS
Zone loop current (closed)
1mA approx.
Bell tamper (BHO/TR)
Single 470R end-of-line resistor
Voltage substitution
Greater than 1V on zone and BHO/TR inputs will cause a voltage substitution
condition
Front and back tamper
Short from input to 0V will generate a tamper
On board outputs
4 x 1Amp relay
(Expandible to 255 using nodes)
Control line
12V @ 5mA max.
Used to indicate state of first 50 output types (mainly for DM1200 CNTL line
interface.
Red LED
Indicates comms traffic on ringnet
3 Serial ports
2 x TTL,1 x RS232 with RTS/CTS control
Default codes
Engineer = 1010 Master = 1020
Cabinet Dimensions
* All further dimensions will be given in this order.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
3GS Controller
15 - 1
3 Amp Power Supply Unit
PCB dimensions
170m x 90mm x 18mm
Maximum operating current
150mA
Minimum operating Voltage
9.5V DC
Outputs
2 x2 Amp form "C" relays
Accuracy
Current Readings +/- 0.1A
Voltage Readings +/- 0.1V
Inputs
15 - 2
EOL Resistor Loops 2k2 (US:1k and 470)
3 Amp Power Supply Unit
4Amp Power Supply Unit
PCB dimensions
260m x 118mm x 58mm
Input voltage
230V nominal AC rms +10% / -15%
Input voltage frequency
47-63Hz
Hold up of output voltage
20ms after loss of AC
Nominal output
13.65Vdc @ 20°C
Line regulation
+/- 1% @ 20°C
Load regulation
+/- 3% @ 20°C
Cross regulation between
outputs
+/- 3% @ 20°C
Output ripple
<0.5Vpk-pk
MTBF
100,000 hrs
Operating temperature
-10°C to +40°C
Typical efficiency
75%
Issue 01 Feb 2000
4Amp Power Supply Unit
15 - 3
8Amp Power Supply Unit
PCB dimensions
260m x 118mm x 58mm
Input voltage
230V nominal AC rms +10% / -15%
Input voltage frequency
47-63Hz
Hold up of output voltage
20ms after loss of AC
Nominal output
13.65Vdc @ 20°C
Line regulation
+/- 1% @ 20°C
Load regulation
+/- 3% @ 20°C
Cross regulation between
outputs
+/- 3% @ 20°C
Output ripple
<0.5Vpk-pk
MTBF
100,000 hrs
Operating temperature
-10°C to +40°C
Typical efficiency
75%
15 - 4
8Amp Power Supply Unit
RKD Node
PCB dimensions
122mm x 175mm x 23mm
Keypad dimensions
175mm x 120mm x 75mm
Minimum operating voltage
9.5V
Maximum operating current
300mA
Quiescent current
100mA
2 on-board zones
Dual 2K2 (US: 1k,470) end-of-line resistors
Outputs
Relay
Single pole changeover, 1 Amp
Display
2-line 48 character backlit liquid crystal display. Backlight intensity and viewing
angle are programmable.
Keypad
20 key backlit keypad
Tamper
Front and Back tamper provided, each monitored separately
Memory backup
Data stored in EEPROM and can be examined on display
Temperature range
-10°C to +40°C
Humidity range
0% to 90% (non-condensing)
Issue 01 Feb 2000
RKD Node
15 - 5
8 Input/Output Node
PCB dimensions
150mm x 82.5mm,
Enclosure dimensions
200mm x 153mm x 47mm
Minimum Operation Voltage
9.5V
Maximum Operating Current
200mA
Quiescent Current
100mA
8 on-board zones
Dual 2K2 End Of Line resistors (1K,470 R in US)
Outputs
1 relay, single pole changeover, 1 Amp
Status LED
Indicates status of communications
Tamper
Front tamper provided
Auxiliary Fuse
250mA Quick Blow 5/8" x 3/16"
Communications
RS485 at 307k2 baud, Infra Red Communications
15 - 6
8 Input/Output Node
6 Output Node
PCB dimensions
150mm x 82mm x 20mm
Enclosure dimensions
200mm x 153mm x 47mm
Min. operating voltage
9.5V
Max. operating current
200mA
Quiescent current
100mA
Outputs
6 x 1A single pole changeover relays
Status LED
Ringnet comms status
Tamper
Spring front tamper
Aux. fuse
250mA Quick-blow
Communications
RS485 at 307k2 baud, Infra-Red Communications
Memory back-up
EEPROM
Issue 01 Feb 2000
6 Output Node
15 - 7
IntelliPower Node
PCB dimensions
170mm x 90mm x 18mm
Maximum operating current
150mA
Minimum operating voltage
9.5Vdc
Outputs
2 x 1 Amp relays
Accuracy
Current Readings +/- 0.1A
Voltage Readings +/- 0.1V
Inputs
4 EOL Resistor Loops (EOL)
Outputs
2 form “C” 1Amp relays
15 - 8
IntelliPower Node
Access Control Node
General
Mains Supply
230Vac + 10% - 15%
Power Consumption (quiescent)
45mA
Power Consumption (max)
150mA
Max current drain
1A
Memory Backup
On-Board EEPROM
Cabinet Dimensions
233mm x 357mm x 80mm
Temperature Range
-10°C to +55°C
Humidity Range
0% to 90% (non-condensing)
Fuses
Lock Supply
1A
Battery
1A
Auxiliary
1A
Reader Supply
1A
On-board Zones
2 dual end of line resistors monitored
On-board Outputs
2 single-pole changeover 2A relay
Front tamper
On-board Microswitch (over-rideable)
Back tamper
Terminal Connections, normally closed
Communications
RS-485 at 307K baud and Infra-Red
Backup Power Supply
Sealed 12V lead-acid battery to 6.5 Ah
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Access Control Node
15 - 9
HUA Node
PCB dimensions
150mm x 110mm
Minimum operating voltage
9.5V
Maximum operating current
200mA
Quiescent current
100mA
4 on-board zones
Dual 2K2 (US:1k and 470) EOL resistors
Outputs
1 relay, single pole changeover, 1 Amp
Red status LED
Indicates status of ringnet communications
Green status LED
Indicates valid RF message received
Tamper
Front tamper provided
RF frequencies
418MHz version and 433MHz version
15 - 10
HUA Node
LEM Node
PCB Dimensions
150mm x 110mm x 20mm
Enclosure Dimensions
237mm x 355mm x 80mm
Power Consumption
90mA (no load)
Input Voltage
12VDC
Tamper
Front spring tamper, with override link.
Communications
RS485 at 307k2 baud, Infra-Red Communications
Issue 01 Feb 2000
LEM Node
15 - 11
Encryption Node
PCB Dimensions
150mm x 82.5mm,
Enclosure Dimensions
200mm x 153mm x 47mm
Minimum Operation Voltage
9.5V
Maximum Operating Current
200mA
Quiescent Current
100mA
8 on-board zones
Dual 2K2 (US:1k and 470) End Of Line resistors
Outputs
1 relay, single pole changeover, 1 Amp
Status LED
Indicates status of communications
Tamper
Front tamper provided
Auxiliary Fuse
250mA Quick Blow 5/8" x 3/16"
Communications
RS485 at 307k2 baud, Infra Red Communications
15 - 12
Encryption Node
Hand Held Terminal
PCB Dimensions
190mm x 135mm x 75mm
Display
2 x 24 Character Backlit LCD Display
Keypad
20-button illuminated keypad
Battery Save Feature
Unit powers down after 180 seconds of keypad activity
Serial Port
9-way Male D Connector, RS232
Printer Port
25-way female D connector
Status Indication
3 LED indicators and buzzer function
Operating Temperature
-10°C to +40°
Relative Humidity
<90%
Weight
800g (including batteries)
Power Supply
Batteries
4 x AA1.5V Alkaline long life batteries
Typical Battery Life
60hrs (2700mAH)
Auxiliary Power Jack
7 - 12VDC, 500mA
Serial Port Connector
7 - 12VDC, 500mA
Infra Red Port
Working Area Illumination
500Lux to 1500lux
Max. Operating Angle
+/- 30° in all directions
Max Operating Distance
10m (free air operating space)
Data Rate
1200 baud
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Hand Held Terminal
15 - 13
EUIC
PCB Dimensions
188mm x 128mm x 22mm
Power Supply
12V DC
Power Consumption (quiescent)
100mA
Power Consumption (max)
200mA
Memory Backup
Lithium battery
Temperature Range
-10°C to +55°C
Humidity Range
0% to 90% (non-condensing)
Communications
RS232 x 3
15 - 14
EUIC
DM1200
Supply Voltage
10.5 - 15 Vdc
Current Consumption
Stand-by 50mA, Operating100mA
Telephone Line Signalling
Programmable selection of Loop Disconnect or DTMF.
Dialling
4 phone numbers, each up to 24 digits can be specified.
2 phone numbers up to 24 digits long can be used for modem communication.
Communications Format
Dual (fast/slow) or Slow
SIA
Contact ID
Alarm Outputs
2 open collector darlington driver max. sink 250mA each. The DM1200 can be
configured to control 4 panel outputs (between 1-50).
Programming
RKD Menu-driven, or PC Literal programming.
PCB Dimensions
188mm x 122mm
Issue 01 Feb 2000
DM1200
15 - 15
Intellibell
PCB Dimensions
150mm x 118mm
Display Type
2-Digit 7-segment
Input Voltage
11.4 - 15Vdc
Stand-by Battery
8.4 Vdc
Current Consumption (at 12.5Vdc)
100mA (quiescent)
700mA (sirens on)
500mA (speaker on)
20mA (power down)
Operating Temperature
-10°C to +40°C
Humidity Range
0-95% (non-condensing)
Inputs
1 on-board zone monitored via the data line.
("Tamper","Test", "Detect" or "Control").
Outputs
4 output functions (controlled by panel outputs).
Audible Sounders
Standard version -Piezo Siren (x2).
VAB version -Speaker (12W 8ohm)
Visual Indicators
Strobe & "System Active" LED.
Test Features
Programmable Stand-by Battery test.
Sounder, Strobe, and Battery test (output controlled).
Cabinet
Dimensions
365mm x 215mm x 85mm.
Material
Inner & Outer 2mm steel skin.
Tamper Protection
Lever Microswitch (x2).
Foam Ingress Detection
Infra-red Beam (x2).
Drilling Detect
"Drill Detect" option.
15 - 16
Intellibell
Network Router
General
Power Supply
12v DC
Power Consumption
700ma
Cabinet Dimensions
280mm x 62.8mm x 218.6mm
Temperature range
-10’C to + 55’C
Humidity Range
0% to 90% (non - condensing.)
Connections
Host Input
25 pin Dtype RS232 / RS422 connection.
Slave Input
8 addressable RS232 / RS422 connections (Channel 1 -8)
Cables provided
1 by RS232 Serial cable. (9 way D-Type to 25 way D-Type).
1 by Power cable.
8 by RS232 / RS422 cables. (RJ45 to flying lead).
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Network Router
15 - 17
15 - 18
Network Router
16
PC SOFTWARE
In this chapter
■
3GS+ Overview.................. 16-1
■
Installing 3GS+ .................. 16-2
■
Installing the dongle ........... 16-3
■
Upgrading .......................... 16-4
3GS+ OVERVIEW
3GS+ Features
●
Mustering reports
●
Supports 9.999 panels
●
Control doors remotely
●
Networks 24 panels on a local network
●
Keypad simulation
Configure Cards, Doors, Door Groups, Time Zones
and Holidays
●
Intruder reporting
●
●
Graphical representation of doors, zones and
outputs
●
Upload and Download Access Control details
●
Access Log
●
Alarm reporting through maps
●
General Log
●
Backup and Purge
●
Generate reports on
●
Run archive reports
Log Events received
P.C Operator events
Card Settings
Dormant Cards
●
Roll Call
Issue 01 Feb 2000
3GS+ Overview
16 - 1
INSTALLING 3GS+
Installing 3GS+
●
●
If installing 3GS+ for the first time, run Setup.exe
from the \3GS+ ... directory on the CD. 3GS+ will
now install to your c:\ drive. Run the program using
Start.. Programs.. 3GS+.
To run 3GS+ in non Demo Mode install the HASP
Device driver.
Install Shield Screen
16 - 2
Or
●
From the HTML page click on Install 3GS+ 2.09
INSTALLING THE DONGLE
Installing the Dongle HASP Device
Driver
HASP device driver to your PC.
The coded dongle must be placed in LPT1 of the PC, and
a HASP Device Driver installed from the CD.
From the HTML start up page click on “Install Dongle
Driver”
Run or double-click on the HDD32.EXE file in the \
3GS+Dongle directory of the CD. This will install the
Note The Hasp Driver MUST be installed to run 3GS+ in
non demo mode
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Or
Installing the Dongle
16 - 3
UPGRADING
Upgrading from 3GS+ 1.17 or 1.17a to
3GS+ 2.0
Note You can only upgrade from 1.17 or 1.17a
Steps Involved
a Make a copy of the following mdb files and save
them to a new directory.
data3gs.mdb
datalog.mdb
ipanal.mdb
b Through the Control Panel uninstall 3GS+ Version
1.17 or 1.17a. Once it has been uninstalled check
that there are no files in the directory where 3GS+
1.17 was installed other than the backup directory
(3gs) if there was one.
c Install 3GS+ 2.0 (By running the setup.exe located
on the CD Refer To: Installing 3GS+). If there is a
file conflict always choose to keep original file.
16 - 4
Ignore any Access Violations and continue to load
3GS+.
d Copy over the mdb files that were saved in step 1 to
the directory where 3GS+ 2.0 has been installed
e Copy the files located on the 3GS+ CD in the directory "Upgrade 1.17 or 1.17a to 2.0" to the directory
where 3GS+2.0 has been installed. This will result in
overwriting some files so if prompted say "Yes".
f From the directory where 3GS+ 2.0 has been
installed run the program Upgrade3GS5.0.exe. It will
display a message informing the user whether the
upgrade has been successfully run.
17
PANELMAN 3GS
In this chapter
■
Panelman 3GS Overview .... 17-1
■
Panelman EXE Files ............. 17-2
■
Features ............................. 17-3
■
System Requirements .......... 17-4
■
Installation ......................... 17-5
■
Troubleshooting .................. 17-9
PANELMAN 3GS OVERVIEW
PANELMAN 3GS is designed to provide installers with a local / remote programming software program to interface with
●
●
Providing storage of installer specific applications.
●
●
Providing on-line custom software programming tools.
Panelman 3GS is designed for on-line (real time connection with a control panel), or off-line (file set-up and
Panelman 3GS communicates to the 3GS panel using a proprietary communications protocol called ESCO (Europlex
ESCO is a robust interrogation/response protocol that allows Panelman 3GS software to fully control, interrogate, and
Note ESCO is available for use by programmers to create their own communications packages with the 3GS controller.
Sub-licenses for programs utilizing ESCO commands are available.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Panelman 3GS Overview
17 - 1
PANELMAN EXE FILES
Panelman 3GS is designed to provide easy access to all programming parameters of Europlex alarm panels. The
Panelman 3GS disk contains the following three .EXE files:
PMAN.EXE
This file is the Panelman 3GS program file and should be installed on the PC hard disk. Panelman 3GS can be used online while in communication with the panel or off-line with no communications with a panel. Individual files can be set
up for specific panels or for general installation sites.
MAKE_LIT.EXE
As new hardware applications are developed, the 3GS system software will be upgraded to facilitate this. For this
reason it will be necessary to configure the Panelman 3GS program to recognise new versions of 3GS Software. You can
achieve this by running the MAKE_LIT program from the PC hard disk.
17 - 2
FEATURES
Panelman 3GS has been developed to operate exclusively with the 3GS control system. The features in this version of
Panelman 3GS are:
●
Control of up to 200 Zone Inputs, 255 Outputs, 1500 Literals.
●
Accommodates up to 126 User Codes; 24-Character (x2) display.
●
On-screen display of 3GS Status LEDs and PC emulates system buzzer.
●
System Status line and Software Information line.
●
Upload and Download functions.
●
3GS database control, configure and monitor functions. (Excluding Access Control 3GS should be used for access)
●
Print or control.
●
New MAKE_LIT programs with extra communications control.
●
Remote Communications Mode : Modem Terminal Window available, Choice of baud rate (up to 38,400), parity
type saved with installation name/number.
●
Help file and Hint information.
●
No dongle required.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Features
17 - 3
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Hardware
To run Panelman 3GS and communicate with a 3GS controller, the following hardware is a minimum requirement:
●
486 IBM Compatible PC with a minimum of 3Mb of free hard disk space available.
●
Serial Connection Leads.
●
For Remote Communication: 1 Hayes compatible modem and DM1200 Digi/modem (or second Hayes modem).
●
512K Free Memory Space (RAM).
Software
●
●
DOS: Panelman 3GS is a DOS program and requires DOS version 3.2 or higher to run.
Windows: It is not advisable to run Panelman 3GS from within a Windows environment as COM port conflict is
likely to occur.
17 - 4
INSTALLATION
To install Panelman 3GS follow these steps:
a Insert Panelman Installation disk into drive A.
b From within DOS log on to drive A.
A: ENTER
c Type INSTALL ENTER (Press any key when prompted)
The main Panelman program file PMAN.EXE and MAKE_LIT.EXE are now loaded to the PC hard disk and stored in a
directory called PMAN_3GS.
MAKELIT
Before running Panelman 3GS it is important to ensure that Panelman recognises the version of 3GS application
software in use.
If this is the first time to run Panelman 3GS with the 3GS system or if you are using a special application software you
MUST run the MAKELIT.EXE program.
The MAKELIT program generates a default literal file by extracting the data via the controllers serial port. Therefore the
PC must be directly connected to the 3GS controller port (Europlex recommend using controller port 1, as its default
communications protocol is set for Panelman 3GS).
It is also necessary to COLD START the panel before running MAKELIT. Failure to do so may cause file corruption.
Note If you wish to use controller port 2, ensure that the communications protocol has been changed to match the
Panelman default settings BEFORE you run MAKELIT - these settings are:
●
Printer: No
●
Pager: No
●
System ID: 1
●
Access Control: 31
●
Log Filter: 32767
●
Access Filter: 255
●
Dial Mode: 0
●
Baud Rate: 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200
●
Parity: Even, Odd, None
●
Data Bits: 8,7
●
Stop Bits: 1
If you proceed without running the MAKELIT program and Panelman does not recognise the literal file, the message
“No matching default format” is displayed.
To run MAKE_LIT
The INSTALL program will have copied MAKE_LIT.EXE to C:\PMAN_3GS\.
a Log on to drive C.
C: ENTER
b Type CD PMAN_3GS ENTER
C:\PMAN_3GS>
c Type MAKE_LIT ENTER
The MAKE_LIT main menu is displayed:
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Installation
17 - 5
Press ENTER to Generate Default.
A “Make Default” warning message is now displayed. Press any key to continue. The system generates a default file
and then requests a literal filename.
At the flashing cursor, enter a filename that corresponds to the application stored in the panel EPROM. For example, if
you have a proprietary bank software, you could enter the filename BANK.LIT and press ENTER. When the file is
saved, select Return to DOS.
Panelman 3GS will now operate with your panel version.
Panelman
To run Panelman 3GS follow these steps:
a Log on to drive C.
C: ENTER
b Type CD PMAN_3GS ENTER
C:\PMAN_3GS>
c Type PMAN
The Panelman 3GS Password screen is displayed:
Panelman now requires a User Number and Password to continue.
Enter the default User Number: 1 ENTER
Enter the default Password: MASTER ENTER
After a few seconds a copyright message is displayed, press any key to continue.
17 - 6
The MODE SELECT screen is displayed:
Select WORK ONLINE with Panel by pressing ENTER.
The ONLINE MODE window is displayed.
Select CONFIGURE ONLINE COMMS and press ENTER.
Use the down arrow key to select the PC com, port, IRQ, baud and parity settings (to determine the comport IRQ
select control panel settings, system menu). Select the system ID of the panel required to work with. Press F2 to save
settings and ESC to exit, then select direct or remote comms..
Press ENTER. The PC will now attempt to contact the controller.
If successful communication is established, an On Line Connection Status message appears for a short period.
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Installation
17 - 7
Note If communication has not been successful, a Retry/Abort prompt is displayed. If after a second attempt
communications are still not successful, consult the “Trouble Shooting” section in this chapter.
Once on-line to the 3GS the Panelman screen displays the MAIN MENU:
The MAIN MENU provides access to the system options (if working off line only some of these options are available).
Refer to the 3GS Panelman manual for details of all menus.
Remember - press F1 for help information when required.
17 - 8
TROUBLESHOOTING
During Program execution...
If Panelman 3GS doesn’t start-up or run correctly
●
Make sure there is enough free disk space (approx. 3M Bytes).
●
Make sure there is enough free memory (at least 512K bytes).
●
If using a Windows DOS box check if the program runs correctly in DOS mode first.
Can’t setup view / edit data in some menus when off-line or on-line
●
Run the MAKE_LIT utility to ensure you have the latest default literal file for the system you are working on.
Going on-line - direct connection...
Can’t get any response from the panel
●
Check your serial cable connection again.
●
Check your selected COM port on the PC is correct.
●
Check your control panel serial port setup is correct and matches you COM port setup.
●
Try reducing your baud rate.
When on-line you get a communication fail message
●
If you are using a Windows DOS box try reducing your baud rate or just run Panelman 3GS in DOS mode only.
●
Check that the control panel is still running.
●
Check your serial cable for loose or faulty connections.
Going on-line - remote connection....
If your modem doesn’t respond to Panelman 3GS
●
Make sure your modem is turned on.
●
Make sure you selected the correct COM port.
●
Check your serial cable connection again.
●
●
Run the Modem Terminal function in Panelman 3GS and check your modems functions as recommended by the
modems manufacture manual.
Check the modem set-up parameters in the file PMCONFIG.TXT are correct.
If your modem doesn’t go off hook to dial a number or doesn’t answer a CALLBACK from a site
●
Make sure the telephone line working ok and is connected to the modem.
●
Check the modem is setup for auto-answer.
Going on-line - remote connection...
If contact is make with the site and carrier signals are exchanged but you fail to establish a
communication link
●
Try making the call again. The telephone company routes calls differently each time you call.
●
Call a different modem site to see if the problem persists. The problem could be at the installation site end.
●
●
●
Check the baud rate and parity setup match the installation site.
●
Try disabling your modems error control, baud adjust, hardware flow control and data compression functions.
If using a DM1200 at the installation setup your modem for 11 bit asynchronous data format and for 1200 bps
telephone line speed.
After a communication link is made and Panelman 3GS is going on-line to a system a communication fails occurs
Issue 01 Feb 2000
Troubleshooting
17 - 9
●
Disable your modem software flow control (i.e. Xon/Xoff passed through the modem).
17 - 10
INDEX
Numerics
3 Amp Power Supply Unit 15-2
32-Area system 9-19
32-area v. standard alarm system 9-7
3GS Controller 15-1
3GS software 7-1
features 7-1
3GS System
variables 7-1
procedure 9-9
Alarm v. Access logs 9-22
Alert messages 7-8, 8-1, 9-1, 9-6
Anti-passback 8-40
Area Setup 8-66, 9-19
Arms Variable 8-13
ASCII Text 12-9
Assign radio PA number (HUA) 8-71
Assigning
IDs to cards 9-25
outputs 8-23
user options 9-17
zones to days 8-46
3GS+
features 16-1
installation 16-2
installing the Dongle 16-3
overview 16-1
upgrading 16-4
Automatic Set Warn Variable 8-13
AUX node terminal 2-3
3GS+ software 9-25
Auxiliary power jack (HHT) 15-13
6 Output Node 5-13
B
overview 5-1
8 Input/1 Output (I/O) Node 5-8
overview 5-1
Back tamper link 5-8
Battery 8-1
for RPA unit 9-23
low 8-31
save feature, HHT 10-2
standby 4-3
A
Accept All Alerts 8-81, 9-5
how to 9-6
Access Control (ACN) Node 5-22
cabinet 5-26
overview 5-1
Access Control Setup Examples 7-5
Access Control System 5-21
overview 5-21
Access level 8-36, 9-27
Access Log 7-3
Access System
cards 7-3
door groups 7-3
doors 7-3
time zones 7-3
Adding a new RPA to the system 9-20
Alarm cable, standard 2-3
Alarm Display Variable 8-13
Alarm Event 8-51
Alarm on exit
3GS Technical Manaul
Baud Rate 8-59
Belden 9829 cable 2-3
Bell Delay Variable 8-13
Bell Time Variable 8-13
Block Modifier 12-9
Buzzer Pattern 8-29
C
Cable types 2-3
Cabling 1-1, 1-2
Call Service display 9-13
Card Information 8-38, 9-29
Cards
access level 8-36, 9-27
assign 9-25
function level 8-36, 9-27
location 8-37, 9-28
options 9-26
INDEX
PIN code requirement 9-28
range 8-36, 9-27
stand alone operation 7-4
visitor level 8-36, 9-27
voiding 8-37, 9-28
Descriptions
node 8-7
Detector Reset Variable 8-13
Dial Access Serial Port 8-60
Dial Mode 12-8
Change
ID 9-15
PIN code for a card 9-28
user ID codes 9-16
user names 9-18
user options 9-17
serial Port 8-61
Disable Mode 8-53
Discon. value 3-4, 5-2, 5-5, 5-9, 5-17, 5-24, 525, 5-30, 5-43
DM1200
remote communication with 6-3
Upload/Download menu 10-5
Cheat feature, tamper switch 3-4
Clearing existing door settings 8-46, 8-47
Door
Clearing zone inhibits 9-33
description 8-39
open option 8-46
Code
default (HHT) 10-3
defaults (Controller) 1-2
entry time-out 8-1
Door Configure 8-39
Setup 8-40
Timers 8-42
Zones 8-43
Coded Reset 9-13
Cold Start 7-8
Door control, manual 9-30
Cold start 7-8
Door Group Setup 8-47
Command Mode 8-78
Door Open menu 9-30
Common Area 9-12
Door Open Time 8-42
variable 8-14
Door, inhibiting a 9-33
Communications 1-1
Connecting a printer 6-1
E
Contact ID 12-8
E/E Area 1-8 8-13
Controller 3-1
E/E Common Variable 8-13
cabinet 3-5
PCB 3-2
Copy 8-77
Current Limit Variable 8-13
Edit 8-77
Edit Levels Database 8-49
Edit Output Database 8-68
Edit Time Commands 8-82, 9-32
Encryption module 5-42
D
Encryption Node 5-42
Data Bits 8-59
DC substitution 3-4, 5-2, 5-5, 5-9, 5-17, 5-24,
5-25, 5-30, 5-43
Deep discharge protection
and IntelliPower node 5-19
Default 8-77
Default codes 1-2, 9-17
Delayed Raid Variable 8-13
Denied Time 8-42
3GS Technical Manaul
cabinet 5-44
overview 5-1
End of line resistors 1-2
Enter
dial command 8-60
telephone 8-60
Entry/Exit Sequence 9-9
Environmental conditions 1-2
INDEX
EUIC
overview 5-1
overview 11-1
HOUR 8-83, 9-32
Euronetwork Card 6-4
Hour Adjust 9-31
Exit sequence 9-9
F
I
ID Codes 8-65
Fail Safe output 3-4
IEE regulations 1-2
Final Set Variable 8-13
Incorrect code entered (HHT) 10-3
Force Call 8-62
Infra-Red Communication 5-2
Front tamper switch
Inhibit Mode 8-84, 9-33
controller 3-4
Input/Output
functions 5-2
tamper 15-9
Full Set 9-9
Full Set Output 3-4
Func. Enable Time 8-14
Installation
ease of 1-1
guidelines 1-2
Function level 8-36, 9-27
G
IntelliBell
connection 13-2
overview 13-1
programming 13-3
self-activating bell 13-5
Getting Started 7-8
Granted Time 8-42
Green LED
PSU 4-3
IntelliPower Node 5-16
H
battery charging 5-19
battery test 5-19
overview 5-1
Half Set 9-8
Hand Held Terminal
battery save feature 10-2
default code 10-3
file manager 10-6
filesaver 10-1
IR ports 10-2
main menu 10-3
maximum distance 10-2
operation modes 10-3
parallel printer connection 10-2
powering the HHT 10-2
RKD emulation 10-1
serial connection 10-2
Introduction to 3GS 1-1
Intruder Log 7-2
Intruder System
areas 7-2
outputs 7-2
overview 7-2
users 7-2
zones 7-2
IR Enable Time 8-14
variable 8-14
K
Help Menu 8-3, 9-3
Key function (HHT) 10-3
HHT
Keypad Node 2-2, 5-2
main menu 10-3
overview 10-1
Hold-Up Alarm (HUA) Node 5-29
3GS Technical Manaul
Kick Start button 4-3
INDEX
L
powering 14-5
LCD display 9-1
Node
assigning output types 8-23
clearing output assignments 8-23
clearing the database 7-8
initialising 7-8
Learn cards procedure 8-33, 9-25
LED functions 9-2
LEM Node 5-38, 5-41
1Amp PSU 5-41
cabinet 5-40
cabling 5-41
number allowed per system 5-41
overview 5-1
Node Cabinet
8I/O, 6 O, HUA, Encryption 5-11
Node Configure 8-16
Inputs 8-20
Nodes- Information-Monitor 8-18
Nodes-Configure 8-19
Nodes-Information-Find 8-17
Outputs 8-22
Reconfigure Ringnet 8-23
Literal Edit and Holiday Scheduler 8-76
Local Alarm Variable 8-13
Locating a card on the system 8-37, 9-28
Lock time 8-42
Lock/Open Inhibits 9-30
LOG 8-83, 9-32
Node locator system 1-1
Nodes
Log Filter 8-59
branch node 5-10
functionality 5-2
overview 5-1
powering-up for the first time 5-3
wiring 2-3
Log, system 9-22
M
Mains
supply 4-3
Not Selected 9-7, 9-8, 9-9
Manual Door Control 8-48, 9-30
Menu Navigation 8-1
O
Menu options 9-3
On-line 7-8
Installer 8-4
Master 8-5
Open/Lock Inhibit 8-40
Operational temperature 1-2
Modem 12-1
Options, Assign User 8-65
Modem communications 8-61
Output Assignments 8-54
Modem Variable 8-13
Output Log Variable 8-13
Multi-Area setting 8-14
Output Test 8-54
Output Types 8-54
N
Outputs 7-1, 15-5
Name and address
assigning 8-23
of installation 7-8
Names
assign user 8-65
Navigating the Help menu 9-4
Network Router
connecting a local or remote PC 14-3
connecting multiple 14-4
overview 14-1
3GS Technical Manaul
P
Pager Transmitter 7-7
Panelman 3GS
EXE files 17-2
features 17-3
installation 17-5
overview 17-1
INDEX
system requirements 17-4
troubleshooting 17-9
Radio Pager Receiver Unit 5-35
Radio Pager Transmitter Unit 5-34
Parity Serial Port 8-59
Radio Panic Attack Unit (RPA) 5-33
Part Set 9-7
Radio System
Passing Cards 9-27
overview 5-28, 7-7
PDB Upload menu (HHT) 10-5
Remote connection 6-3
Perimeter protection 9-8
Remote Keypad Display (RKD) Node 5-4
Permanent/Momentary door open 9-30
current consumption 5-5
LED status indicators 5-4
node cabinet 5-6
overview 5-1
power connection 5-5
Photo entry (HUA) 8-74
PIN code access 8-46
PIN pad only operation 7-4
Position of devices 1-2
Power Consumption 8-54
Removing alert messages 9-1
Power Supply Unit
Replace/Add/Remove Nodes 8-13
connection 4-3
standby battery 4-3
Power up
requirements 4-3
sequence 4-3
Resistance values 5-2
Restore door menu 9-30
Retrigger 8-14
Ringnet Communications 2-3, 5-2
RPA unit 5-33
battery low 9-23
descritpions 9-20
options 9-21
Powering devices 1-2
Powering the HHT 10-2
Print all Reports 8-56
Printer Serial Port 8-59
Printer, connecting a serial 6-1
S
Printing Service Mode 8-27
Select cards procedure 8-33, 9-25
Printing the Log 9-22
Serial port 15-1
Printing time zone data 8-46
Serial Port Connection
Programming Overview 7-1
PSU
3AMP 4-1
4/8 Amp 4-2
R
Radio field strength (HUA) 8-31
Radio PA Assign 8-70, 9-20
Descriptions 8-72
Options 8-73
RPA’s 8-71
connecting a printer 6-1
direct Connect to a PC/Laptop 6-1
remote communication via modem 6-2
Service Mode 8-23, 8-25
Monitor 8-29
On-Line Report 8-26
Test 8-27
Service Reset Variable 8-13
Set Data Format 8-58
Set Date & Time 8-57
Set Door Protect 8-14
Radio PA Buttons 7-7
Set Up DM1200 8-63
Radio PA Setup 8-24
Setting
Radio PA Test 8-31, 9-23
Radio PA Unit 9-20
3GS Technical Manaul
all areas 9-12
areas 9-11
date and time 9-14
INDEX
the system 9-9
up new time zones 8-46
3 Amp Power Supply Unit 15-2
3GS Controller 15-1
4Amp Power Supply Unit 15-3
6 Output Node 15-7
8 Input/Output Node 15-6
Access Control Node 15-9
DM1200 15-15
Encryption Node 15-12
EUIC 15-14
Hand Held Terminal 15-13
HUA Node 15-10
Intellibell 15-16
IntelliPower Node 15-8
LEM Node 15-11
Network Router 15-17
Setup Cards 8-32, 9-25
Cards- Site Code 8-35
Cards-Assign 8-33
Cards-Formats 8-34
Pass/Void 8-36
Setup SIA 8-51
SIA Code 8-51
Site code 9-29
Soak Mode 8-52
Soak Test Days Variables 8-13
Soft Start 8-79
Stand-Alone Operation 7-4
Standby battery 4-3
Start Types 7-8
Temperature 1-2
Testing
Start Up alert message 7-8
cards 8-38
radio PA units 9-23
Status LEDs 8-1
Stop Bits 8-59
Text entry 9-38
Summer/Winter hour change 9-31
Time Advance 8-75
Suspicion Audible Variable 8-13
Time Zone Setup 8-44
Switched loads 1-2
Time Zones
System Components 2-1
alarm inputs 2-1
Controller 2-1
hand held terminal 2-1
Nodes 2-1
outputs 2-1
PSU 2-1
PSU interface 2-1
ringnet interface 2-1
serial ports 2-1
Setup 8-45
Time zones
and cards 8-46
and doors 8-46
and time slots 8-45
Transmit Name, Serial Port 8-59
Typing Text 8-2, 9-38
U
System Configuration 2-2
Unable to set the system 9-10
System date and time 9-14
Unset/Reset 8-80, 9-5
System ID, Serial Port 8-60
Unsetting
System Integration 1-1
System Keypad 9-2
System Log 8-55, 9-22
an area 9-12
the system 9-5
User ID codes 9-16
User names 9-18
T
User Option Assignments 9-34
Tamper switch
input/output node 5-13
Technical Specifications
3GS Technical Manaul
User reset procedure 9-13
User Setup 8-64, 9-16
UTP category cable 2-3
INDEX
V
Z
Variables 8-25
Zone attributes 8-10
assigning 8-25
Verify Time Variable 8-13
Viewing the log 9-22
Zone inputs
on IntelliPower Node 5-16
Visitor level 8-36, 9-27
Zone Status 3-4, 5-2, 5-5, 5-9, 5-17, 5-24, 525, 5-30, 5-43
Voiding Cards 8-37, 9-28
Zones
disabling 8-53
inhibiting a 9-33
W
Walktest 8-27
Warm Start 7-8
Y
Year 2000 9-14
and 3GS systems 9-14
Yellow LED
Controller 5-4
PSU 4-2
3GS Technical Manaul
Zones/Doors/Vars 8-6
Descriptions 8-7
Extra 8-15
Options 8-8
Variables 8-12